QCPU-A(A Mode),USER MANUAL

QCPU-A(A Mode)
User's Manual
Mitsubishi Programmable
Logic Controller Q02CPU-A
Q02HCPU-A
Q06HCPU-A
• SAFETY PRECAUTIONS •
(Read these precautions before using.)
When using Mitsubishi equipment, thoroughly read this manual and the associated manuals
introduced in the manual. Also pay careful attention to safety and handle the module properly.
These precautions apply only to Mitsubishi equipment. Refer to the CPU module user’s manual for a
description of the PC system safety precautions.
These • SAFETY PRECAUTIONS • classify the safety precautions into two categories: "DANGER"
and "CAUTION".
Procedures which may lead to a dangerous condition and cause

! DANGER death or serious injury if not carried out properly.
Procedures which may lead to a dangerous condition and cause
! CAUTION superficial to medium injury, or physical damage only, if not carried
out properly.
Depending on circumstances, procedures indicated by ! CAUTION may also be linked to serious

results.
In any case, it is important to follow the directions for usage.
Store this manual in a safe place so that you can take it out and read it whenever necessary. Always
forward it to the end user.
[Design Precautions]
! DANGER
• Install a safety circuit external to the PC that keeps the entire system safe even when there are
problems with the external power supply or the PC main module. Otherwise, trouble could result
from erroneous output or malfunction.
(1) Configure the following circuits outside the PC: emergency stop circuit, protection circuit,
interlocking circuit for opposite operations such as forward and reverse operations, and
interlocking circuit for machine damage prevention such as upper/lower limit for positioning.
(2) When the PC detects the following problems, it will stop calculation and turn off all output.
The power supply module has an over current protection device and over voltage
protection device.
The PC CPUs self-diagnostic functions, such as the watchdog timer error, detect
problems.
In addition, all output will be turned on when there are problems that the PC CPU cannot
detect, such as in the I/O controller. Build a failsafe circuit exterior to the PC that will make
sure the equipment operates safely at such times.
Refer to the Section 8.1 in this manual for example failsafe circuits.
(3) Output could be left on or off when there is trouble in the output module’s relay or transistor.
So, build an external monitoring circuit that will monitor any single output that could cause
serious trouble.
• If current over the rating or over-current due to a load short-circuit flows for a long term, it may
cause smoke or fire. Prepare an external safety circuit, such as a fuse.
• Build a circuit that turns on the external power supply when the PC main module power supply is
turned on. If the external power supply is turned on first, it could result in erroneous output or
malfunction.
A-1
[Design Precautions]
! DANGER
• When there are communication faulty with the data link, the communication faulty station will
enter the following condition. Build an interlock circuit into the PC program that will make sure
the system operates safely by using the communication state information.
Not doing so could result in erroneous output or malfunction.
(1) For the data link data, the data prior to the communication error will be held.
(2) The MELSECNET (II, /B, /10) remote I/O station will turn all output off.
(3) The MELSECNET/MINI-S3 remote I/O station will hold the output or turn all output off
depending on the E.C. mode setting.
Refer to manuals for corresponding data link system for how to detect the communication faulty
station and the operation status when a communication error occurred.
• When configuring a system, do not leave any slots vacant on the base. Should there be any
vacant slots, always use a blank cover (A1SG60) or dummy module (A1SG62).
If the cover is not attached, the module's internal parts may be dispersed when a short-circuit
test is performed or overcurrent/overvoltage is accidentally applied to the external I/O area.
! CAUTION
• Do not bunch the control wires or communication cable with the main circuit or power wires, or
install them close to each other.
They should be installed 100mm (3.94 inch) or more from each other.
Not doing so could result in noise that would cause malfunction.
• When controlling items like lamp load, heater or solenoid valve using an out put module, large
current (approximately ten times greater than that present in normal circumstances) may flow
when the output is turned OFF ON. Take measures such as replacing the module with one
having sufficient rated current.
[Installation Precautions]
! CAUTION
• Use the PC in the environment given in the general specification section of the manual.
Using the PC outside the range of the general specifications may result in electric shock, fire, or
malfunction or may damage or degrade the product.
• Before mounting the module, securely insert the projection at the bottom of the module into the
fixing hole on the base module.
(The AnS series module must be tightened to the base module at the specified tightening
torque.)
An improperly mounted module may result in malfunction, failure, or falling.
Excessive screw tightening may cause falling due to the breakage of the screw or module,
short-circuit, or malfunction.
A-2
[Installation Precautions]
! CAUTION
• Tighten the screw within the range of specified torque.
If the screws are loose, it may result in fallout, short circuits, or malfunctions.
Tightening the screws too far may cause damage to the screw and/or the module, resulting in
fallout, short circuits, or malfunction.
• When installing extension cables, be sure that the base unit and the module connectors are
installed correctly. After installation, check them for looseness. Poor connections could result in
erroneous input and erroneous output.
• Correctly connect the memory card installation connector to the memory card. After installation,
make sure that the connection is not loose. A poor connection could result in malfunction.
• Do not directly touch the module’s conductive parts or electronic components.
Doing so could cause malfunction or failure in the module.
[Wiring Precations]
! DANGER
• Completely turn off the external power supply when installing or wiring. Not completely turning
off all power supply could result in electric shock or damage to the product.
• When turning on the power or operating the module after installation or wiring work, be sure that
the module’s terminal covers are correctly attached. Not attaching the terminal covers could
result in electric shock.
! CAUTION
• Be sure to ground the FG terminals and LG terminals with a special PC ground of Type 3 or
above. Not doing so could result in electric shock or malfunction.
• When wiring in the PC, check the rated voltage and terminal layout of the wiring, and make sure
the wiring is done correctly. Connecting a power supply that differs from the rated voltage or
wiring it incorrectly may cause fire or breakdown.
• Do not connect multiple power supply modules in parallel.
Doing so could cause overheating, fire, or damage to the power supply module.
• Tighten the terminal screws with the specified torque.
If the terminal screws are loose, it could result in short circuits, fire, or malfunction.
Tightening the screws too far may cause damage to the screw and/or the module, resulting in
fallout, short circuits, or malfunction.
• A protective label is attached on the top of the CPU module to avoid foreign materials such as
wires from entering inside during wiring process.
Do not remove the label until the wiring is completed. Before starting the system, be sure to
remove the label to ensure heat radiation.
• External connections shall be crimped or pressure welded with the specified tools, or correctly
soldered.
For information regarding the crimping and pressure welding tools, refer to the I/O module’s user
manual. Imperfect connections could result in short circuit, fires, or malfunction.
A-3
[Starting and Maintenance Precautions]
! DANGER
• Do not touch the terminals while power is on. Doing so could cause shock or malfunction.
• Correctly connect the battery. Also, do not change, disassemble, heat, place in fire, short circuit,
or solder the battery.
Mishandling of the battery can cause overheating or cracks which could result in injury and fires.
• Make sure to switch all phases of the external power supply off before cleaning or re-tightening
screws. If you do not switch off the external power supply, it will cause electric shock.
If the screws are loose, it may result in fallout, short circuit, or malfunction. Tightening the
screws too far may cause damages to the screws and/or the module, resulting in fallout, short
circuits, or malfunction.
! CAUTION
• Carefully read manuals and confirm that it is safe enough before performing on-line operations
which require to connect peripheral devices to an operating CPU module. (especially when
modifying a program, performing forced output, or modifying the operation status.)
Misoperation may damage the module or cause accidents.
• Do not disassemble or rebuild the module.
It may cause accidents, malfunction, injury, or fire.
• When using a cellular phone, keep it 25 cm or more away from the PC.
Otherwise, malfunction may result.
• Make sure to switch all phases of the external power supply off before mounting or removing the
module. If you do not switch off the external power supply, it will cause failure or malfunction of
the module.
[Disposal Precautions]
! CAUTION
• Disposing of this product, treat it as industrial waste.
A-4
REVISIONS
* The manual number is given on the bottom left of the back cover.
Print Date * Manual Number Revision
Dec., 1999 SH (NA) 080065-A First printing
Mar., 2000 SH (NA) 080065-B Addition of model
QA1S33B
Japanese Manual Version SH-080066-B
This manual does not imply guarantee or implementation right for industrial ownership or implementation of other rights.
Mitsubishi Electric Corporation is not responsible for industrial ownership problems caused by use of the contents of this
manual.
 1999 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION
A-5
INTRODUCTION
Thank you for choosing a Mitsubishi MELSEC-Q Series General Purpose Programmable Controller.
Before using your new PC, please read this manual thoroughly to gain an understanding of its functions so you
can use it properly.
Please forward a copy of this manual to the end user.
CONTENTS
1. OVERVIEW 1- 1 to 1- 2
1.1 Features ................................................................................................................................................... 1- 2
2. SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 2- 1 to 2- 16
2.1 System Configuration............................................................................................................................... 2- 1

2.2 Precautions when configuring the system .............................................................................................. 2- 2
2.2.1 Hardware ........................................................................................................................................... 2- 2
2.2.2 Software package.............................................................................................................................. 2- 3
2.2.3 Precautions when using GPP function software packages and A8PU peripheral devices which are
not compatible with AnU ................................................................................................................... 2- 6
2.3 System Equipment................................................................................................................................... 2- 7
2.4 System Configuration Overview ............................................................................................................. 2- 15
2.4.1 QCPU-A (A mode) system............................................................................................................... 2- 16
3. GENERAL SPECIFICATION 3- 1 to 3- 2
4. CPU MODULE 4- 1 to 4- 38
4.1 Performance Specification....................................................................................................................... 4- 1

4.1.1 Overview of operation processing .................................................................................................... 4- 3
4.1.2 Operation processing of RUN, STOP, PAUSE, and STEP RUN.................................................... 4- 5
4.1.3 Operation processing upon momentary power failure..................................................................... 4- 7
4.1.4 Self-diagnosis .................................................................................................................................... 4- 8
4.1.5 Device list ......................................................................................................................................... 4- 10
4.2 Parameter Setting Ranges ..................................................................................................................... 4- 11
4.2.1 List of parameter setting range ........................................................................................................ 4- 11
4.2.2 Memory capacity setting (for main program, file register, comment, etc.) ..................................... 4- 13
4.2.3 Setting ranges of timer and counter ................................................................................................ 4- 16
4.2.4 I/O devices........................................................................................................................................ 4- 18
4.2.5 I/O allocation of special function modules ....................................................................................... 4- 18
4.2.6 MELSECNET/MINI (S3) automatic refresh..................................................................................... 4- 19
4.3 Function List ............................................................................................................................................ 4- 23
4.4 Functions added to QCPU-A .................................................................................................................. 4- 25
4.4.1 Boot operation from standard ROM................................................................................................. 4- 25
4.4.2 Usage of 1ms timer .......................................................................................................................... 4- 28
A-6
4.4.3 Sequence accumulation time processing........................................................................................ 4- 31
4.5 Precautions When Handling the Module................................................................................................ 4- 33
4.6 Part Names and Settings of the CPU Module........................................................................................ 4- 34
4.6.1 Part names and settings .................................................................................................................. 4- 34
4.6.2 Switch operation after program write............................................................................................... 4- 37
4.6.3 Latch clear operation........................................................................................................................ 4- 37
4.6.4 Installation and removal of memory card during power on............................................................. 4- 37
5. POWER SUPPLY MODULE 5- 1 to 5- 4
5.1 Specifications ........................................................................................................................................... 5- 1

5.2 Name and Setting of Each Part ............................................................................................................... 5- 3
5.2.1 Name of each part of different power supply modules is provided below....................................... 5- 3
6. BASE MODULE AND EXPANSION CABLE 6- 1 to 6- 6
6.1 Specifications of Base Modules............................................................................................................... 6- 1

6.2 Specifications of Expansion Cable .......................................................................................................... 6- 2
6.3 Part Names of Base Module.................................................................................................................... 6- 3
6.4 Setting the Expansion Stage Numbers ................................................................................................... 6- 5
7. MEMORY CARD AND BATTERY 7- 1 to 7- 8
7.1 Specifications of Memory Card................................................................................................................ 7- 1

7.2 Specifications of Battery (for CPU module and memory card)............................................................... 7- 1
7.3 Handling the Memory Card...................................................................................................................... 7- 2
7.4 Part Names of Memory Card................................................................................................................... 7- 2
7.5 Insertion/Removal of the Memory Card .................................................................................................. 7- 3
7.6 Inserting Batteries (for CPU module and memory card)......................................................................... 7- 4
7.7 Battery Replacement ............................................................................................................................... 7- 5
7.7.1 Battery service life ............................................................................................................................. 7- 6
7.7.2 Battery replacement procedure ........................................................................................................ 7- 7
8. EMC DIRECTIVE AND LOW-VOLTAGE INSTRUCTION 8- 1 to 8- 12
8.1 Requirements for Compliance to EMC Directive .................................................................................... 8- 1

8.1.1 Standards on EMC Directive ............................................................................................................ 8- 1
8.1.2 Control cabinet .................................................................................................................................. 8- 2
8.1.3 Cables................................................................................................................................................ 8- 3
8.1.4 Power supply module........................................................................................................................ 8- 6
8.1.5 Ferrite core ........................................................................................................................................ 8- 7
8.1.6 Noise filter (power supply line filter).................................................................................................. 8- 7
8.2 Requirement to Conform to the Low-Voltage Instruction ....................................................................... 8- 8
8.2.1 Standard applied for MELSEC-AnS ................................................................................................. 8- 8
8.2.2 Precautions when using the MELSEC-AnS series PC .................................................................... 8- 8
8.2.3 Power supply..................................................................................................................................... 8- 9
8.2.4 Control box ....................................................................................................................................... 8- 10
8.2.5 Module installation............................................................................................................................ 8- 10
A-7
8.2.6 Grounding......................................................................................................................................... 8- 11
8.2.7 External wiring .................................................................................................................................. 8- 11
9. LOADING AND INSTALLATION 9- 1 to 9- 22
9.1 Module Installation ................................................................................................................................... 9- 1

9.1.1 Precautions on handling modules .................................................................................................... 9- 1
9.1.2 Precautions on the base module installation.................................................................................... 9- 2
9.1.3 Installing/removing the dust-protective cover................................................................................... 9- 5
9.1.4 Installing/removing modules ............................................................................................................. 9- 6
9.1.5 Setting expansion stages for the expansion base module ............................................................. 9- 10
9.1.6 Connecting/disconnecting the expansion cable.............................................................................. 9- 12
9.2 Concept of Fail-safe Circuit..................................................................................................................... 9- 15
9.3 Installation Environment.......................................................................................................................... 9- 18
9.4 Calculation Method of Heat Amount Generated by the PC................................................................... 9- 18
9.5 Wiring the power supply.......................................................................................................................... 9- 20
9.6 Precautions on the Connection with an Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS)...................................... 9- 22
10. MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION 10- 1 to 10- 4
10.1 Routine Inspection ............................................................................................................................... 10- 2

10.2 Periodic Inspection............................................................................................................................... 10- 3
11. TROUBLESHOOTING 11- 1 to 11- 22
11.1 Fundamentals of Troubleshooting....................................................................................................... 11- 1

11.2 Troubleshooting ................................................................................................................................... 11- 2
11.2.1 Troubleshooting flowchart............................................................................................................. 11- 2
11.2.2 Flowchart for actions when the "POWER" LED is turned OFF ................................................... 11- 3
11.2.3 Flowchart for actions when the "MODE" LED turns OFF ............................................................ 11- 4
11.2.4 Flowchart for actions when the "RUN" LED is turned OFF ......................................................... 11- 5
11.2.5 Flowchart for actions when the "RUN" LED is flashing................................................................ 11- 6
11.2.6 Flowchart for actions when the "ERROR" LED is turned ON...................................................... 11- 7
11.2.7 Flowchart for actions when the "ERROR" LED is flashing .......................................................... 11- 8
11.2.8 Flowchart for actions when the output module's output load does not turn ON ......................... 11- 9
11.2.9 Flowchart for actions when the program cannot be written........................................................ 11- 10
11.3 Error Code List .................................................................................................................................... 11- 11
11.3.1 Procedure to read an error code ................................................................................................. 11- 11
11.3.2 Error code list ............................................................................................................................... 11- 11
11.4 Possible Troubles with I/O Modules ................................................................................................... 11- 20
11.4.1 Troubles with the input circuit and the countermeasures ........................................................... 11- 20
11.4.2 Possible troubles in the output circuit .......................................................................................... 11- 22
A-8
APPENDICES APP- 1 to APP- 69
Appendix 1 Instruction List........................................................................................................................APP- 1

Appendix 2 Lists of Special Relays and Special Registers .....................................................................APP- 9
Appendix 2.1 List of special relays........................................................................................................APP- 9
Appendix 2.2 Special relays for link .....................................................................................................APP- 20
Appendix 2.3 Special registers ............................................................................................................APP- 23
Appendix 2.4 Special registers for link.................................................................................................APP- 40
Appendix 3 Peripheral Devices................................................................................................................APP- 45
Appendix 4 Precautions When the Existing Sequence Programs Are Diverted for the QCPU-A.........APP- 46
Appendix 4.1 Instructions with different specifications........................................................................APP- 46
Appendix 4.2 Special relays and special registers with different specifications.................................APP- 47
Appendix 4.3 Parameter setting...........................................................................................................APP- 48
Appendix 4.4 I/O control method .........................................................................................................APP- 49
Appendix 4.5 Microcomputer program ................................................................................................APP- 50
Appendix 4.6 Processing of the index register ....................................................................................APP- 50
Appendix 5 List of Instruction Processing Time ......................................................................................APP- 51
Appendix 6 Dimensions ...........................................................................................................................APP- 65
Appendix 6.1 Dimensions of CPU module ..........................................................................................APP- 65
Appendix 6.2 Power supply modules ..................................................................................................APP- 66
Appendix 6.3 Dimensions of base module ..........................................................................................APP- 67
A-9
About Manuals
The following manuals are also related to this product.

In necessary, order them by quoting the details in the tables below.
Related Manuals
Manual Number
Manual Name
(Model Code)
ACPU Programming Manual (Fundamentals)
IB-66249
Describes programming methods necessary for creating programs, device names, parameters, program
(13J740)
types, memory area configuration, and so on. (Sold separately)
ACPU Programming Manual (Common Instructions)

IB-66250
Describes how to use the sequence instruction, basic instructions, applied instructions and
(13J741)
microcomputer programs. (Sold separately)
AnSHCPU/AnACPU/AnUCPU Programming Manual (Dedicated Instructions)

IB-66251
Describes instructions that have been expanded for Q02CPU-A, Q02HCPU-A, and Q06HCPU-A.
(13J742)
(Sold separately)
AnACPU/AnUCPU Programming Manual (AD57 Instructions)

IB-66257
Describes dedicated instructions for A2USHCPU-S1 to control the AD57 (S1)/AD58 controller module.
(13J743)
(Sold separately)
AnACPU/AnUCPU Programming Manual (PID Instructions) IB-66258

Describes dedicated instructions for A2USHCPU-S1 to perform the PID control. (Sold separately) (13J744)
MELSAP-II (SFC) Programming Manual
IB-66361
Describes the specifications, functions, instructions, and programming methods for SFC programming
(13JF40)
using MELSAP II. (Sold separately) (Sold separately)
AnS Module type I/O User's Manual IB-66541

Describes the specification of the compact building block type I/O module. (Sold separately) (13JE81)
A - 10
Abbreviations and generic names used in this manual
In this manual, the following abbreviations and generic names are used to explain
about QCPU-A unless explicitly instructed.
Abbreviation/generic name Description

Q02CPU-A Abbreviation for Q02CPU-A general-purpose programming logic controller
Q02HCPU-A Abbreviation for Q02HCPU-A general-purpose programming logic controller
Q06HCPU-A Abbreviation for Q06HCPU-A general-purpose programming logic controller
QCPU-A Generic name for Q02CPU-A, Q02HCPU-A, and Q06HCPU-A
CC-Link Abbreviation for Control & Communication link system
Generic name for A0J2HCPU, A1SCPU, A1SCPU-S1, A1SCPUC24-R2, A1SHCPU,
A1SJCPU, A1SJCPU-S3, A1SJHCPU, A1SJHCPU-S8, A1NCPU, A2CCPU,
AnNCPU
A2CCPUC24, A2CCPUC24-PRF, A2CJCPU, A2NCPU, A2NCPU-S1, A2SCPU,
A2SCPU-S1, A2SHCPU, A2USHCPU-S1, and A1FXCPU
Generic name for A2ACPU, A2ACPU-S1, A2ACPUP21/R21, A2ACPUP21/R21-S1,
AnACPU
A3ACPUP21/R21, A3NCPU, and A3ACPU
Generic name for A2UCPU, A2UCPU-S1, A2ASCPU, A2ASCPU-S1, A2ASCPU-S30,
AnUCPU
A2USHCPU-S1, A3UCPU, and A4UCPU
Generic name for Q2ACPU,Q2ACPU-S1, Q2ASCPU, Q2ASCPU-S1, Q2ASHCPU,
QnACPU
Q2ASHCPU-S1, Q3ACPU, Q4ACPU, and Q4ARCPU
ACPU Generic name for AnNCPU, AnACPU, and AnUCPU
A mode Generic name for Q02CPU-A, Q02HCPU-A, and Q06HCPU-A
QCPU
Q mode Generic name for Q02CPU, Q02HCPU, Q06HCPU, Q12HCPU, and Q25HCPU
Microsoft Windows, Microsoft Windows NT, Microsoft Visual Basic, Microsoft Visual C++, and MS-DOS are
registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation, USA.
PC98-NX is a registered trademark of NEC Corporation.
Other company names and product names appear in the text are registered trademarks or trademarks of
their respective companies.
A - 11
MEMO
A - 12
1 OVERVIEW
MELSEC-Q
1. OVERVIEW
1
This User's Manual describes the performance, functions, and handling method of the
QCPU-A general purpose PC, as well as the specifications and handling of the
memory card, power supply module and the base module.
The programming modules and software packages have to be compatible with the
upgraded A2UCPU, A2UCPU-S1, A3UCPU, and A4UCPU (abbreviated as AnUCPU
hereafter).
When the conventional programming modules and software packages are used, the
usable range varies depending on the model of the CPU (PC model name). (Refer to
Section 2.2.3.)
Refer to the list of components in Section 2.3 for various modules which can be used
with the QCPU-A.
Refer to Section 2.2.1 for the special function modules which have limited range of
usable devices.
(1) Supplied parts

Item Name Type name Quantity
Q02CPU-A
CPU module Q02HCPU-A 1
Q06HCPU-A
Battery Q6BAT 1
1-1
1 OVERVIEW
MELSEC-Q
1.1 Features
QCPU-A (A mode) has the following features when compared with the A2USHCPU-
S1.
(1) Faster operation processing

QCPU-A offers significantly faster operation processing than that of A2USHCPU-
S1.
Item Q02CPU-A Q02HCPU-A, Q06HCPU-A A2USHCPU-S1
Operation processing
79ns 34ns 90ns
speed 1
1: I/O processing: At refresh or LD instruction
(2) Larger program capacity

With Q06HCPU-A, the program capacity can be expanded.
Moreover, Q06HCPU-A allows the creation of sub programs.
Item Q06HCPU-A A2USHCPU-S1
30k steps (Main program)
Program capacity + 30k step
30k steps (Sub program)
(3) More actual I/O points

QCPU-A offers 4096 actual I/O points, 4 times that of A2USHCPU-S1.
Item Q02CPU-A, Q02HCPU-A,Q06HCPU-A A2USHCPU-S1
Actual I/O points 4096 1024
(4) More expansion stages

Up to 7 stages of expansion base module can be added.
(5) Faster communication speed with peripheral devices

The communication speed with peripheral devices is considerably improved than
that of A2USHCPU-S1.
Item Q02CPU-A, Q02HCPU-A, Q06HCPU-A A2USHCPU-S1
Communication
115.2 1 9.6
speed (kbps)
1: Designate 9.6kbps when using GPP of SW3D5C-GPPW or earlier.
1-2
2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
MELSEC-Q
2. SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
This chapter describes the system configuration of QCPU-A, precautions for the use of
the system, and system equipment.
2.1 System Configuration 2

This section describes the device configuration in the QCPU-A system, the
configuration of peripheral devices, and the overview of the system configuration.
(1) Device configuration in the QCPU-A system
MITSUBISHI
LITHIUM BATTERY
MITSUBISHI
QCPU-A
Memory card 1 Battery
(Q02CPU-A, Q02HCPU-A,
(Q2MEM-1MBS) (Q6BAT)
Q06HCPU-A)
1 The operation is not guaranteed

for the use of commercially
available memory cards.
Basic base module Q series power supply, I/O, or

(QA1S33B, QA1S35B, QA1S38B) intelligent function modules
Expansion of AnS series modules
Expansion cable
QA1S6 expansion base module
(QC06B, QC12B, QC30B,
(QA1S65B, QA1S68B)
QC50B, QC100B)
AnS series power supply, I/O, or

special function modules
2-1
MELSEC-Q
2.2 Precautions when configuring the system
The precautions when configuring the QCPU-A (A mode) system are as follows:
2.2.1 Hardware
(1) A total of 64 I/O modules or special function modules at maximum can be

mounted to each of the basic base module or the expansion base module.
(2) Up to seven expansion base modules can be connected in the system.

(Up to eight modules when the basic base module is included.)
(3) The total length of the expansion cable should be 13.2 m or less.
(4) The following modules have some limitations for the number of modules to be
mounted.
Module No. of mountable modules
MELSECNET/10 network module
Up to 4 modules
A1SJ71LP21, A1SJ71BR11
UP to 4 modules in total
MELSECNET(II)/B data link module
Up to 2 modules
A1SJ71AP21, A1SJ71AR21, A1SJ71AT21B
Interruption module: A1SI61 1 module
AnS series special function module Up to 6 modules in total
: Applies to the following modules. Modules other than the followings do not have any limitations.
Ethernet interface module: A1SJ71E71B2-S3 (-B5-S3)
Calculating machine link module: A1SJ71UC24-R2 (-R4/-PRF)
CC-Link module (in intelligent mode): A1SJ61BT11
Interface module for data transmission: A1SJ71CMO-S3
Intelligent communication module: A1SD51S
ID interface module: A1SD21-S1
JEMANET (JPCN-1) master module: A1SJ71J92-S3 (only when GET/PUT service is used)
(5) The accessible device range will be limited when the following modules are used:
Accessible device range in CPU
Target module
Device Accessible range
Input (X), output (Y) X/Y0~7FF
Internal relay (M) M0~8191
MELSECNET(II) data link module:
Latch relay (L) M0~8191
A1SJ71AP21, A1SJ71AR21
Link relay (B) B0~FFF
MELSECNET/B data link module:
Timer (T) T0~2047
A1SJ71AT21B
Counter (C) C0~1023
JEMANET interface module:
Data register (D) D0~6143
A1SJ71J92-S3
Link register (W) W0~FFF
Annunciator (F) F0~2047
(6) Among the graphic operation terminal GOT series, the GOT-A900/800 series can
be used; however, bus connection is not available.
2-2
MELSEC-Q
(7) It is recommended that the network and data link modules are mounted to the
basic base module.
When these modules are mounted to the expansion base module, the link refresh
time will become longer than the case where they are mounted to the basic base
module.
2.2.2 Software package
(1) Type name setting when starting the GPP function software
package
The following table shows the GPP function software package that can be used
to create the QCPU-A (A mode) program, and the PC type setting at startup.
When using SW4D5C-GPPW, select the PC type from Q02(H)-A or Q06H-A
according to the CPU to be used.
When using the peripheral devices and GPP function software package of
SW3D5C-GPPW or earlier, specify the PC type name as "A4U". If "A4U" is not
found in PC type names, specify "A3A." If both "A4U" and "A3A" are not found,
specify "A3H."
Note that when "A4U" is specified, the available device range will be limited.
Type name setting for PC CPU
Peripheral device Software package type name to start system
Q02(H)CPU-A Q06HCPU-A
SW4D5C-GPPW or later Q02(H)-A Q06H-A
SW3D5 -GPPW or earlier A4U A4U
PC9801
SW NX-GPPA A4U A4U
SW0N-GPPA A3A A3A
SW4D5C-GPPW or later Q02(H)-A Q06H-A
DOS/V SW3D5 -GPPW or earlier
A4U A4U
SW IVD-GPPA
SW0RX-GPPA
A3A A3A
A7PHP SW0SRX-GPPA
SW SRXV-GPPA A4U A4U
A7HGP SW HX-GPPA A4U A4U
SW3GP-GPPA A3H A3H
A6PHP SW4GP-GPPA A3A A3A
SW1GP-GPPAU A4U A4U
SW3-GPPA, SW-3GP-GPPA A3H A3H
A6GPP SW4GP-GPPA A3A A3A
SW1GP-GPPAU A4U A4U
SW0SRX-GPPA A3A A3A
A7LMS
SW SRXV-GPPA A4U A4U
A75LMS SW SRXV-GPPA A4U A4U
2-3
MELSEC-Q
POINTS
(1) Old software packages other than listed above cannot be used.
(2) To construct MELSECNET/10 network system with QCPU-A (A mode), use the
AnU-compatible GPP function software package (which includes "A4U" in its
PC type name).
You cannot construct a network with the GPP function software package which
is not compatible with AnU (which does not include "A4U" in its PC type name).
(3) Communication with GPPW at 115.2kbps may not be available depending on
the peripheral devices. In such a case, select the lower communication speed.
(4) When using Q02(H)CPU-A and conventional peripheral devices and setting the
PC type as "A4U," designate the main program setting to 28k steps or less with
parameters. When "Main + parameter" is written with the PC with the setting of
29k steps or more, "Cannot communicate with PC" is displayed and writing to
the CPU is disabled.
(5) Sub programs cannot be used with Q02(H)CPU-A. When using conventiona
peripheral devices and setting the PC type as "A4U," do not specify any sub
programs. If sub programs are specified, "Cannot communicate with PC" is
displayed.
With Q06HCPU, sub program 1 can be used, but sub programs 2 and 3
cannot.
When sub program 2 or 3 is specified, the same message above is displayed.
2-4
MELSEC-Q
(2) Utility package

(a) None of the following utility packages for A6GPP/A6PHP can be used:
• SW -AD57P The packages marked with can execute
• SW -UTLP-FN0 the same functions using the dedicated
• SW -UTLP-FN1 instructions. Refer to AnACPU/AnUCPU
• SW -UTLP-PID Programming Manual (Dedicated
• SW -SIMA Instruction) for details.
• SW -UTLP-FD1
• SW -SAPA
REMARK
The characters generators and canvas, which are necessary for AD57(S1), are
created on the peripheral device using the SW -AD57P.
POINTS
(1) Packages which access the QCPU-A by specifying a device in the utility
package can specify only in the device range for A3ACPU or A3HCPU
equivalent. (Refer to Section 2.2.3.)
(2) Use an AnU-compatible utility package to use the device range for the QCPU-
A. (Example: SW1IVD-SAP2, etc.)
2-5
MELSEC-Q
2.2.3 Precautions when using GPP function software packages and A8PU peripheral
devices which are not compatible with AnU
When the QCPU-A is started up using a GPP function software package not
compatible with AnU (the PC model name is "A3A" or "A3H") or from an A8PU
peripheral device (including A7PU and P7PUS), the usable device range is limited as
follows:
(1) Usable device range

System FD peripheral AnACPU-compatible module A3HCPU-compatible module
device Modules whose PC model for system FD Modules whose PC model for system FD A7PU/
A8PU
Item startup is "A3A" startup is "A3H" A7PUS
Instruction (sequence/basic/
All instructions can be used.
application/dedicated)
Program capacity A maximum of 14k steps can be used for the main program.
X/Y0 to 7FF can be used. X/Y0 to 7FF can be used.
I/O device points (X/Y)
(X/Y800 to 1FFF cannot be used.) (X/Y800 to 1FFF cannot be used.)
M/L/S0 to 2047 can be used.
M, L, S relay M/L/S0 to 8191 can be used.
(M/L/S2048 to 8191 cannot be used.)
B0 to BFFF can be used B0 to B3FF can be used.
Link relay (B)
(B1000 to B1FFF cannot be used.) (B400 to B1FFF cannot be used.)
T0 to T255 can be used.
Timer (T) T0 to T2047 can be used.
(T256 to T2047 cannot be used.)
C0 to C255 can be used.
Counter (C) C0 to C1023 can be used.
(C256 to C1023 cannot be used.)
D0 to D6143 can be used. D0 to D1023 can be used.
Data register (D)
(D6144 to D8191 cannot be used.) (D1024 to D8191 cannot be used.)
W0 to WFFF can be used. W0 to W3FF can be used.
Link register (W)
(W1000 to W1FFF cannot be used.) (W400 to W1FFF cannot be used.)
F0 to F255 can be used.
Annunciator (F) F0 to F2047 can be used.
(F256 to F2047 cannot be used.)
V and Z can be used.
Index register (V, Z) V, V1 to V6, Z, and Z1 to Z6 can be used.
(V1 to V6 and Z1 to Z6 cannot be used.)
Expanded comment A maximum of 3968 points Unusable
Latch (power failure
The device range shown above can be latched. The device range shown above can be latched.
compensation) range
Number of I/O occupied points and the Number of I/O occupied points can be
I/O assignment
module model can be registered. registered.
(1) The device range other than listed above is the same as that of QCPU-A.
(2) Refer to the operation manual of each peripheral device for available
functions.
2-6
MELSEC-Q
2.3 System Equipment
The equipment that can be used in the QCPU-A (A mode) system is as follows.
Use the power supply module, I/O module, special function module, and network
module that are designed for the AnS series. You cannot use the power supply
module, I/O module, special function module, and network module for the Q series, as
well as the special function module and network module for the Q2AS series.
The base module and expansion cable for the AnS series and A6SIM-X64Y64 cannot
be used either. For details, refer to Q Series Data Book.
Number of occupied Current
points (points) consumption
Item Type name Description
[I/O allocation (A)
module type] DC5V DC24V
Program capacity: 28k steps, I/O points: 4096,
Q02CPU-A — 0.60 —
Processing speed for basic instruction: 79ns
Program capacity: 28k steps, I/O points: 4096,
CPU module Q02HCPU-A — 0.64 —
Processing speed for basic instruction: 34ns
Program capacity: 30k steps × 2 (Main/sub), I/O points:
Q06HCPU-A — 0.64 —
4096, Processing speed for basic instruction: 34ns
Memory card Q2MEM-1MBS SRAM type: 1 MB — — —
AnS series module mounting base (power supply
QA1S33B — 0.107 —
module + CPU + 3 slots for other module)
AnS series module mounting base (power supply 0.117
Basic base module QA1S35B — —
module + CPU + 5 slots for other module) (0.086)
QA1S38B — —
module + CPU + 8 slots for other module) (0.086)
QA1S65B — —
module + 5 slots for other module) (0.088)
Expansion base module
QA1S68B — —
module + 8 slots for other module) (0.090)
QC06B 0.6-m expansion base cable — —
Expansion cable QC30B 3.0-m expansion base cable — —
Battery for retaining the contents of program memory
Battery Q6BAT — — —
and devices in case of power failure
Cable QC30R2 Communication cable for peripheral devices — — —
: The parenthesized values are for those products not provided for CE mark.
POINTS
(1) A USB port cannot be used with QCPU-A (A mode).
(2) A RS232/422 conversion cable is required to use the conventional peripheral
devices (A6GPP, A8PUJ, etc.).
Recommended cable: FA-CNV2402CBL (2m), FA-CNV2405CBL (5m)
Contact: Mitsubishi Electric Engineering Corp.
2-7
MELSEC-Q
Number of occupied Current consumption

Item Mode Description points (points) 5VDC 24VDC Remark
[I/O allocation module type] (A) (A)
A1S61PN 5VDC, 5A Installed in the

100/200VAC input power supply slot
Power supply of the basic base
A1S62PN 5VDC, 3A/24VDC, 0.6A —— —— ——
module module and
expansion base
A1S63P 5VDC, 5A 24VDC input module.
A1SX10 16-point 100VAC input module 16 [16 input points] 0.05 ——

A1SX10EU 16-point 100VAC input module 16 [16 input points] 0.05 ——
A1SX20 16-point 200VAC input module 16 [16 input points] 0.05 ——
A1SX20EU 16-point 200VAC input module 16 [16 input points] 0.05 ——
A1SX30 16-point 12/24VDC, 12/24VAC input module 16 [16 input points] 0.05 ——
A1SX40 16-point 12/24VDC input module 16 [16 input points] 0.05 ——
A1SX40-S1 16-point 24VDC input module 16 [16 input points] 0.05 ——
32-point 24VDC input module, high-speed
A1SX41-S1 32 [32 input points] 0.120 ——
sink type, connector included
Input module
64-point 24VDC input module, high-speed
sink type, connector included
A1SX80 16-point 12/24VDC sink/source input module 16 [16 input points] 0.05 ——
A1SX80-S1 16-point 24VDC sink/source input module 16 [16 input points] 0.05 ——
A1SX81 32-point 12/24VDC sink/source input module 32 [32 input points] 0.08 ——
64-point 24VDC input module, sink/source
type, connector included
A1SY10 16-point relay contact output module (2A) 16 [16 output points] 0.12 0.09
A1SY10EU 16-point relay contact output module (2A) 16 [16 output points] 0.12 0.09
A1SY14EU 12-point relay contact output module (2A) 16 [16 output points] 0.12 0.10
8-point relay contact output module (2A) for
A1SY18A 16 [16 output points] 0.24 0.075
independent contacts
8-point relay contact output module (2A) for
A1SY18AEU 16 [16 output points] 0.24 0.075
independent contacts
(200VAC)
A1SY22 16-point Triac output module (0.6A) 16 [16 output points] 0.27
0.004
A1SY28EU 8-point Triac output module (0.6A) 16 [16 output points] 0.27 ——
8-point Triac output module (1A)
A1SY28A 16 [16 output points] 0.11 ——
All points independent
Output module
16-point 12/24VDC transistor output module
A1SY40 16 [16 output points] 0.27 0.016
(0.1A) sink type
(0.1A) sink type
(0.1A) sink type
(0.5A) sink type
16-point 24VDC transistor output module (2A)
sink type
16-point 12DCV transistor output module (1A)
A1SY60E 16 [16 output points] 0.20 0.01
source type
2-8
MELSEC-Q

8-point 5/12/24/48VDC transistor output
A1SY68A module sink/source type 16 [16 output points] 0.13 ——
All points independent
(0.016A) sink type
Output module (0.8A) source type
(0.1A) source type
A1SY81EP 32 [32 output points] 0.50 0.016
(0.1/0.05A) source type
32-point 12/24VDC output module (0.1 A),
source type, connector and fuse included
32-point 12/24VDC input module 32-point
A1SH42 12/24VDC transistor output module(0.1A) sink 32 [32 output points] 0.50 0.008
type
32-point 24VDC input/32-point 24VDC output
A1SH42-S1 32 [32 output points] 0.500 0.008
I/O hybrid module module (0.1 A), connector and fuse included
8-point 24VDC input module
A1SX48Y18 16 [16 output points] 0.085 0.045
8-point relay contact output module
8-point 24VDC input module
A1SX48Y58 16 [16 output points] 0.06 0.06
Specified number of points
Dynamic input 16/32/48/64 points
A1S42X [Input specified number of 0.08 ——
module 12/24VDC dynamic input module
points]
Dynamic output 16/32/48/64 points
A1S42Y [Output specified number 0.10 0.008
module 12/24VDC dynamic output module
of points]
Blank cover A1SG60 Dust-proof cover for unused slot 16 [Empty] —— ——
16-point, 32-point, 48-point, or 64-point
Dummy module A1SG62 [Input specified number of —— ——
selectable module
points]
A6CON1 Soldering type
40-pin connector A6CON2 Solderless type —— —— ——
A6CON3 Press-fit type
A6CON1E Soldering type
37-pin D-sub
A6CON2E Solderless type —— —— ——
connector
A6CON3E Press-fit type
Pulse catch 16-point input module for short ON-time pulse
A1SP60 16 [16 output points] 0.055 ——
module input (pulse with a minimum of 0.5ms)
8-point analog timer module whose timer
Analog timer setting value can be changed for different
A1ST60 16 [16 output points] 0.055 ——
module volumes (0.1 to 1.0s, 1 to 10s, 10 to 60s, 60
to 600s)
Interrupt module for specifying the interrupt
Interrupt module A1SI61 32 [32 special points] 0.057 ——
program (16-point interrupt input)
A1SD61 32-bit signed binary 50kbps, 1 channel 32 [32 special points] 0.35 ——
A1SD62 DC input/sink output type 32 [32 special points] 0.14 ——
High-speed
Differential input/sink output type (preset DC
counter module A1SD62D 32 [32 special points] 0.25 ——
input)
A1SD62E DC input/source output type 32 [32 special points] 0.14 ——
A/D converter A1S64AD 4 to 20mA/0 to 10V 4 analog channels 32 [32 special points] 0.4 ——
module A1S68AD Analog input: 8 channels 32 [32 special points] 0.40 ——
For Pt100 (3-wire type) connection 2 channels
A1S62RD3 32 [32 special points] 0.54 ——
Temperature/ of temperature input
digital converter For Pt100 (4-wire type) connection 2 channels
A1S62RD4 32 [32 special points] 0.44 ——
module of temperature input
A1S68TD Thermocouple input: 8 channels 32 [32 special points] 0.32 ——
2-9
MELSEC-Q

A1S62DA 4 to 20mA/0 to 10V 2 analog output channels 32 [32 special points] 0.8 ——
D/A converter
A1S68DAV 0 to ±10V analog output: 8 channels 32 [32 special points] 0.65 ——
module
A1S68DAI 0 to ±20mA analog output: 8 channels 32 [32 special points] 0.85 ——
Analog input, 2 channels, simple loop control
A1S63ADA 32 [32 special points] 0.8 ——
is allowed. Analog output, 1 channel
Analog I/O module
Analog input: 4 channels, analog output: 2
A1S66ADA 64 [64 special points] 0.16 ——
channels
A1S64TCTT-S1 Thermocouple input: 4 channels 32 [32 special points] 0.42 ——
Thermocouple input: 4 channels with heater
A1S64TCTTBW-S1 32 [32 special points] 0.42 ——
disconnection detection function
A1S64TCRT-S1 Pt100 input: 4 channels 32 [32 special points] 0.42 ——
Pt100 input: 4 channels with heater
Temperature A1S64TCRTBW-S1 32 [32 special points] 0.42 ——
adjustment
A1S62TCTT-S2 Thermocouple input: 2 channels 32 [32 special points] 0.28 ——
module
Thermocouple input: 2 channels with heater
A1S62TCTTBW-S2 32 [32 special points] 0.28 ——
A1S62TCRT-S2 Pt100 input: 2 channels 32 [32 special points] 0.28 ——
Pt100 input: 2 channels with heater
A1S62TCRTBW-S2 32 [32 special points] 0.28 ——
A1SJ71UC24-R2 Computer link function, RS-232C, 1 channel 32 [32 special points] 0.1 ——
Computer link function, printer function RS-
Computer link A1SJ71UC24-PRF 32 [32 special points] 0.1 ——
232C, 1 channel
module
Computer link function, multidrop link function
A1SJ71UC24-R4 32 [32 special points] 0.1 ——
RS-422/RS-485, 1 channel
Ethernet interface A1SJ71E71-B2-S3 10 Base 2 (for Cheapernet) 32 [32 special points] 0.52 ——
module A1SJ71E71-B5-S3 10 Base 5 (for Ethernet) 32 [32 special points] 0.35 ——
Intelligent
BASIC (interpreter/compiler) RS-232C, 2
communication A1SD51S 32 [32 special points] 0.4 ——
channels RS-422/485, 1 channel
module
Analog voltage output (0 to ±10V) for 1-axis
A1SD70 positioning control, speed control, and speed- 0.3 ——
positioning control.
For positioning control, speed control, and
48 [First half: 16 empty
speed-positioning control. Pulse train output,
A1SD71-S2 points] 0.8 ——
2-axis (independent, 2-axis simultaneous,
[Second half: 32 special
linear interpolation
points]
For positioning control, setting for manual
pulse output speed can be changed. Pulse
Positioning module A1SD71-S7 train output, 2-axis (independent, 2-axis
0.8 ——
simultaneous, linear interpolation)

A1SD75M1 SSC Net compatible, 1 axis
A1SD75M2 SSC Net compatible, 2 axis 32 [32 special points] 0.70 ——
A1SD75M3 SSC Net compatible, 3 axis
A1SD75P1-S3 Pulse train output, 1 axis
A1SD75P2-S3 Pulse train output, 2 axis 32 [32 special points] 0.70 ——
A1SD75P3-S3 Pulse train output, 3 axis
A1SD774M 4-axis motion control module 32 [32 special points] 0.90 ——
A1SJ71ID1-R4 One reader/writer module can be connected. 32 [32 special points] 0.25 0.1
ID interface A1SJ71ID2-R4 Two reader/writer modules can be connected. 32 [32 special points] 0.25 0.15
module A1SD32D1 One reader/writer module can be connected. 32 [32 special points] 0.25 0.15
A1SD32D2 Two reader/writer modules can be connected. 32 [32 special points] 0.25 0.30
2 - 10
MELSEC-Q

For the master and local stations of
A1SJ71AP21 MELSECNET(II) data link system (for the 32 [32 special points] 0.33 ——
optical fiber cable)
MELSECNET(II) Access is allowed
A1SJ71AP21-S3 MELSECNET(II) data link system (for the GI- 32 [32 special points] 0.33 ——
data link module within the device
type optical fiber cable)
range of the
A3ACPU.
A1SJ71AR21 MELSECNET(II) data link system (for the 32 [32 special points] 0.8 ——
coaxial cable)
A1SJ71T21B 32 [32 special points] 0.66 ——
MELSECNET/B MELSECNET/B data link system
data link module For the remote I/O station of MELSECNET/B
A1SJ72T25B —— 0.3 ——
data link system
Number of connectable transmitter: 1, Radius
Paging module A1SD21-S1 32 [32 special points] 0.14 ——
of transmission area: Approx. 50m
Position detection Absolute position detection by special
A1S62LS 32 [32 special points] 0.55 ——
module detector
PC simple
A1SS91 PC simple monitoring module 16 [16 output points] 0.080 ——
monitoring module
The current
consumption data
Memory card
A1SD59J-S2 Memory card interface module 32 [32 special points] 0.05 is obtained when
interface module
A1SD59J-MIF is
mounted.
For the control, master, and normal stations of
A1SJ71LP21 the MELSECNET/10 data link module system 32 [32 special points] 0.65 ——
MELSECNET/10 (For the dual loop SI-type optical fiber cable)
data link module For the control, master, and normal stations of
A1SJ71BR11 the MELSECNET/10 data link module 32 [32 special points] 0.80 ——
system (For the single bus coaxial cable)
For the master and local stations of the CC-
CC-Link system
A1SJ61BT11 Link data link system (For the twisted pair 32 [32 special points] 0.40 ——
master module
shield cable only.)
For MELSECNET/MINI-S3 master stations I/O dedicated mode 32
(max. 64 stations). Performs remote I/O and [32 special points]
A1SJ71PT32-S3 0.35 ——
remote terminal control of a total of 512 I/O Expanded mode 48
MELSECNET/ points. [48 special points]
MINI-S3 master MELSECNET/MINI-S3 master station I/O dedicated mode 32
module Performs remote I/O and remote terminal [32 special points]
A1SJ71T32-S3 control of a maximum 64 stations and a total 0.30 ——
Expanded mode 48
of 512 I/O points. (For the twisted pair cable
[48 special points]
only.)
MELSECNET-I/O LINK master station.
MELSECNET-I/O
Controls I/O LINK remote I/O module of a
LINK master A1SJ51T64 64 [64 output points] 0.115 0.09
maximum of 64 stations and a total of 128 I/O
module
points.
Graphic operation A900GOT series
A900GOT —— —— ——
terminal Refer to the manual of each GOT.
2 - 11
MELSEC-Q
Item Mode Contents Applicable models

For the sink-type input module and sink-type
A6TBXY36 A1SX41(S2), A1SX42(S2), A1SY41, A1SY42,
output module. (standard type)
A1SH42
For the sink-type input module and sink-type
A6TBXY54 AX42(S1), AY42(S1/S3/S4), AH42
output module. (2-wire type)
A1SX41(S2), A1SX42(S2), A1SH42,
A6TBX70 For the sink-type input module. (3-wire type)
AX42(S1), AH42
For the source-type input module.
A6TBX36-E A1SX81(S2), AX82
Connector/terminal (standard type)
block converter unit For the source-type output module.
A6TBY36-E A1SY81, AY82EP
(standard type)
(2-wire type)
For the source-type output module.
A6TBY54-E A1SY81, AY82EP
(2-wire type)
(3-wire type)
AC05TB 0.5m (1.64 ft.) for the source module
AC10TB 1m (3.28 ft.) for the source module A6TBXY36
AC20TB 2m (6.56 ft.) for the source module A6TBXY54
AC30TB 3m (9.84 ft.) for the source module A6TBX70
Cable for the
AC50TB 5m (16.40 ft.) for the source module
connector/terminal
AC05TB-E 0.5m (1.64 ft.) for the source module A6TBX36-E
block converter unit
AC10TB-E 1m (3.28 ft.) for the source module A6TBY36-E
AC20TB-E 2m (6.56 ft.) for the source module A6TBX54-E
AC30TB-E 3m (9.84 ft.) for the source module A6TBY54-E
AC50TB-E 5m (16.40 ft.) for the source module A6TBX70-E
A1SY41, A1SY42, A1SH42, AY42, AY42-S1,
Relay terminal unit A6TE2-16SRN For the sink-type output module
AY42-S3, AY42-S4, AH42
AC06TE 0.5m (1.64 ft.) long
AC10TE 1m (3.28 ft.) long
Cable for connecting
AC30TE 3m (9.84 ft.) long A6TE2-16SR(N)
the relay terminal unit
AC50TE 5m (16.40 ft.) long
AC100TE 10m (32.81 ft.) long
A1SX10, A1SX20, A1SX30, A1SX40(S1/S2),
A1SX80(S1/S2), A1SY10, A1SY18A, A1SY22,
Terminal block cover
Slim-type terminal block cover for the A1S I/O A1SY28A, A1SY40, A1SY50, A1SY60(E),
for the A1S I/O
A1STEC-S module and the special module A1SY68A, A1SY80
module and the
(terminal block type). A1SX48Y18, A1SX48Y58
special module
A1SI61, A1S64AD, A1S62DA, A1S63ADA,
A1S62RD3/4, A1SD61, A1SP60
2 - 12
MELSEC-Q
(2) Peripheral devices

Item Mode Remark
A6PHP main module
• SW GP-GPPA.............GPP function startup floppy disk for the A series.
Plasma hand-held graphic
A6PHP-SET • SW GP-GPPK.............GPP function startup floppy disk for the K series.
programmer
• SW0-GPPU....................User floppy disk (2DD).
• AC30R4 .........................3m (9.84 ft.)-long RS-422 cable.
• A6GPP main module
• SW GP-GPPA.............GPP function startup floppy disk for the A series.
Intelligent GPP A6GPP-SET • SW GP-GPPK.............GPP function startup floppy disk for the K series.
• SW0-GPPU....................User floppy disk (2DD).
• AC30R4 .........................3m (9.84 ft.)-long RS-422 cable.
• Connection cable for the monitor display of the A6GPP screen.
Composite video cable AC10MD
1m (3.28 ft.)long
AC30R4 3m (9.84 ft.) long Connection cable for between the CPU main module and
RS-422 cable
AC300R4 30m (98.43 ft.) long A6GPP/A6PHP
User floppy disk SW0-GPPU 2DD-type Floppy disk for storing user programs (3.5-inch, pre-formatted)
Cleaning floppy disk SW0-FDC For A6GPP/A6PHP Floppy disk for cleaning the floppy disk drive.
• A6KB keyboard
Optional keyboard for
A6KB-SET-H • AC03R4H..........0.3m (0.98 ft.)-long connection cable between A6KB and A6PHP.
A6PHP
• A6KB-C.............Key sheet for the GPP mode of A6KB.
• A6KB keyboard
Optional keyboard for
A6KB-SET • AC03R4L ..........0.3m (0.98 ft.)-long connection cable between A6KB and A6GPP.
A6GPP
• A6KB-C.............Key sheet for the GPP mode of A6KB.
K6PR(S1)
K6PR-K
Printer K7PR(S1) • For printing out program circuit diagrams and various lists.
A7PR
A7NPR
Connection cable for between A6GPP/A6PHP and printer (K6PR(S1), K6PR-K,
RS232C cable AC30R2 K7PR(S1), A7PR, A7NPR, and a general-purpose printer with RS-232C interface)
3m (9.84 ft.) long
K6PR-Y Printer paper for K6PR(S1) and K6PR-K. 9-inch paper. 2000 sheets per unit
Printer paper
K7PR-Y Printer paper for A7PR and A7NPR. 11-inch paper. 2000 sheets per unit.
Inked ribbon for K6PR (K) K6PR-R Replacement inked ribbon for K6PR(S1) and K6PR-K.
Inked ribbon for A7PR A7PR-R Replacement inked ribbon for A7PR.
Inked ribbon for A7NPR A7NPR-R Replacement inked ribbon for A7NPR.
• Read/write of the program is performed by connecting to the CPU main module with
a RS-422 cable (AC30R4, AC300R4). This is equipped with the MT function.
A7PU (5VDC 0.4A)
• A7PU comes with a connection cable for between the main module and an audio
Programming module cassette recorder.
Read/write of the program is performed by connecting to the CPU main module with
A7PUS
a RS-422 cable (AC30R4-PUS). (5VDC 0.4A)
A8PU Read/write of the program is performed by connecting to the CPU main module with
A8UPU a RS-422 cable (AC30R4-PUS, AC20R4-A8PU). (5VDC 0.4A)
2 - 13
MELSEC-Q
Item Mode Remark

AC30R4 Connection cable for between the CPU main module and A7PU.
AC300R4 3m/30m (9.84 ft./98.43 ft.) long
Connection cable for between the CPU main module and A7PUS, A8PU, A8UPU.
RS-422 cable AC30R4-PUS
3m (9.84 ft.) long
Connection cable for between the CPU main module and A8PU, A8UPU.
AC20R4-A8PU
2m (6.56 ft.) long
• Used for monitoring the CPU devices, changing the setting values/ current values,
Data access module A6DU-B and displaying the operation status. (5VDC 0.23A)
• Connect to the CPU with an AC30R4-PUS cable.
• An interface module which connects the PC CPU and the modem. Using a
Modem interface module A6TEL telephone line, the communication is performed between a remote peripheral
device and the CPU. (5VDC 0.2A)
AC30R4 Connection cable for between the CPU main module and A6WU. 3m/30m
AC300R4 (9.84 ft./98.43 ft.) long.
RS-422 cable
Connection cable for between the A6PHP main module and A6WU. 0.3m (0.98 ft.)
AC03WU
long.
2 - 14
MELSEC-Q
2.4 System Configuration Overview
There are four system configuration types as follows:
(1) Stand-alone system............. A system with a basic base module only, or with a
basic base system and an extension base module
connected with the expansion cable.
(2) Network system ................... A system for controlling multiple PCs and remote I/O
modules.
(3) Computer link system .......... A system for data exchange between the QCPU-A
and the computer (personal computer, etc.) by using
an A1SJ71UC24 computer link module.
(4) Composite system ............... A system which has a combination of a network

system and a computer link system.
The details of the system configuration, number of I/O points, I/O number assignment,
etc., of a stand-alone system are listed on the following page.
2 - 15
MELSEC-Q
2.4.1 QCPU-A (A mode) system
Basic base module (QA1S38B)

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Slot No.
Power supply
O
C 00 20 40 60 80 A0 C0 E0
U P
module
Expansion cable T
U 1F 3F 5F 7F 9F BF DF FF
Expansion (QA1S68B) When a 32-point module
stage 1
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
is mounted to each slot
Power supply
100 120 140 160 180 1A0 1C0 1E0
O
IU module
NT
11F 13F 15F 17F 19F 1BF 1DF 1FF
Expansion base module Expansion base module

Expansion (QA1S68B) Expansion
stage 5
(QA1S68B)
stage 2
16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47
Power supply
Power supply
200 220 240 260 280 2A0 2C0 2E0 500 520 540 560 580 5A0 5C0 5E0
O O
IU IU
System configuration
module
module
NT NT
21F 23F 25F 27F 29F 2BF 2DF 2FF 51F 53F 55F 57F 59F 5BF 5DF 5FF

Expansion
stage 3
(QA1S68B) Expansion (QA1S68B)
stage 6
24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55
Power supply
Power supply
300 320 340 360 380 3A0 3C0 3E0 600 620 640 660 680 6A0 6C0 6E0
O O
IU IU
module
module
NT NT

Expansion (QA1S68B) Expansion (QA1S68B)
stage 4 stage 7
32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63
Power supply
Power supply
400 420 440 460 480 4A0 4C0 4E0 700 720 740 760 780 7A0 7C0 7E0
O O
IU IU
module
module
NT NT
Max. number of
Expansion stage 7
expansion stages
Max. number of I/O
modules to be 64 modules
mounted
Max. I/O points 4096
Type name of basic
QA1S33B, QA1S35B, QA1S38B
base module
Type name of
expansion base QA1S65B, QA1S68B
module
Type name of
QC06B, QC12B, QC30B, QC50B, QC100B
expansion cable
(1) Up to seven expansion base modules can be added.
(2) Limit the total length of the expansion cable to 13.2m or less.
(3) When using the expansion cable, do not bind it with or place it close to the main circuit (high-voltage, large-
Caution current) lines.
(4) Assign the expansion stages in ascending order. Do not assign two or more modules to one stage.
(5) Connect the expansion cable from OUT of the expansion cable connector of the base module to IN of the
connector of the next expansion base module.
2 - 16
3 GENERAL SPECIFICATION
MELSEC-Q
3. GENERAL SPECIFICATION
The general specification common to various modules is shown.
Table 3.1 General specification

Item Specification
Operation ambient
0 to 55°C
temperature
Storage ambient
-20 to 75°C
temperature
Operation ambient
3
10 to 90%RH, no condensation
humidity
Storage ambient
10 to 90%RH, no condensation
humidity
When there is intermittent vibration
Frequency Acceleration Amplitude Sweep count
0.075mm
10 to 57Hz ——
(0.003 in.)
Conforms to the JIS B 57 to 150Hz 9.8m/s2 {1G} ——
Vibration durability 10 times each in X, Y,
3501 and IEC 61131-2 When there is continuous vibration
and Z directions
Frequency Acceleration Amplitude
(80 minutes)
0.035mm
10 to 57Hz ——
(0.001 in.)
57 to 150Hz 4.9m/s2 {0.5G} ——
2
Shock durability Conforms to the JIS B 3501 and IEC 61131-2 (147 m/s {15G}), 3 times each in 3 directions)
Operation ambiance No corrosive gas
Operation height 2000m (6562 ft.) or less
Installation area On the control panel
Over-voltage
II or less
category 1
Pollution level 2 2 or less
1: Indicates the location the device is connected, from the public cable network to the device structure wiring area.
Category II applies to the devices to which the power is supplied from a fixed equipment.
Surge withstand voltage for devices with up to 300V of rated voltage is 2500V.
2: This is an index which indicates the degree of conductive object generation in the environment where the device is used. Pollution level
2 is when only non-conductive pollution occurs. A temporary conductivity caused by condensation must be expected occasionally.
3: Do not use or store the PC in the environment where the pressure is higher than the atmospheric pressure at sea level. Otherwise,
malfunction may result. To use the PC in high-pressure environment, contact your nearest Mitsubishi representative.
3-1
3 GENERAL SPECIFICATION
MELSEC-Q
MEMO
3-2
4 CPU MODULE
MELSEC-Q
4. CPU MODULE
4.1 Performance Specification
The performance specifications of QCPU-A are shown below:

Item Q02CPU-A Q02HCPU-A Q06HCPU-A Remark
Control method Repeated operation of stored program
I/O control method Refresh method (Partial refresh is available with a program.)
Program language Dedicated language for sequence control (Ladder, list, SFC)
Processing speed (LD instruction) 79 (ns/step) 34 (ns/step)
Sequence
25
instructions
Number of
Basic and application
instructions 233
instructions
(type)
Dedicated
instructions
213 4
Memory capacity 144k bytes of program memory + 144k bytes of standard ROM
Program Main program 28k steps max. 30k steps max.
capacity Set by parameters
(steps) Sub program None 30k steps max.
I/O device points [X/Y] (points) 8192 (X/Y 0 to 1FFF) (Total points available on programs including remote I/O)
I/O points [X/Y] (points) 4096 (Points can be controlled on basic and expansion base modules)
Internal relay [M] (points) 7144 (M0 to M999, M2048 to M8191)
Total of 8192 are
Latch relay [L] (points) 1048 (L1000 to L2047)
shared by M, L, and S.
Step relay [S] (points) 0 (None for the initial state)
Link relay [B] (points) 8192 (B0 to B1FFF)
2048 (Default: 256 points)
• 100ms timer (T0 to T199)...................................Setting time: 0.1 to 3276.7s
• 10ms timer (T200 to T255).................................Setting time: 0.01 to 327.67s
• 100ms retentive timer (None for initial state)......Setting time: 0.1 to 3276.7s
• Expansion timer (T256 to T2047).......................Count value is set by word
Timer [T] (points)
device (D, W, and R).
• 1ms timer (None for initial state) ........................Setting time: 0.001 to 32.767s
(The latter half of the retentive Note that the
timer can be used by ZHTIME available device
instruction.) range may be
Device points
limited depending
1024 (Default: 256 points)
on the
• Normal counter (C0 to C255).............................Setting range: 1 to 32767
programming
counts
software to be
Counter [C] (points) • Interrupt counter (None for initial state)..............C224 to C255 are possible
used.
depending on setting.
• Expansion counter (C256 to C1023)..................Count value is set by word
device (D, W, and R).
Data register [D] (points) 8192 (D0 to D8191)
Link register [W] (points) 8192 (W0 to W1FFF)
Annunciator [F] (points) 2048 (F0 to F2047)
File register [R] (points) 8192 (R0 to R8191)
Accumulator [A] (points) 2 (A0, A1)
Index register [V, Z] (points) 14 (V, V1 to V6, Z, Z1 to Z6)
Pointer [P] (points) 256 (P0 to P255)
Interrupt pointer [I] (points) 32 (I0 to I31)
Special relay [M] (points) 256 (M9000 to M9255)
Special register [D] (points) 256 (D9000 to D9255)
4-1
4 CPU MODULE
MELSEC-Q
(Performance specifications--continued)
Item Q02CPU-A Q02HCPU-A Q06HCPU-A Remark
Comment (point) 4032 max. (Can be set in units of 64 points)
Expansion comment (point) 3968 max. (Can be set in units of 64 points)
Output mode selection from STOP Selectable from re-outputting operation status before STOP (default) or starting
Set by parameters
to RUN output after operation
Monitoring congestion of operations (watchdog timer: 200ms fixed),
Self-diagnostic function
Detection of abnormality in memory, CPU, I/O, or battery
Operation mode at error Selectable from stop or continue
Latch (power failure compensation)
L1000 to L2047 (default) (Latch range can be set for L, B, T, C, D, and W.) Set by parameters
range
Remote RUN/PAUSE contact One point set for each of RUN/PAUSE contact from X0 to X1FFF
Print title registration Available (128 characters)
Keyword registration Available
I/O assignment Registration of occupied I/O points and module type name
Step operation Execute/stop of sequence program operations
Set at special
Constant scan (ms) 10 to 190 (Can be set in units of 10ms)
register D9020
Year, month, day, hour, minute, second, day of week (leap year automatic
detection)
Accuracy – 3.18 to + 5.25s (TYP. + 2.12s)/d at 0 °C
Clock function
– 3.93 to + 5.25s (TYP. + 1.90s)/d at 25 °C
– 14.69 to + 3.53s (TYP. – 3.67s)/d at 55 °C
Internal current consumption at

0.60 0.64 0.64
5VDC (A)
Weight (kg) 0.20 0.20 0.20
Dimensions (mm) 98 (H) × 27.4 (W) × 89.3 (D)
4-2
4 CPU MODULE
MELSEC-Q
4.1.1 Overview of operation processing
An overview of processing subsequent to starting power supply for QCPU-A to

execution of the sequence program is explained.
QCPU-A's processing may be categorized roughly into the following four kinds:
(1) Initial processing

This is a preprocess to execute sequence operations, and is performed only
once upon power-on or reset.
(a) Resets the I/O module and initialize it.
(b) Initializes the range of data memory for which latch is not set up (sets the bit
device to OFF and the word device to 0).
(c) Allocates I/O address of the I/O module automatically based on the I/O
module number or the position of installation on the extension base module.
(d) Executes the check items for power-on and reset among the PC CPU's self-
diagnosis items (Refer to 4.1.4).
(e) For the control station of the MELSECNET/10 or the master station of
MELSECNET (II)/B, sets the network/link parameter information to the
network/data-link module, and commences the network communication/data
link.
(2) Refresh processing of I/O module

Executes the refresh processing of I/O module. (Refer to the ACPU
Programming Manual (Fundamentals).)
(3) Operation processing of a sequence program

Executes a sequence program from step 0 to the END instruction written in the
PC CPU.
(4) END processing

This is a post-process to finish one cycle of operation processing of the sequence
program and to return the execution of the sequence program to the step 0.
(a) Performs self-diagnosis checks, such as fuse blown, I/O module verification,
and low battery. (Refer to Section 4.1.4.)
(b) Updates the current value of the timer, sets the contact ON/OFF, updates
the current value of the counter and sets the contact to ON. (Refer to the
ACPU Programming Manual (Fundamentals).)
(c) Performs data exchange between PC CPU and computer link module when
there is a data read or write request from a computer link module.
(A1SJ71UC24-R2, AJ71C24(S3), AD51(S3), etc.)
(d) Performs the refresh processing when there is a refresh request from the
network module or link module.
(e) When the trace point setting of sampling trace is by each scan (after the
execution of END instruction), stores the condition of the device for which it
is setup into the sampling trace area.
4-3
4 CPU MODULE
MELSEC-Q
Power-on
Initial processing
• Initialization of I/O module
• Initialization of data memory
• I/O address allocation of I/O module
• Self-diagnosis
• Set link parameter
Refresh processing of I/O module

(only when the I/O control is set up for the
refresh processing)
Operation processing of the sequence program

Step 0
to
Until the execution of END (FEND) instruction
END processing
• Self-diagnosis
• Updating current value of the timer and
counter, and setting the contacts ON/OFF
• Communication with computer link module
• Link refresh processing
• Sampling trace processing
• MELSECNET/MINI-S3 automatic refresh
processing
Figure 4.1 QCPU-A operation processing
4-4
4 CPU MODULE
MELSEC-Q
4.1.2 Operation processing of RUN, STOP, PAUSE, and STEP RUN
The PC CPU has four kinds of operation states: RUN state, STOP state, PAUSE state,
and step operation (STEP RUN) state.
Operation processing of PC CPU in each operation state is explained.
(1) RUN state operation processing

(a) The repetition of sequence program operation in the order from step 0
END (FEND) instruction step 0 is called the RUN state.
(b) When entering the RUN state, the output state escaped by STOP is output
depending on the output mode setting of parameter upon STOP RUN.
(c) Processing time from switching from STOP to RUN until the startup of
sequence program is usually one to three seconds, yet it may vary
depending on the system configuration.
(2) STOP state operation processing

(a) The termination of operation of the sequence program by the use of
RUN/STOP switch or the remote STOP is called the STOP state. (Refer to
Section 4.3.)
(b) When entering the STOP state, it escapes the output state and sets all
output points to OFF. Data memories except for output (Y) are retained.
(3) PAUSE state operation processing

(a) The termination of operation of sequence program while retaining output and
data memories is called the PAUSE state. (Refer to Section 4.3.)
(4) Step operation (STEP RUN) operation processing

(a) Step operation is an operation mode wherein operation processing of a
sequence program can be paused/resumed by each instruction from
peripheral device(s). (Refer to Section 4.3.)
(b) Since an operation processing is paused while retaining the output and data
memories, condition of the execution can be confirmed.
4-5
4 CPU MODULE
MELSEC-Q
(5) Operation processing of PC CPU when RUN/STOP switch is

operated
PC CPU operation
processing Operation processing of Data memories
External output Remark
RUN/STOP key the sequence program (Y, M, L, S, T, C, D)
switch operation
OS escapes the output Maintains the condition
Executes up to the END
RUN STOP state, and sets all the immediately prior to entering the
instruction, then stops.
output points to OFF. STOP state.
Determined by the output Starts operations from the
STOP RUN Starts. mode of the parameter condition immediately prior to
upon STOP RUN. entering the STOP state.
POINTS
Whether in the RUN, STOP or PAUSE state, PC CPU is performing the following:
• Refresh processing of I/O module
• Data communication with computer link module
• Link refresh processing.
Thus, even in the STOP or PAUSE state, monitoring or testing I/O with peripheral
devices, reading or writing from a computer link module, and communication with
other stations by MELSECNET are possible.
4-6
4 CPU MODULE
MELSEC-Q
4.1.3 Operation processing upon momentary power failure
The PC CPU detects a momentary power failure when input power voltage supplied to
the power supply module becomes lower than the specified range.
When the PC CPU detects a momentary power failure, following operation processing
is performed.
(1) When a momentary power failure shorter than allowable period of momentary
power failure occurred:
(a) When a momentary power failure occurred, operation processing is
interrupted while the output state is retained.
(b) When the momentary power failure is reset, operation processing will be
continued.
(c) When a momentary power failure occurred and the operation was
interrupted, measurement of the watchdog timer (WDT) continues. For
instance, when the scan time is 190ms and a momentary power failure of
15ms occurs, it causes the watchdog timer error (200ms).
Momentary power failure occurred Power supply restoration
END 0 END END
A2USHCPU-S1 interrupts the operation.
Operation processing upon momentary power failure
(2) When a momentary power failure longer than the allowable period of momentary
power failure occurred:
The PC CPU performs the initial start. The operation processing is the same as
power-on or reset operation with the reset switch.
4-7
4 CPU MODULE
MELSEC-Q
4.1.4 Self-diagnosis
Self-diagnosis is a function with which A2USHCPU-S1 diagnoses itself for the

presence of any abnormalities.
(1) Upon turning on the power supply to PC or when an abnormality occurred while
the PC is running, the QCPU-A's self-diagnosis processing prevents malfunctions
of the PC and performs preventive maintenance by detecting the abnormality,
displaying an error display, halting the operation of QCPU-A, and so on.
(2) QCPU-A stores the error occurred last to a special register D9008 as an error
code, and stores further detailed error code to a special register D9091.
(3) Even with the power-off, the latest error information and 15 errors in the past are
stored by battery back-up. With the AnUCPU-supporting system FD, contents of
up to 16 errors can be confirmed from the peripheral devices. Display example
with SWcIVD-GPPA is shown below:
Displays the current error.
Displays the past error history.
(4) When the self-diagnosis detects an error, the module will be in one of the two
modes below:
• Mode wherein operation of the PC is stopped
• Mode wherein operation of the PC continues
In addition, there are errors with which the operation can be selected to stop or to
continue by the parameter setting.
(a) When a stop-operation mode error is detected by the self-diagnosis, the
operation is stopped at the time of detection of the error, and sets the all
outputs(Y) to OFF.
(b) When a continue-operation mode error is detected, the only part of the
program with the error is not executed while the all other part is executed.
Also, in case of I/O module verification error, the operation is continued
using the I/O address prior to the error.
When an error is detected, error generation and error contents are stored in the
special relay (M) and special register (D), so that in case of the continue-
operation mode, the program can use the information to prevent any
malfunctions of the PC or devices.
Error descriptions detected by the self-diagnosis are shown in the next page.
REMARK
1 As to the LED display message, the order of priority of the LED display can be
changed if CPU is in the operation mode. (An error code is stored in the special
register).
2 When the special relay M9084 is ON, checking on blown fuse, I/O verification and
the battery are not performed (an error code is not stored in the special register).
3 The "Error display of peripheral device" in the table of self-diagnostic functions
are messages displayed by the PC diagnosis of peripheral devices.
4-8
4 CPU MODULE
MELSEC-Q
Self-diagnostic functions
Status of Error display of peripheral Error code
Diagnosis item Diagnosis timing CPU status
"RUN" LED devices (D9008)
Instruction code check Upon execution of each instruction INSTRCT. CODE ERR. 10
• Upon power-on and reset
Parameter setting check • Upon switching from (STOP, PAUSE) to PARAMETER ERROR 11
(RUN, STEP-RUN)
• When M9056 or M9057 is ON
No END instruction • Upon switching from (STOP, PAUSE) to MISSING END INS. 12
(RUN, STEP-RUN)
Memory error
• CJ SCJ JMP CALL(P)

FOR to NEXT CHG Stop Flickering
Unable to execute instruction Upon execution of each instruction CAN’T EXECUTE (P) 13
• Upon switching from (STOP, PAUSE) to
(RUN, STEP-RUN)
Format (CHK instruction) Upon switching from (STOP, PAUSE) to
CHK FORMAT ERR. 14
check (RUN, STEP-RUN)
• When interruption occurred
Unable to execute instruction • Upon switching from (STOP, PAUSE) to CAN’T EXECUTE (I) 15
(RUN, STEP-RUN)
RAM check RAM ERROR 20
• When M9084 is ON during STOP
CPU error
Operation circuit check • Upon power-on and reset OPE. CIRCUIT ERR. 21
Stop Flickering
Watchdog error supervision • Upon execution of END instruction WDT ERROR 22
END instruction not executed • Upon execution of END instruction END NOT EXECUTE 24
Main CPU check Always MAIN CPU DOWN 26
Upon execution of END instruction
I/O module verification Stop Flickering
(However, not checked when M9084 or UNIT VERIFY ERR. 31
1 (Default: stop)
I/O error
M9094 is ON.)
Upon execution of END instruction
Fuse blown
(However, not checked when M9084 or FUSE BREAK OFF. 32
1 (Default: operate) Operate ON
M9094 is ON.)
Control bus check Upon execution of FROM, TO instruction CONTROL-BUS ERR. 40
Special function module error Upon execution of FROM, TO instruction SP. UNIT DOWN 41
Link module error • Upon switching from (STOP, PAUSE) to LINK UNIT ERROR 42
Special function module error
(RUN, STEP-RUN) Stop Flickering

I/O interrupt error When interruption occur I/O INT. ERROR 43
Special function module
• Upon switching from (STOP, PAUSE) to SP. UNIT LAY. ERR. 44
allocation error
(RUN, STEP-RUN)
Special function module error
Upon execution of FROM, TO instructions Stop Flickering SP. UNIT ERROR 46
1 (Default: stop)
Stop Flickering
Link parameter error • Upon switching from (STOP, PAUSE) to LINK PARA. ERROR 47
(RUN, STEP-RUN)
Operate ON
Battery
Always
Low battery Operate Flickering BATTERY ERROR 70
(However, not checked when M9084 is ON.)
Stop Flickering
Operation check error OPERATION ERROR 2
Upon execution of each instruction 50
1 (Default: operate) [<CHK> ERROR ]
Operate ON
1: Can be changed by the parameter settings of a peripheral device.
2: Displayed as a three-digit trouble code only for errors with the "CHK" instruction.
4-9
4 CPU MODULE
MELSEC-Q
4.1.5 Device list
Usage range of QCPU-A devices is shown below.
Device list
Range of usage (points)
Device Description of device
QCPU-A
Used to supply PC commands and data from peripheral devices such as
X Input
X, Y push buttons, select switches, limit switches and digital switches.
0 to FFF (4096 points) Used to output control results of a program to external devices such as
Y Output
solenoids, magnetic switches, signal lights and digital display device.
X Input • Possible to use in a program after the I/O points usage range per each
QCPU-A (described above) to a maximum of 8192 points (external output
X, Y
is not allowed).
Y Output 0 to 1FFF (8192 points)
• Objective is to allocate for automatic I/O refresh of MELSECNET/MINI or
for remote I/O of MELSECNET/10.
Special relay M9000 to 9255 (256 points) An auxiliary relay used inside a PC set in advance for a specialized use.
M An auxiliary relay inside a PC which cannot output directly to external
Internal relay
devices.
M/L/S 0 to 8191 (8192 points) An auxiliary relay inside a PC which cannot output directly to external
L Latch relay
8192 points as a total of M, L, S devices. Has the power failure compensation function.
Used in the same manner as the internal relay (M). Used as a relays to
S Step relay
indicate the stage number of process stepping program, etc.
An internal relay for data link and cannot output to external devices. The
B Link relay B0 to B1FFF (8192 points)
range not setup by link parameters can be used as the internal relay.
For fault detection. A fault detection program is created in advance, and if it
F Annunciator F0 to F2047 (2048 points)
becomes ON during RUN, the number is stored in a special register D.
100ms timer
Up-timing-timer. There are four kinds: 100ms timer, 10ms timer, 100ms
10ms timer T0 to T2047 (2048 points)
retentive timer and 1ms timer.
T (Register for storing setting value(s) is
100ms retentive timer • 1ms timer: ZHTIME instruction enables 1ms timer using the latter half of the
required for T256 and later.)
retentive timer.
1ms timer
Counter C0 to C1023 (1024 points)

(Interrupt counter C224 to C255 fixed. There are two kinds: up-timing counter used in PC programs and interrupt
C
Interrupt counter Register for storing setting value(s) is counter which counts number of interrupts.
required for C256 and later.)
Data register D0 to D8191 (8192 points) Memory used to store data inside PC.
D
Special register D9000 to D9255 (256 points) Data memory set up in advance for a specialized use.
Register for data link. The range not set by link parameters can be used as a
W Link register W0 to W1FFF (8192 points)
substitute for a data register.
R File register R0 to R8191 (8192 points) For expanding the data register. User memory area is used for this.
Data register used to store a operation result of basic and application
A Accumulator A0, A1 (2 points)
instructions.
Z V Index register V, V1 to V6, Z, Z1 to Z6 (14 points) Used for qualification of devices (X, Y, M, L, B, F, T, C, D, W, R, K, H, P)
N Nesting N0 to N7 (8 levels) Indicates nesting structure of master control.
P Pointer P0 to P255 (256 points) Indicates destination of branch instructions (CJ, SCJ, CALL, JMP).
When an interruption factor is generated, it indicates the destination of the
I Interrupt pointer I0 to I31 (32 points)
interrupt program corresponding to the interruption factor.
K-32768 to 32767 (16-bit instruction)
Used to set timer/counter, pointer number, interrupt pointer number, bit
K Decimal constant K-2147483648 to 2147483647
device digits, and values for basic and application instructions.
(32-bit instruction)
H0 to FFFF (16-bit instruction)
H Hexadecimal constant Used to set values for basic and application instructions.
H0 to FFFFFFFF (32-bit instruction)
4 - 10
4 CPU MODULE
MELSEC-Q
4.2 Parameter Setting Ranges
A list of parameter setting ranges is provided below. User memory allocation contents,
I/O device allocation method and automatic refresh procedure for MELSECNET/MINI-
S3 are also explained.
4.2.1 List of parameter setting range
Parameters are used for allocating the user memory area inside the memory cassette,
setting various functions and device ranges.
A parameter is usually stored in the first 3k bytes of the user memory area.
Among the parameters, the network parameter for MELSECNET/10 is allocated and
stored after the main sequence program area. (Refer to Section 4.2.2 for details).
As shown in the list below, a default value is given to each parameter.
Even though a default value can be used, parameter value can be changed to a value
suitable for a particular application within a setting range by a peripheral device.
Setting Setting range
Default value
Item Q02CPU-A, Q02HCPU-A Q06HCPU-A
1 to 28k steps 1 to 30k steps
Main sequence program capacity 6k steps
(1k steps = in 2k-byte units) (1k steps = in 2k-byte units)
1 to 30k steps
Contents of sub sequence program —— ——
(1k steps units)
File register —— 0 to 8k points (1k points = in 2k-byte units)
1 block = 16k bytes
(Block setting for from No.1 to No.8, from No.10 to the end of unused area in
Expansion file register —— the memory)
[Automatically setup in the unused area in the memory based on the file
register setting.]
0 to 4032 points (64 point unit = in 1k byte units)
Comment capacity ——
[When comment capacity is set up, 1k byte is added to the memory area.]
Expansion comment capacity —— 0 to 3968 points (64 point unit = in 1k byte units)
Status latch —— No parameter setting
Performed by setting up expansion file registers to store device and result
Sampling trace —— in each of status latch and sampling trace modes.
Refer to ACPU Programming Manual (Fundamentals).
Link relay (B) B0 to B1FFF (unit: 1 point)
T0 to T255 (unit: 1 point)
Timer (T)
Latch range setting • Latch: T256 to T2047 (unit: 1 point)
(power failure L1000 to L2047 only. C0 to C255 (unit: 1 point)
Counter (C)
compensation) • None for others. C256 to C1023 (unit: 1 point)
Data register (D) D0 to D8191 (unit: 1 point)
Link register (W) W0 to W1FFF (unit: 1 point)
Optical link: maximum 64 stations
Number of link stations
Coaxial link: maximum 32 stations
Link range setting for
I/O (X/Y) —— X/Y0 to X/Y1FFF (unit: 16 points)
MELSECNET/10
Link relay (B) B0 to B1FFF (unit:16 points)
Link register (W) W0 to W1FFF (unit: 1 point)
Settings for M0 to M999
internal relay (M) M2048 to M8191 M/L/S 0 to 8191
latch relay (L) L1000 to L2047 (where M, L, S are continuous numbers)
step relay (S) None for S
T0 to T199 (100ms) • 256 points by 100ms, 10ms, and retentive timers (in 8 point units)
T0 to T255
T200 to T255 (10ms) • Timers are continuously numbered.
Timer settings • 1792 points by 100ms, 10ms, and retentive timers (in 16 point units)
T256 to T2047 —— • Timers are continuously numbered.
• Devices set: D, R, W (Setting required if 257 points or more.)
Interrupt counter setting —— •· Sets whether to use interrupt counter (C224 to C225) or not.
Counter setting 256 points • 0 to 1024 points (in 16 point units)
Points used
(C0 to C255) • Devices set: D, R, W (Setting required if 257 points or more.)
4 - 11
4 CPU MODULE
MELSEC-Q
Setting Setting range

Default value
Item A2USHCPU-S1
• 0 to 64 points (in 16 point units)
I/O number allocation —— ............Input module/output module/special function module/empty slot
• Module model name registration is possible.
• X0 to X1FFF
Remote RUN/PAUSE contact setting ——
• RUN/PAUSE............. 1 point (Setting of PAUSE contact only is not allowed.)
Fuse blown Continue
I/O verification error Stop
Operation modes when Operation error Continue Stop/Continue
error occurred Special function module
Stop
check error
END batch processing No Yes/No
Re-output operation
STOP RUN display mode Output before STOP/after operation
status prior to the stop
Print title registration —— • 128 characters
Keyword registration —— • Up to 6 characters in hexadecimal (0 to 9, A to F)
Number of link stations • 0 to 64 station(s)
Link range settings for I/O (X/Y) X/Y0 to 3FF (in 16 point units)
——
MELSECNET II Link relay (B) • B0 to BFFF (in 16 point units)
Link register (W) • W0 to WFFF (in 1 point units)
Number of supported modules : 0 to 8
Head I/O number 0 to FE0
(in 10H units)
Model name registration : MINI, MINI-S3
Transmission/reception data : X, M, L, B, T, C, D, W, R, none
(16 point units for bit devices)
Number of retries : 0 to 32 times
Link range settings for MELSECNET/MINI, FROM/TO response setting : Link priority; CPU priority
——
MELSECNET/MINI-S3 Data clear setting at faulty station : Retain/ Clear
Faulty station detection : M, L, B, T, C, D, W, R, none
(16 point units for bit devices)
Error number : T, C, D, W, R
Number of total remote stations : 0 to 64 station(s)
Sending state setting during
communication error : Test message, OFF data, retain
(sending data)
4 - 12
4 CPU MODULE
MELSEC-Q
4.2.2 Memory capacity setting (for main program, file register, comment, etc.)
QCPU-A has 144k bytes of user memory (RAM) as a standard. Parameters, T/C set
value main program, MELSECNET/10 network parameters, expansion comment, file
register, and comment data are stored in the user memory.
(1) Calculation of memory capacity

Determine the data types to be stored and the memory capacity with parameters
before using the user memory.
Calculate the memory capacity according to Table 4.1.
Table 4.1 Parameter setting and memory capacity

<With Q02CPU-A/Q02HCPU-A>
Max. available memory Change into
Item Setting unit Calculation of memory capacity (bytes) Remark
capacity (bytes) ROM
Parameter — 3k 3k
T/C set value — 1k 1k
Main Sequence program 1k step Number of steps × 2 56k
Available
program Total: Dedicated to
Microcomputer program 1k byte Preset number of bytes 54k
60k Total: SFC
MELSECNET/10 parameter — See note 1. 16k 144k
Expansion comment 1k byte Preset number of bytes (1k byte = 64 points) 63k 1
Expansion file register (built-in) 8k points Number of file register points × 2 128k
File register 1k point Number of file register points × 2 16k Not available
Comment 1k byte Preset number of bytes (1k byte = 64 points) 64k 1
Expansion file register (memory card) 8k points Number of file register points × 2 302k
<With Q06HCPU-A>
Max. available memory Change into
Item Setting unit Calculation of memory capacity (bytes) Remark
capacity (bytes) ROM
Parameter — 3k 3k
T/C set value — 1k 1k
Main Sequence program 1k step Number of steps × 2 60k
program Total: Dedicated to
Microcomputer program 1k byte Preset number of bytes 58k
60k Available SFC
MELSECNET/10 parameter — See note 1. 16k
Total:
Sub T/C set value 1k byte 1k 1k
144k
program Sequence program 1k step Number of steps × 2 58k
Microcomputer program — 5k 5k
Expansion comment 1k byte Preset number of bytes (1k byte = 64 points) 63k 1
Expansion file register (built-in) 8k points Number of file register points × 2 128k
File register 1k point Number of file register points × 2 16k Not available
Comment 1k byte Preset number of bytes (1k byte = 64 points) 64k 1
Expansion file register (memory card) 8k points Number of file register points × 2 302k
1: When the capacity of comment or expansion comment is specified, the system occupies 1k byte for each.
4 - 13
4 CPU MODULE
MELSEC-Q
The capacity for network parameters of MELSECNET/10 changes depending

on the contents set. The area for the network parameters shall be secured in
2k byte units based on the total of capacity for each setting. The memory
capacity of each network parameter is as follows:
Item Memory capacity (bytes)
Internal data 30
Routing parameter 390
Transfer parameter between
246
data links
Common parameter 2164/module 1 1 It is 2722 bytes in case of a
Refresh parameter 92/module remote master station.
Station specific parameter 1490/module
The network parameter capacity for MELSECNET/10 is determined from the

total of the memory capacities calculated from above.
Total of the capacity Capacity for network parameter setting
30 to 2048 bytes 2k bytes
4 - 14
4 CPU MODULE
MELSEC-Q
(2) Order of user memory storage

During RAM operation During boot operation from ROM
Parameter
T/C setting value (Main)
Main program
MELSECNET/10
network parameter
T/C setting value (Sub)

Memory capacity
of built-in ROM Sub program
(144k bytes max.) Unusable
Boot operation
Unused from ROM
Parameter Change into Parameter

T/C setting value (Main) ROM T/C setting value (Main)
Main program Main program
MELSECNET/10 MELSECNET/10
network parameter network parameter
T/C setting value (Sub) T/C setting value (Sub)
1
Sub program Sub program
Reserved for internal system Reserved for internal system

Memory capacity when sub program is used when sub program is used
of built-in RAM Expansion comment Expansion comment
(144k bytes max.) Expansion file register Expansion file register
File register File register
Comment Comment
Expansion file register

Memory capacity of
memory card RAM Expansion file register
(304k bytes max.) Expansion file register
1 Sub programs can be used only with Q06HCPU-A.
POINT
Note that the sequence program can use only up to 22k steps when the maximum
16k bytes are used for the MELSECNET/10 network parameters.
The memory area for the sequence program for QCPU-A is the same as that for
MELSECNET/10. Therefore, the remainder of subtracting the memory area used by
MELSECNET/10 network parameters from the maximum 30k steps can be used for
the memory area for the sequence program.
4 - 15
4 CPU MODULE
MELSEC-Q
4.2.3 Setting ranges of timer and counter
(1) Timer setting range

(a) Default values of the timer setting ranges are as follows:
Timer points : 256 points
100ms timer : T0 to T199
Retentive timer : none
(b) When timer-use points are set to 257 or more, the default values will be as
follows:
(c) The timer type can be arbitrarily set in continuous numbers, with T0 to T255
in 8 point units, and T256 to T2047 in 16 point units.
By setting the timer points actually to be used, the timer processing time
subsequent to the END instruction can be shortened.
(d) Timer setting values are as follows:
T0 to T255 : constant or word device (D)
T256 to T2047 : word device (D, W, R)
(Allocate a storage device for the set value by setting
parameters.)
(e) Refer to section 4.4.2 for the usage of 1ms timer.
(2) Counter setting range

(a) Default values of counter setting ranges are as follows:
Counter points : 256 points
Normal counter : C0 to C255
Interrupt counter : none
(b) When the counter-use points are set to 256 points or more, the default
values will become as follows:
(c) A counter which can be setup as an interrupt counter must only be in the
range C244 to C255, and any counters outside the range cannot be set up.
Set up is made with parameters in C224 to C255 in one point unit for the
interrupt counter. Any counter in the range C224 to C255 which is not set up
as an interrupt counter can be used as a normal counter.
4 - 16
4 CPU MODULE
MELSEC-Q
The interrupt counters in C224 to C255 are allocated to the interrupt pointers I0 toI31
as shown below, and count the occurrences of interrupts in I0 to I31.
Interrupt pointer Interrupt counter Interrupt pointer Interrupt counter Interrupt pointer Interrupt counter Interrupt pointer Interrupt counter
I0 C224 I8 C232 I16 C240 I24 C248
I1 C225 I9 C233 I17 C241 I25 C249
I2 C226 I10 C234 I18 C242 I26 C250
I3 C227 I11 C235 I19 C243 I27 C251
I4 C228 I12 C236 I20 C244 I28 C252
I5 C229 I13 C237 I21 C245 I29 C253
I6 C230 I14 C238 I22 C246 I30 C254
I7 C231 I15 C239 I23 C247 I31 C255
(d) Counter-use points can be set arbitrarily in 16 point units using continuous
numbers. By setting the counter which points to the number actually used,
the counter processing time subsequent to the END instruction can be
shortened.
(e) The counter set values are as follows:

C0 to C255 : constant or word device (D)
C256 to C1023 : word device (D, W, R)
(Allocate a storage device for the set value by setting
parameters.)
POINT
When timer-use points are set to 257 points or more or counter-use points are set to
256 points or more, the set value storage devices (D, W, R), specified at the time of
timer/counter use point setup, are automatically set in continuous numbers.
<Example>
When timer-use points are set to 512 points and set value storage device is set
to D1000, D equivalent to 256 points (D1000 to D1255) in T256 to T511 become
the devices, with continuous numbers, for the set values
4 - 17
4 CPU MODULE
MELSEC-Q
4.2.4 I/O devices
QCPU-A has 8192 I/O device points (X/Y0 to 1FFF) each for input (X) and output (Y).
There are actual I/O devices and remote I/O devices in this I/O range.
(1) Actual I/O device

This is the device range where an I/O module or special function module can be
installed to the basic base module/extension base module and controlled.
QCPU-A: 4096 points (X/Y0 to FFF)
(2) Remote I/O device

The remote I/O devices, following the actual I/O devices, can be used for the
following objectives:
(a) Allocate to a remote I/O station in the MELSECNET(II) data link system.
(b) Allocate to a remote I/O station in the MELSECNET/10 network system.
(c) Allocate to the reception data storage device or transmission data storage
device in the MELSECNET/MINI-S3's automatic refresh setting.
(d) Use as the substitute to an internal relay.
4.2.5 I/O allocation of special function modules
By registering the model name of the following special function modules upon the I/O
allocation from a peripheral device, dedicated commands for special function modules
can be used.
Model name of special function module Model name of the module to be set
A1SJ71UC24-R2
A1SJ71UC24-R4 A1SJ71C24
A1SJ71UC24-PRF
A1SJ71PT32-S3 A1SPT32S3
4 - 18
4 CPU MODULE
MELSEC-Q
4.2.6 MELSECNET/MINI (S3) automatic refresh
By setting link information, I/O storage device, etc. of MELSECNET/MINI (S3) to

parameters, the module automatically communicates with the buffer memory area for
the batch refresh send/received data of A1SJ71PT32-S3/AJ71PT32-S3 master
module (abbreviated as the master module hereafter).
Sequence programs can be created using the I/O devices as they are allocated to
send/received by the automatic refresh setting. (The FROM/TO instructions are not
required.)
POINTS
(1) Since up to 8 master modules can be set for automatic refresh by the
parameter, automatic refresh is possible for up to 8 modules. If 9 or more
modules are desired, use the FROM/TO instruction in the sequence program
from the 9th module.
(2) Since automatic refresh is not possible with send/received data for separate
refresh I/O module and for remote terminal modules No.1 to No.14, use the
FROM/TO instruction for them. However, the remote terminal modules shown
below are subject of automatic refresh in a limited area:
• AJ35PTF-R2 RS-232C interface module
• AJ35PT-OPB-M1-S3 mount-type tool box
• AJ35PT-OPB-P1-S3 portable type tool box
(3) For the master modules set up for automatic refresh, CPU automatically turns
ON the link communication start signal Y(n+18) or Y(n+28), so it is not
necessary to turn it on from the sequence program.
(4) Automatic refresh of I/O data is performed by batch after the CPU executes the
END instruction. (Automatic refresh processing is performed when the CPU is
in the RUN/PAUSE/STEP RUN state).
(5) The master module may perform the processing while link communication start
signal Y(n+28) is OFF depending on the remote terminal module connected.
For instance, if the AJ35PTF-R2 RS-232C interface module is used without
protocol, it is necessary to write parameters to the parameter area (buffer
memory address 860 to 929) while the link communication start signal is OFF.
The link communication start signal becomes ON after CPU enters the RUN
state and one scan is performed, so write the parameters during the first 1
scan.
Link communication start signal

Y(n+28)
M9038
1 scan
CPU RUN
4 - 19
4 CPU MODULE
MELSEC-Q
(1) Parameter setting items, setting ranges and contents of automatic refresh, as well
as the buffer memory address of the master module which is used for exchanging
data with QCPU-A are shown below.
Set the parameters for the number of A1SJ71PT32-S3/AJ71PT32-S3 master
modules used.
I/O signal from Buffer memory
the master address of the Item Setting range Description
module master module
Number of master
—— —— 1 to 8 module (s) • Sets the total number of master modules to be used.
modules
• Sets the head I/O number where the master module is
—— —— Head I/O No. I/O points of CPU
installed.
Model classification of • MINI ........................... In I/O mode (occupies 32 points)
—— —— • MINI or MINI-S3
MINI/MINI-S3 • MINI-S3 ..................... In expansion mode (occupies 48 points)
• Set only when MINI is set.
Total number of remote • In MINI-S3, the number of master module's initial ROMs
—— 0 0 to 64 station (s)
I/O stations becomes valid, so the setting is not necessary .(When it is set,
the setting is ignored).
•X • Sets the devices to store received/send data for batch refresh.
Received data storage
—— 110 to 141 • M, L, B, T, C, D, W, R, none • Specify the head number of a device.
device
(Bit device: multiples of 16) • Occupies as the automatic refresh area from the head of the
•Y device for the number of stations (8 points/station × 64 station =
Send data storage
—— 10 to 41 • M, L, B, T, C, D, W, R, none 512 points: bit device) 2
device
(Bit device: multiples of 16) • Use of X/Y remote I/O range is recommended for devices.
• Sets the number of retries upon a communication error.
—— 1 Number of retries 0 to 32 times • Error is not output if communication is restored within the
number of retries set.
(1) Link priority........... Link access by MINI-S3 has the priority.
During the link access, FROM/TO is
caused to wait.
• Possible to read out the received data refreshed at the
same timing.
• Maximum (0.3ms + 0.2ms × number of separate refresh
Link priority, CPU priority
stations) of FROM/TO instruction wait time may be
1 FROM/TO response Priority selection of access
—— generated.
Y(n + 1A) specification to the master module buffer
(2) CPU priority.......... Access by FROM/TO instruction of CPU
memory
has the priority.
Even during the link access, it interrupts
and accesses.
• Depending on the timing, received data in the midst of I/O
refresh may be read.
• No wait time for FROM/TO instruction.
Data clear specification • Retain ........................ Retains the received data for batch and
1
—— for communication faulty Retain, clear (received data) separate refresh.
Y(n + 1B)
station • Clear .......................... Sets all points to OFF
100 • Sets the head device to store the faulty station detection data.
to M, L, B, T, C, D, W, R, none • MINI ........................... occupies 4 words; MINI-S3: occupies 5
—— Error station detection
103 (Bit device: multiples of 16) words.
195
• Sets the head device to store the error code on the occurrence
107
of an error.
196
—— Error No. T, C, D, W, R • MINI ........................... occupies 1 word;
to
MINI-S3 ..................... occupies (1 + number of remote terminal
209
modules) words
• Test message sending
Line error check setting • OFF data sending • Sets data sending method for verification of error location on
—— 4
(Line error) • Transmit data immediately the occurrence of a line error.
before line error
1 "n" is determined by the installation location of the master module.
2 When the total number of remote I/O station is odd, add 1 to the station number to obtain storage devices occupied.
4 - 20
4 CPU MODULE
MELSEC-Q
(2) Setting of send/received data storage device is explained using the system
example shown below.
<Example> When device X/Y400 and later are used as remote I/O stations:
Y20 to Y3F AX41C Station 1 (number of stations occupied: 4 stations)

A1SJ71PT32-S3 X0 to X1F
master module A1S
A1S Y41 AJ35TB1-16D
Q06H X41
CPU Station 5
A1S61P -A
(number of stations
occupied: 2 stations)
MELSECNET/MINI
• Head I/O number : 40

• Model classification
(MINI/MINI-S3) : MINI
• Total number of AJ35TJ-8R AX40Y50C
remote I/O stations : 11 stations Station 11 Station 7
(number of stations occupied: 1 station) (number of stations occupied: 4 stations)
Sample parameter setting of the GPP function software package for the above
system configuration is shown below:
Number of modules [1] (0-8) I/O No. 0040
Model MINI
Number of stations 11
Received X0400
Send Y0400
Retries 5
Response CPU
Data clear Clear
Detection
Error number
Error Retain
The storage devices for send/received data for the present system example are
as follows:
(a) Storage device for received data
Master module QCPU-A
Address b15 b8 b7 b0
110 Station 2 Station 1 X40F to X408 X407 to X400
115 Station 11 X45F to X458 X457 to X450
Input area Used by the system
4 - 21
4 CPU MODULE
MELSEC-Q
1 Set the device number (X400) for b0 of the station 1 as a received data
storage device.
2 The received data storage device occupies from X400 to X45F.

For the present system example, the total number of stations is odd, so
it is occupied for one extra station.
3 The device numbers of input modules connected are as follows:

Stations 1 to 4 AX41C X400 to X41F
Stations 5 to 6 AJ35TB-16D X420 to X42F
Stations 7 to 8 AX40Y50C X430 to X43F
With respect to X440 to X45F, they are simultaneously refreshed, and

set to OFF at any time.
Do not use X440 to X45F in the sequence program.
(b) Send data storage device

Master module QCPU-A
Address b15 b8 b7 b0
10 Station 2 Station 1 Y40F to Y408 Y407 to Y400
15 Station 11 Y45F to Y458 Y457 to Y450
Output area Used by the system
1 Set the device number (Y400) for b0 of the station 1 as a send data
storage device.
2 The send data storage device occupies from Y400 to Y45F.

For the present system example, the total number of the stations is odd,
so it occupies for one extra station.
3 The device numbers of output modules connected are as follows:

Stations 9 to 10 AX40Y50C Y400 to Y44F
Station 11 AJ35TJ-8R Y450 to Y457
With respect to Y400 to Y43F and Y458 to Y44F, they are

simultaneously refreshed, but are not output.
POINTS
(1) Set the send and received data storage devices so that device numbers do not
overlap.
When the received data storage device is set to B0 in the system configuration
example, it occupies B0 to B5F as the device range.
Set the send data storage device to B60 or later. When the send data storage
device is set to B60, the device range will be B60 to BBF.
(2) If a bit device is specified as the send/received data storage device, the device
number set must be a multiple of 16.
<Example> X0, X10 .............X100,...........
M0, M16,...........M256, ..........
B0, B10, ............B100,...........
(3) Device range used is (8 points) × (Number of stations).
When the number of stations is an odd number, extra 8 points are necessary.
4 - 22
4 CPU MODULE
MELSEC-Q
4.3 Function List
Various functions of QCPU-A are explained below.
Function (application) Description Outline of setting and operation

Constant scan • Makes the processing time for a single scan in the sequence
Program execution at constant program constant. • Write to the special register D9020 by the sequence
intervals • Set the processing time within the range of 10ms to 190ms in program
Simplified positioning 10ms units.
• On power supply failure of 20ms or longer/CPU reset/power
supply off, data contents of the devices for which latches have
Latch (power failure compensation)
been set up in advance are retained. • Latch device and latch range are specified by
Continuous control by data
• Latch-enabled devices: L, B, T, C, D, W setting of peripheral device parameters.
retention on power failure
• Latched data are stored in the CPU and backed up by the
batteries of the memory cassette.
• Performs I/O automatic refresh communication with send/received
data area for the batch refresh of AJ71PT32-S3/A1SJ71PT32-S3
Automatic refresh of
up to a maximum of 8 modules. • Performed by setting the automatic refresh
MELSECNET/MINI-S3
• Automatic refresh is executed in a batch after END processing. parameter of a peripheral device. (Refer to Section
Simplification of sequence
• The FROM/TO instruction for I/O in the sequence program 4.2.6.)
program
becomes unnecessary. Programming is possible with I/O devices
which are allocated directly.
• When performed with the external input (X),
parameter is set with a peripheral device.
Remote RUN/STOP • When PC CPU is in RUN (the key switch is set to RUN), performs
• When performed by a peripheral device, perform in
When performing RUN/STOP the PC's STOP/RUN from outside the PC (external input,
the PC test mode.
control from outside the PC peripheral devices, computer) with a remote control.
• When performed via a computer link module,
perform using dedicated commands.
PAUSE • Stops the operation processing of PC CPU while retaining the
• Performed by a peripheral device in the PC test
• When stopping operation of ON/OFF of all the outputs (Y).
mode.
CPU while retaining the output When the operation is stopped by STOP, all the outputs (Y)
• When performed with the external input (X),
(Y) are set to OFF.
perform parameter setting with a peripheral device,
• When performing • When PC CPU is in RUN (the key switch is set to RUN), performs
set the special relay M9040 to ON with the
RUN/PAUSE control from the PC's PAUSE/RUN from outside the PC (external input,
sequence program, then perform.
outside the PC peripheral devices) with a remote control.
• With respect to devices to which status latches are set up, when
status latch conditions are met, data contents of the devices are
Status latch • Using a peripheral device, set the device to which
stored in the extension file register for status latch area in the
Carries out operation check the status latch is performed and the extension file
memory cassette. (Stored data are cleared by the latch clear
and failure factor check on each register where the data will be stored.
operation).
device when debugging • Using a peripheral device, monitor the status latch
• The criteria for satisfied condition can be selected from when the
or a failure condition is met. data.
SLT instruction is executed by the sequence program or when the
device value matches the set condition.
• With respect to a device to which the sampling trace is set up, the
Sampling trace • Using a peripheral device, set up the device to
operating condition of the device is sampled for the number of
Performs chronological perform sampling trace, trace point, and the
times specified per scan or per period, and the results are stored
checking on the behavior expansion file register where number of times and
in the expansion file register for sampling trace (the data stored
status of devices set up when the data will be stored.
are cleared by the latch clear operation).
debugging or an abnormal • Using a peripheral device, monitor the result of
• Sampling trace is performed by the STRA instruction in the
behavior is detected. sampling trace.
sequence program.
4 - 23
4 CPU MODULE
MELSEC-Q
Function (application) Description Outline of setting and operation

• Executes operations of the sequence program with one of the
conditions (1) to (5) given below, then stops.
Step operation
(1) Executes by each instruction.
Checks conditions of program • Chooses a stepping operation condition for the
(2) Executes by each circuit block.
execution and behavior during peripheral device and executes.
(3) Executes by the step intervals and the number of loops.
debugging, etc.
(4) Executes by the number of loops and break point.
(5) Executes when the device values concur.
• Executes operation of the clock built into the CPU module.
• Clock data: year, month, day , hour, minute, second, day of the
• Sets data for D9025 to D9028 by a peripheral
Clock 1 week
device, turns M9025 ON, then write to the clock
Program control by clock • When the clock data read request (M9028) is ON, the clock data
element.
data/external display of clock are read out and stored in D9025 to D9028 by the clock element
• Writes to the clock element by the sequence
data after the END processing of the sequence operation.
program. (Dedicated instructions can be used.)
• The clock element is backed up by the battery of the memory
cassette.
Priority order of LED display • Changes the display order of or cancels the ERROR LED • Writes data as to whether change order/cancel
Changing priority order of displays other than the error display by an operation stop and the display to D9038 or D9039 by the sequence
display/canceling display default display items on the LED display device. program.
• When an error that matches one of the self-diagnosis items is • There is a self-diagnosis item with which an
Self-diagnostic function
generated at the CPU power on or during RUN, it prevents operation can be continued or stopped by the
Detection of abnormal CPU
malfunctions by stopping the CPU operation and displaying the setting of peripheral device parameters.
behavior
error. • Reads out error code with a peripheral device and
Preventive maintenance
• Stores the error code corresponding to the self-diagnosis item. performs troubleshooting. (Refer to Section 4.1.4.)
• Sets DIP switch 3 to ON and turn ON or reset the
Boot operation from standard ROM • Boot operation is possible by booting parameters and sequence
module. (BOOT LED turns ON.)
Retains program at power OFF. programs from the standard ROM to the standard RAM at startup.
(Refer to section 4.3.3.)
1ms timer • In addition to the conventional high-speed timer (10ms) and low- • Adds "ZHTIME", a 1ms timer setting instruction, in a
Setting of 1ms timer speed timer (100ms), a 1ms timer can be used. program. (Refer to section 4.3.3.)
Sequence accumulation time
processing • When the faster scan time affects the processing of FROM/TO • Uses M9077 and D9077 as interlock to execute
Avoids influence of processing instruction or the scan time for special function modules, a special FROM/TO instruction in the unit of several ms.
FROM/TO instruction on relay and special register are used to avoid such problems. (Refer to section 4.3.3.)
special function modules.
1 Regarding the treatment of the year 2000
The year 2000 is a leap year, and the next day of the 28th of February is February 29th.
With A2USHCPU-S1, the clock element built in the CPU module automatically corrects the date, so resetting the date to the clock element by the user is
not necessary.
If the clock data is read out from PC CPU and used for sequence control, the year data is the last two digits of the year. Thus, depending on the use of the
data, correction of the year data by the sequence program will become necessary.
Year 1999 "99"
Year 2000 "00"
If a decision is made on the last two digits of year data solely by a magnitude comparison command alone, the years 2000 and after will be judged to be
older than the year 1999.
4 - 24
4 CPU MODULE
MELSEC-Q
4.4 Functions added to QCPU-A
This section describes the new functions added to QCPU-A (A mode) which are not
available with A2USHCPU-S1.
4.4.1 Boot operation from standard ROM
Boot operation is enabled by booting parameters and sequence programs from the
standard ROM to the standard RAM at startup.
The boot operation from the standard ROM allows the retention of sequence programs
without using batteries even when the power is OFF.
The procedure of the boot operation from the standard ROM is described below:
(1) Operation methods

There are two methods to operate QCUP-A: The RAM operation uses the
standard RAM. The boot operation uses the standard ROM and boots
parameters and sequence programs from the standard ROM to the standard
RAM at startup.
QCPU-A allows you to check the current operation method by the settings of DIP
switch 3 and M9073. The following table shows the setting combination.
Status of M9073
OFF ON
Status of DIP
switch 3
RAM operation RAM operation
OFF D9076: 0 D9076: 0
M9076: OFF M9076: OFF
Boot operation from standard ROM
RAM operation D9076: 2
ON D9076: 1 M9076: ON
M9076: OFF (Writing available with standard
ROM)
(a) Procedure to boot program (at startup only)

Boot a program from the standard ROM to the standard RAM.
1 Set DIP switch 3 to ON.
2 Turn ON or reset the module. (BOOT LED turns ON.)
(b) Procedure to write to standard ROM

Write a program from standard RAM to standard ROM.
1 Set DIP switch 3 to ON and turn M9073 ON. "2" is stored in D9076
and "1" is stored in M9076.
2 Start writing to the standard ROM. (M9074 is turned ON.)
3 When writing to the standard ROM is successfully completed, M9075
turns ON and D9075 stores the result of writing to the standard ROM
operation. (M9074 is turned ON.)
4 To repeat writing, turn M9074 OFF once and turn it ON again.
(When M9074 is turned OFF, M9075 is turned OFF.)
4 - 25
4 CPU MODULE
MELSEC-Q
(c) Detailed contents of D9075

The following table shows the detailed contents of special register D9075.
Value in D9075 Description
00H Successful completion
F1H RAM operation (Set DIP switch 3 to ON.)
F2H M9073 is OFF. (Turn M9073 ON.)
F3H Failed erasing the standard ROM
F4H Failed writing to the standard ROM
FEH Checking erasing the standard ROM
FFH Writing to the standard ROM
(d) Details of special relays during boot operation

The following table shows the details of special relays during boot operation
Special relay Name Description Details
To enable writing to the standard ROM, turn this
OFF: Disables writing to ROM
M9073 Setting of writing to standard ROM relay ON.
ON : Enables writing to ROM
(DIP switch 3 should be set to ON.)
Request for writing to standard OFF ON: Starts writing to When this relay is turned from OFF to ON, writing to
M9074
ROM ROM the standard ROM is started.
OFF: Failed writing to ROM Turns ON when writing to the standard ROM is
Successful completion of writing to
M9075 ON : Successfully completed to successfully completed.
standard ROM
writing to ROM (The writing status is stored in D9075.)
OFF: Writing to ROM disabled Turns ON when writing to standard ROM is enabled.
M9076 Status of writing to standard ROM
ON : Writing to ROM enabled (Turns ON when DIP switch 3 and M9075 are ON.)
POINTS
(1) Like the conventional A2USHCPU-S1, the available capacity of the standard
memory (file register, comment, etc.) does not increase even if the ROM
operation is selected.
(2) During the ROM operation, the program stored in the standard RAM is
overwritten with the program stored in the ROM.
Before starting the boot operation, be sure to back up the program with
peripheral devices.
(3) The capacity of the standard ROM is 144k bytes, the same as that of the
standard RAM. Writing is disabled when the total capacity of parameters and
programs exceeds 144k bytes. (Comments and file registers cannot be written
to the standard ROM.)
(4) When the attempt is made to boot parameters and programs from the
standard ROM to the standard RAM but the standard ROM does not contain
proper programs, a parameter error occurs. (Detailed error code: 114)
(5) Writing during RUN is performed to the standard RAM. When the boot
operation is used, be sure to write the program which is written to the standard
RAM during RUN also to the standard ROM.
4 - 26
4 CPU MODULE
MELSEC-Q
(2) Configuration of user memory area

The following figure shows the configuration of the user memory area during the
RAM operation and during the boot operation from the standard ROM.
Configuration example of user memory area (in case of Q06HCPU)
(a) During RAM operation (b) During boot operation from ROM
Parameter
T/C setting value
Main program
MELSECNET/10
network parameter
T/C setting value
Memory capacity
of ROM Sub program 1
(144k bytes max.) Unusable
Boot operation
Unused from ROM
3k bytes Parameter Change into Parameter

1k byte T/C setting value ROM T/C setting value
Main program Main program
30k steps max.
MELSECNET/10 MELSECNET/10
(60k bytes)
network parameter network parameter
1k byte T/C setting value T/C setting value
30k steps max.

Sub program1 Sub program1
(60k bytes)
Reserved for storing P/I addresses Reserved for storing P/I addresses
Reserved for storing operation results Reserved for storing operation results
Memory capacity
Expansion comment Expansion comment
of RAM
(144k bytes max.) Expansion file register Expansion file register
File register File register
Comment Comment
Expansion file register Expansion file register
4 - 27
4 CPU MODULE
MELSEC-Q
4.4.2 Usage of 1ms timer
With QCPU-A, a 1ms timer can be used in addition to the conventional high-speed
timer (10ms) and low-speed timer (100ms).
(1) Usage
Adding "ZHTIME", a 1ms timer setting instruction, in a program enables the use
of a 1ms timer. (The ZHTIME instruction must be written in the main program.)
The ZHTIME instruction is checked at startup and at switching from STOP to
RUN. When this instruction exists in the main program, the 1ms timer can be
used.
If the ZHTIME instruction does not exist in the main program, only the
100ms/10ms timer can be used, and the 1ms timer is disabled.
The number of occupied points is set as the total points of the 100ms timer,
10ms timer, retentive timer, and 1ms timer.
The area for the 1ms timer is reserved following that of the retentive timer.
Consequently, the constant specified with the ZHTIME instruction is designated
as the device number following that of the retentive timer specified by parameters
in the unit of 16 points.
(2) Use example of the ZHTIME instruction

The use example of the ZHTIME instruction is shown below.
Example) When the timer in 1ms is set at T208 and later:
M9037
LEDB ZHTIME
Designate the device
in the unit of 16 points.
SUB K208
LEDR
(3) Accuracy of 1ms timer

The following table shows the accuracy of 1ms timer.
Timer type Scan time Accuracy
T < 1ms + 2 scan time to - 1 ms
1ms
T 1ms + 2 scan time to - 1 scan time
4 - 28
4 CPU MODULE
MELSEC-Q
(4) Setting example

The followings are the setting examples with and without the expansion timer:
(a) Setting example when the expansion timer is not used
Number of occupied points: 256 (100ms timer: 120 points, 10ms timer: 40
points, retentive timer: 48 points, 1ms timer: 48 points)
M9037
LEDB ZHTIME
SUB K208
LEDR
According to the setting above, the devices designated for the 100ms timer
are T0 to T119, for the 10ms timer are T120 to T159, for the retentive timer
are T160 to T207, and for the 1ms timer are T208 to T255.
4 - 29
4 CPU MODULE
MELSEC-Q
(b) Setting example when the expansion timer is used

Number of occupied points: 512 (100ms timer: 240 points, 10ms timer: 80
points, retentive timer: 80 points, 1ms timer: 112 points)
M9037
LEDB ZHTIME
SUB K400
LEDR
According to the setting above, the devices designated for the 100ms timer
are T0 to T239, for the 10ms timer are T240 to T319, for the retentive timer
are T320 to T399, and for the 1ms timer are T400 to T511.
POINTS
Note the following points to use the ZHTIME instruction.
(1) The ZHTIME instruction must be written in the main program.
(2) The ZHTIME instruction must be designated in the unit of 16 points.
(3) The number of occupied points designated in the timer setting by parameters
should include those for the 1ms timer.
(4) When the range for the timer setting by parameters is between T256 and
2047, the initial device number to be used should be set at the item of the
retentive timer between T256 and 2047.
The 100ms timer should be used as the retentive timer.
4 - 30
4 CPU MODULE
MELSEC-Q
4.4.3 Sequence accumulation time processing
With QCPU-A, as the scan time becomes faster, it may affect the processing of
FROM/TO instruction or the scan time for special function modules.
Such problems can be avoided by using the following special relay and special register
as interlock and executing FROM/TO instruction in the unit of several ms.
(1) Procedure
Set by
Number Name Description Details
(Set at)
• Compares the setting value at D9077 with the time elapsed from
the start of measurement (accumulation time) at every scan.
Then, performs the following operations:
Setting value Accumulation time
: Turns M9077 ON and clears the accumulation time.
Sequence Setting value > Accumulation time
ON : Time elapsed
M9077 accumulation time : Turns M9077 from ON to OFF and clears the accumulation System
OFF: Time not elapsed
measurement time. When M9077 is already OFF, clears the accumulation
time.
When 1 to 255 is designated at D9077, M9077 is turned ON at
the first scan.
When a value other than 1 to 255 is designated at D9077, the
value in D9077 is reset to 0 and M9077 is always turned OFF.
• Stores the accumulation time used by M9077.
Sequence
Setting range: 1 to 255ms (Default: 5ms)
D9077 accumulation time Accumulation time setting User
When a value other than 1 to 255 ms is designated, the value in
measurement
D9077 is reset to 0.
The operation of M9077 above is shown below:
(a) When 5ms is set at D9077 (The scan time is shorter than the setting value.)
1st scan 2nd scan 3rd scan 4th scan 5th scan 6th scan
4ms 3ms 7ms 5ms 4ms 5ms
M9077
Turns OFF because Remains OFF because Turns ON because Remains ON because Turns OFF because Turns ON because
accumulation time accumulation time accumulation time accumulation time accumulation time accumulation time
is 4 ms. is 3 ms. is 10 ms. is 5 ms. is 4 ms. is 10 ms.
Internal timer 0 4 0 3 10 0 5 0 4 0 5 0
In the diagram above, M9077 is ON at the first scan so that the instruction is
executed. At the beginning of the second scan, the accumulation time does
not reach 5 ms. As a result, M9077 turns OFF, the accumulation time is
cleared, and the instruction is not executed. At the end of the second scan,
the accumulation time does not reach 5 ms, so that M9077 remains OFF
and the instruction is not executed. At the end of the third scan, the
accumulation time exceeds 5 ms. As a result, M9077 turns ON, the
accumulation time is cleared, and the instruction is executed at the forth
scan. At the end of the forth scan, the accumulation time exceeds 5 ms, so
that M9077 remains ON and the instruction is executed at the fifth scan. At
the end of the fifth scan, the accumulation time does not reach 5 ms so that
M9077 turns OFF. The accumulation time is cleared and the instruction is
not executed at the sixth scan.
4 - 31
4 CPU MODULE
MELSEC-Q
(b) When 5ms is set at D9077 (The scan time is longer than the setting value.)
1st scan 2nd scan 3rd scan 4th scan
10ms 10ms 10ms 10ms
M9077
Remains ON because Remains ON because Remains ON because Remains ON because

accumulation time accumulation time accumulation time accumulation time
is 10 ms. is 10 ms. is 10 ms. is 10 ms.
Internal timer 0 10 0 10 0 10 0 10 0
In the diagram above, M9077 is always ON when the scan time is always
longer than the setting value (D9077).
The following program example executes the FROM/TO instruction in the

unit of several seconds using M9077 and D9077 above.
M9036
MOV K5 D9077 Sets the accumulation time as 5ms.

Executes the FROM instruction
M9077 only when the interval between
FROM H0 H1000 D0 K10 sequence scans becomes 5ms
or more. (Executes it at first scan.)
1: The setting range for the sequence accumulation time is 1 to 255ms (default:
5ms).
The value in D9077 should be in the range between 1 and 255. Otherwise,
the value in D9077 is reset to 0 and M9077 is always OFF.
2: If the instruction signal for the FROM/TO instruction is a pulse signal, the
interlock with M9077 may mask the FROM/TO instruction, disabling
execution. In such a case, keep the instruction signal once in the other
device.
3: If execution order is set to the FROM/TO instruction, adding M9077 may
change the execution order. In such a case, do not use M9077, and make
the execution interval of the FROM/TO instruction longer with a user
program.
4 - 32
4 CPU MODULE
MELSEC-Q
4.5 Precautions When Handling the Module
Precautions when handling the CPU module, from unpacking to installation, are
described below.
• Use the PC in the environment given in the general specifications of this manual.
CAUTION
Using the PC outside the range of the general specifications may result in electric
shock, fire or malfunctioning, or may damage or degrade the module.
• Insert the tabs at the bottom of the module into the mounting holes in the base
module before installing the module, and tighten the module fixed screws with the
specified torque. Improper installation may result in malfunctioning, breakdowns or
cause the module to fall out.
• Tighten the screws with the specified torque. If the screws are loose, it may result in
short circuits, malfunctioning or cause the module to fall out.
If the screws are tightened too much, it may damage the screws and the module
may result in short circuits, malfunctioning or cause the module to fall out.
• Make sure the memory card is installed securely in its installation connector. After
installation, confirm that it is securely tightened. Defective contact may cause
malfunctioning.
• Do not touch the conducted part of the module or electric parts. This may cause
malfunctioning or breakdowns.
(1) Module case, memory card, terminal block connector and pin connector are made
of resin. Do not fall them or apply a strong shock to them.
(2) Do not remove the printed board of each module from its case. Doing so may
cause breakdown.
(3) While wiring, be careful not to let foreign matter such as wire chips get inside the
module. If it does get in, remove it immediately.
(4) When using the expansion base module (QA1S6 B), be sure to install the power
supply module. Although the module may work without the power supply module
under light load, stable operation is not guaranteed.
(5) Perform tightening of module installation screws and terminal screws on the CPU
module, power supply module, I/O module and special function module with the
following torque:
Screw location Tightening torque range
QCPU-A module fastening screw (M3 × 12) 36 to 48N • cm
AnS series, Module installation screws (M4 screw) 78 to 118N • cm
Terminal screws for power supply module and I/O module (M3.5 screw) 59 to 88N • cm
(6) When using the expansion cable, do not bind it with or place it close to the main
circuit (high-voltage, large-current) lines.
4 - 33
4 CPU MODULE
MELSEC-Q
4.6 Part Names and Settings of the CPU Module
4.6.1 Part names and settings

This section explains the names and settings of the CPU module.
Front face With front cover open
Q02HCPU
1)
MODE 2) MODE
RUN 9) RUN
ERR.
USER 3) ERR.
USER
BAT. BAT.
BOOT 4) BOOT
ON SW
5) 1
2
6) 10)
3
4
13)
5
7) STOP RUN
14)
RESET L CLR
PULL 15)
USB
11) 1
PULL
RS-232
12)
8)
When opening the cover,

put your finger here.
Side face
16)
17)
19)
18)
1: Not provided for Q02CPU-A.

4 - 34
4 CPU MODULE
MELSEC-Q
No. Name Applications

Hook used to fix the module to the base unit.
1) Module fixing hook
(Single-motion installation)
Indicates the mode of the CPU.
2) Mode judging LED Lit (orange) : A mode
Lit (green) : Q mode
Indicates the operating status of the CPU.
ON : During operation in "RUN" or "STEP RUN" mode.
3) RUN LED
OFF : During a stop in "STOP", "PAUSE" or "STEP RUN" mode or detection of
error whose occurrence stops operation.
ON : Detection of self-diagnostic error which will not stop operation, except
battery error.
4) ERROR LED (When operation continued at error detection is set in the parameter)
OFF : Normal
Flicker : Detection of error whose occurrence stops operation.
ON : Annunciator ON
5) USER LED OFF : Normal
Flicker : Execution of latch clear
ON : Occurrence of battery error due to reduction in battery voltages of CPU
6) BAT. ALARM LED and memory card.
OFF : Normal
ON : Execution of boot operation
7) BOOT LED
OFF : Non-execution of boot operation
8) Module loading lever Used to load the module to the base unit.
9) Memory card EJECT button Used to eject the memory card from the CPU.
10) Memory card loading connector Connector used to load the memory card to the CPU.
11) USB connector 2 Unusable (Usable for Q mode only)
Connector for connection with a peripheral device.
12) RS-232 connector 2
Can be connected by RS-232C connection cable (QC30R2).
2: When normally connecting a cable to the USB connector or RS-232 connector, clamp the cable to prevent it from
coming off due to the dangling, moving or carelessly pulling of the cable.
4 - 35
4 CPU MODULE
MELSEC-Q
No. Name Applications

Used to set the items for operation of the CPU.
For OS boot designation and RAM/ROM operation, refer to the QCPU-A (A mode)
additional manual.
DIP switches
SW1: Must not be used. Normally OFF.
ON SW (Shipped in OFF position)
1
(Shipped in OFF position)
13) 2 SW3: RAM/boot operation designation.
3 (Shipped in OFF position)
ON : Boot operation
4
OFF : RAM operation
5
RUN : Executes sequence program operation.
14) RUN/STOP switch
STOP : Stops sequence program operation.
RESET : Used to perform hardware reset, operation fault rest, operation
initialization, etc.
If this switch is left in the RESET position, the whole system will be reset
15) RESET/L.CLR switch and the system will not operate properly. After performing reset, always
return this switch to the neutral position.
L.CLR : Used to turn "OFF" or "zero" all data in the parameter-set latch area.
Used to clear the sampling trace and status latch registration.
Hole for the screw used to fix to the base unit.
16) Module fixing screw hole
(M3 × 12 screw)
17) Module fixing hook Hook used to fix to the base unit.
For connection of battery lead wires.
18) Battery connector pin (When shipped from the factory, the lead wires are disconnected from the connector
to prevent the battery from consuming.)
19) Battery Backup battery for use of standard RAM and power failure compensation function.
4 - 36
4 CPU MODULE
MELSEC-Q
4.6.2 Switch operation after program write
(1) When writing a program during STOP of CPU

Write a program during STOP of the CPU in the following procedure.
1) RUN/STOP switch: STOP
RUN LED: OFF................. CPU STOP status Program write
2) RUN/STOP switch: RUN
RUN LED: Flicker ............. CPU STOP status
3) RUN/STOP switch: STOP RUN
RUN LED: ON .................. CPU RUN status
(2) When you wrote a program during RUN

When you wrote a program during RUN of the CPU, do not operate the switch.
POINT
The CPU will not go into the RUN status if you move the key switch to RUN
immediately after writing a program in the STOP status of the CPU. After writing a
program, perform rest with the RESET/L.CLR switch, then move the RUN/STOP
switch to RUN to set the CPU to the RUN status.
4.6.3 Latch clear operation
To perform latch clear, operate the RESET/L.CLR switch in the following procedure.
1) RESET/L.CLR switch: Move the switch to L.CLR several times until the
USER LED flickers.
(Do not move it to RESET.)
USER LED: Flicker.............. Ready for latch clear.
2) RESET/L.CLR switch: Move the switch to L.CLR once more.
USER LED: OFF ................. Latch clear complete.
POINT
Latch clear can be set to be valid or invalid device-by-device by making device
setting in the parameter mode.
4.6.4 Installation and removal of memory card during power-on
Do not install or remove the memory card while power is on.
POINT
If you installed or removed the memory card while power was on, the data within
the memory card may be corrupted.
4 - 37
4 CPU MODULE
MELSEC-Q
MEMO
4 - 38
5 POWER SUPPLY MODULE
MELSEC-Q
5. POWER SUPPLY MODULE
5.1 Specifications
The specification of the power supply module are shown below.
Table 5.1 Power supply module specifications

Performance specifications
Item
A1S61PN A1S62PN A1S63P
Base installation location Power supply module installation slot
100 to 240VAC -+10%
15% 24VDC -+30%
35%
Input power supply
(85 to 264VAC) (15.6 to 31.2VDC)
Input frequency 50/60Hz±5% ——
Maximum input apparent power 105VA 41W
Inrush current 20A 8ms or less 81A 1ms or less
Output current 5VDC 5A 3A 5A
rating 24VDC —— 0.6A ——
Overcurrent 1 5VDC 5.5A or above 3.3A or above 5.5A or above
protection 24VDC —— 0.66A or above ——
Overvoltage 2 5VDC 5.5 to 6.5V 5
protection 24VDC ——
Efficiency 65% or above
Allowable period of momentary
20ms or less 1ms or less
power failure 3
Dielectric Primary-5VDC Between input: batch LG and output: batch FG, 500VAC
withstand voltage Primary-24VDC 2830VAC rms/3 cycle (altitude 2,000m (6562 ft) ——
Between input: batch LG and
Insulation resistance output: batch FG, 500VAC 5M or above by insulation resistance tester
(5M or above by insulation resistance tester)
By noise simulator with noise voltage of 1,500Vp-p,
By noise simulator with noise voltage of 500Vp-p,
noise width of 1µs, and noise frequency of 25 to
Noise durability noise width of 1µs, and noise frequency of 25 to
60Hz.
60Hz.
Noise voltage IEC801-4, 2kV
Operation display LED display (ON for 5VDC output)
Terminal screw size M3.5 × 7
Applicable wire size 0.75 to 2mm2
Applicable crimp-style terminal RAV1.25-3.5, RAV2-3.5
Applicable tightening torque 59 to 88N•cm
External dimensions (mm (inch)) 130 (5.12) × 55 (2.17) × 93.6 (3.69)
Weight (kg) 0.60 0.60 0.50
5-1
MELSEC-Q
POINTS
1: Overcurrent protection
If the current above the spec value flows in the 5VDC or 24VDC circuit,
overcurrent protection device interrupts the circuit and stops the system
operation. LED display of the power supply module is either OFF or ON dimly,
due to the voltage drop.
When this device is once activated, remove factors of insufficient current
capacity and short-circuit before starting up the system. When the current
restores to the normal value, the system performs the initial start.
2: Overvoltage protection
When 5.5V to 6.5V of overvoltage is applied to the 5VDC circuit, overvoltage
protection device interrupts the circuit and stops the system operation.
LED display of the power supply module turns OFF. To restart the system, turn
OFF the input power supply, then back to ON. The system performs the initial
start.
If the system does not start and LED display remains OFF, the power supply
module needs to be replaced
3: Allowable period of momentary power failure
This indicates allowable period of momentary power failure of PC CPU, and is
determined by the power supply module used. Allowable period of momentary
power failure for a system using A1S63P is the period it takes until the 24VDC
falls below the specified voltage (15.6VDC) after cutting off the primary power
supply of the stabilized power supply, which supplies the 24VDC power to
A1S63P.
5-2
MELSEC-Q
5.2 Name and Setting of Each Part
5.2.1 Name of each part of different power supply modules is provided below.
(1) A1S61PN (2) A1S62PN

9) 9)
MELSECA1S61PN MELSECA1S62PN
POWER 1) POWER 1)
MITSUBISHI MITSUBISHI
8) 8)
INPUT OUTPUT INPUT OUTPUT
100-240VAC 5VDC 5A 100-240VAC 5VDC 3A
105VA 105VA 24VDC 0.6A
50 / 60Hz 50 / 60Hz
NC +24V
NC
2) 24G
3) (FG)
3) (FG)
4) (LG)
4) (LG)
INPUT INPUT
5) 100-240VAC
5) 100-240VAC
A1S61PN A1S62PN
7) 7)
9)
MELSECA1S63P
POWER 1)
MITSUBISHI
8)
INPUT OUTPUT
DC15.6 31.2V DC 5V 5A
NC
NC
3) FG
NC
NC
4) LG
+24V
6) INPUT
24G
7)
(3) A1S63P
No. Name Usage
1) "POWER" LED An LED which turns ON when 5VDC power is supplied
2) 24VDC/24GDC terminals Supplies power to the output module that requires 24VDC power supply (through external wiring).
3) FG terminals A ground terminal connected to the shielded pattern on the PC board
4) LG terminals A ground for power supply filter. With A1S61PN or A1S62PN, the potential is half the input voltage.
A power supply input terminal used to be connected with AC power supply between 100VAC and
5) Power supply input terminals
200VAC
6) Power supply input terminals A power supply input terminal used to be connected with 24VDC power supply
7) Terminal screw M3.5 × 7
8) Terminal cover A protective cover for the terminal block
9) Module fastening screw A screw that fastens the module to the base module (M4 screw, tightening torque: 59 to 88 N•cm)
POINTS
(1) Do not use the terminal marked NC in the terminal block.
(2) Be sure to ground LG and FG terminals with Type D (Type 3) or higher
grounding.
5-3
MELSEC-Q
MEMO
5-4
6 BASE MODULE AND EXPANSION CABLE
MELSEC-Q
6. BASE MODULE AND EXPANSION CABLE
This chapter describes the specifications of the base module (basic base module and
expansion base module) and expansion cable used in the system, as well as the use
standard of the expansion base module.
6.1 Specifications of Base Modules
(1) Specifications of basic base module

Type name
QA1S33B QA1S35B QA1S38B
Item
Allowable number of I/O
3 5 8
module to be mounted
Expansion Available
Applicable module QCPU-A/AnS series module
Current consumption (A) 0.107 0.117 (0.086) 0.118 (0.086)
Mounting hole size M5 screw hole or 5.5 hole (for M5 screw)
Dimensions 255 (W) × 130 (H) × 51.2 (D) 325 (W) × 130 (H) × 51.2 (D) 430 (W) × 130 (H) × 51.2 (D)
Weight (kg) 0.75 1.00
Accessory Installation screw: M5 × 25 (4), DIN rail mounting adapter
(2) Specifications of expansion base module

Type name 6
QA1S65B QA1S68B
Item
Allowable number of I/O
5 8
module to be mounted
Expansion Available
Applicable module AnS series module
Current consumption (A) 0.117 (0.088) 0.118 (0.090)
Mounting hole size M5 screw hole or 5.5 hole (for M5 screw)
Dimensions 315 (W) × 130 (H) × 51.2 (D) 420 (W) × 130 (H) × 51.2 (D)
Weight (kg) 0.75 1.00
Accessory Installation screw: M5 × 25 (4), DIN rail mounting adapter
6-1
MELSEC-Q
6.2 Specifications of Expansion Cable
The specifications of the expansion cable used for the QCPU system are shown
below:
Type name
QC06B QC12B QC30B QC50B QC100B
Item
Cable length (m) 0.6 1.2 3.0 5.0 10.0
Connection between the basic base module and the expansion base module, or between the expansion
Usage
base modules
Weight (kg) 0.16 0.22 0.40 0.60 1.11
POINT
When using two or more expansion cables, limit the total length of the cable to
13.2m or less.
6-2
MELSEC-Q
6.3 Part Names of Base Module
This section describes the part names of the base module.
(1) Basic base module (QA1S33B, QA1S35B, QA1S38B)

4)
5)
OUT
5V
CPU
SG
FG
2)
POWER I/O0 I/O1 I/O2 I/O3 I/O4 I/O5 I/O6 I/O7
QA1S38B
1)
3)
6)
No. Name Usage

A connector for signal transmission with the expansion base module. Connects the expansion
1) Expansion cable connector
cable.
A protective cover of expansion cable connector. Before connecting a cable, it is necessary to
2) Base cover remove the section enclosed with a groove below OUT of the base cover with nippers or other
tools.
A connector connects the power supply module, CPU module, I/O module, or special function
module.
3) Module connector
Attach the supplied connector cover to the reserved connectors with no module to prevent the
ingress of dust.
A screw hole used for fastening a module to the base.
4) Screw hole for fastening modules Screw size for CPU module : M3 × 12
Screw size for modules other than CPU module : M4 × 12
5) Base module installation hole A hole used for installing the base module to a panel such as a control panel. (M5 screw)
6) DIN rail hook A hook used for DIN rail mounting.
6-3
MELSEC-Q
(2) Expansion base module (QA1S65B, QA1S68B)

QA1S65B,QA1S68B
5)
6)
IN OUT
3)
5V
SG
2) FG

QA1S68B
1)
4) 7)
No. Name Usage

A connector for signal transmission with the basic base module or the other expansion base
1) Expansion cable connector module. Connects the expansion cable.
Do not remove the supplied connector cover.
2) Base cover A protective cover of expansion cable connector.
A switch used to set the stage numbers of the expansion base modules.
3) Stage number setting switch
Refer to section 6.4 for the setting procedure.
A connector connects the power supply module, I/O module, or special function module.
Attach the supplied connector cover (or a blank cover module for QA1S6 B base module) on the
4) Module connector
reserved connectors with no module to prevent the ingress of dust.
Blank cover unit for QA1S65B/QA1S68B: A1SG60
5) Screw hole for fastening modules A screw hole used for fastening a module to the base. Screw size: M4 × 12
6) Base module installation hole A hole used for mounting the base module to a panel such as a control panel. (M5 screw)
7) DIN rail hook A hook used for DIN rail mounting.
6-4
MELSEC-Q
6.4 Setting the Expansion Stage Numbers
This section describes how to set the expansion stage number to use the expansion
base module.
Loosen the upper and lower

screws of the base cover. IN OUT
Remove the base cover from the
expansion base module.
Select the stage number from

1 to 7 in the connector (PIN1)
located between the expansion
cable connectors IN and OUT.
Then, insert a connector pin into
the appropriate stage number. PIN1
1
2
3
4
5
Reattach the base cover to the 6
7
expansion base module and
fasten the screws.
(Tightening torque: 36 to 48N cm)
Completion
Stage number setting for expansion base modules

Stage number setting
1th stage 2th stage 3th stage 4th stage 5th stage 6th stage 7th stage
Position of
connector pin in
stage number
setting connector
POINTS
(1) To set the stage number setting connector, select the appropriate number from
1 through 7 in ascending order according to the number of expansion modules.
(2) Do not assign the same stage number to several modules or skip any stage
numbers. Otherwise, improper I/O operation results.
6-5
MELSEC-Q
MEMO
6-6
7 MEMORY CARD AND BATTERY
MELSEC-Q
7. MEMORY CARD AND BATTERY
This chapter explains the specifications and handling of the memory card and the
battery that can be used with QCPU-A.
7.1 Specifications of Memory Card
The memory card that can be used with QCPU-A conforms to the specifications of
JEIDA/PCMCIA small PC card.
QCPU-A can contain only one memory card.
(1) SRAM card

Type name
Q2MEM-1MBS
Item
Memory capacity after format 1011.5kbyte
Number of storable files 256
Number of insertions 5000 times max.
Dimensions 42.8 (W) × 45 (H) × 3.3 (D)
Weight (kg) 15
7.2 Specifications of Battery (for CPU module and memory card)
(1) Battery for CPU module

Type name
Q6BAT
Item
Type Manganese dioxide lithium primary battery
Initial voltage (V) 3.0
Nominal current (mA/h) 1800 7
Expected life (Storage life) 10 years (at ordinary temperature)
Total length of power failure Refer to section 7.7.1.
Retains the contents of program memory and standard RAM during
Usage
power failure.
(2) Battery for memory card

Type name
Q2MEM-BAT
Item
Type Graphite fluoride lithium primary battery
Initial voltage (V) 3.0
Nominal current (mA/h) 48
Expected life (Storage life) 4 years (at ordinary temperature)
Total length of power failure Refer to section 7.7.1.
Usage Retains the contents of SRAM card during power failure.
7-1
MELSEC-Q
7.3 Handling the memory card
(1) Inserting a battery into the SRAM card

A battery is packaged with your SRAM card in order to retain memory during
power failure. Be sure to insert the battery into the SRAM card before using the
card.
POINT
Although a battery is inserted into the CPU module, the memory of the SRAM card
will not be backed up until a battery is inserted into the card.
Also, if a battery is inserted into the SRAM card but not into the CPU module, the
memory of the standard RAM of the CPU module will not be backed up.
7.4 Part names of memory card
This section describes the part names of the memory card.
1)
4)
Write-protection
ON direction
LOCK
RELEASE direction
direction
3)
2)
No. Name Usage

1) Connector section A connector section connected to the CPU module.
2) Battery holder Holds the lithium battery for data backup of the SRAM memory.
A switch to fasten the battery holder to the memory card. It is fastened at LOCK position (write-
3) Battery holder lock switch protect switch side).
LOCK: The holder is fastened. RELEASE: The holder is released.
Sets the write protection of the memory. The factory setting is OFF.
4) Write-protect switch ON : Disables writing data.
OFF : Enables writing data.
: The battery holder lock switch automatically returns from the RELEASE to LOCK position when the battery holder is removed.
7-2
MELSEC-Q
7.5 Insertion/removal of the memory card
Be sure to turn OFF the CPU module before inserting/removing the memory card
into/from the CPU module.
(1) Inserting the memory card
To insert the memory card into the CPU module, check the right orientation and
fully insert the memory card into the connector so that the remaining section of
the memory card is as high as the memory card EJECT button.
Memory card EJECT button
Memory card
CPU module
Direction of "Precautions"
insertion side
(2) Removing the memory card

To remove the memory card from the CPU module, press the memory card
EJECT button to push out the memory card.
Memory card EJECT button
Press
Memory card
CPU module
Direction of removal
POINT
Note that the data in the memory card may be corrupted if the proper procedure
above is not followed.
7-3
MELSEC-Q
7.6 Inserting batteries (for CPU module and memory card)
(1) The battery for the CPU module is shipped with its connector removed. Connect
the connector according to the procedure below:
Open the cover at the bottom

of the CPU module. Side of CPU
Check if the battery is properly

inserted. Front side
Check the orientation of the connector

attached to the housing and insert it
into the connector pin of the battery.
Connector
Completion
Bottom side
Battery
(2) The battery for the SRAM card is shipped separately from the battery holder. To
use the SRAM memory, set the battery holder according to the procedure below:
Remove the battery holder from
the SRAM card.
"+" mark
Place the battery in the holder
with its "+" side up.
Insert the battery holder with

the battery into the memory card
as far as it will go.
Battery holder lock switch

Check that the battery holder lock
switch is at the LOCK position.
LOCK position
The battery holder lock switch automatically returns to
Completion LOCK position when the battery holder is removed.
With this status, insert the battery holder as far as it will go.
7-4
MELSEC-Q
7.7 Battery replacement
Special relay M9006 or M9007 turns ON at the voltage drop of the backup battery for
program and memory retention during power failure. The contents of the program and
memory are not cleared immediately after these special relays turns ON, but they may
be lost if you overlook these relays being turned ON.
Be sure to replace the battery before the total of power failure time after M9006 or
M9007 turns ON reaches the specified retention time.
POINT
M9006 gives an alarm about low voltage of the battery. Data is retained within the
specified time after M9006 turns ON; however, the battery should be replaced as
soon as possible.
M9048 turns ON at the voltage drop of the battery for the standard RAM or SRAM
card.
POINTS
The following table shows the relationship between the batteries in the CPU module
and SRAM card and the memory backup.
The following two are the key factors:
1 The battery in the CPU module does not back up the memory of the SRAM
card.
2 The battery in the SRAM card does not back up the memory of the CPU
module.
AC power supply to Battery in CPU Battery in SRAM Memory of CPU Memory of SRAM
CPU module module card module card
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
: Backup available : Backup not available
The reference battery service life and replacement procedures are described on the
subsequent pages.
7-5
MELSEC-Q
7.7.1 Battery service life
(1) Service life of the battery for the CPU module

The service life of the battery for the CPU module varies depending on the type
of the CPU.
The battery service life for each CPU is shown below:
Battery service life Battery service life (Total power failure time) [Hrs.]
Guaranteed value
Actual value (typical) After M9006 turns ON
CPU type name (minimum)
Q02CPU-A 50625 79024 120
Q02HCPU-A, Q06HCPU-A 2140 16200 120
The actual value indicates the average service life; the guaranteed value indicates the shortest service
life.
(2) Service life of the battery for the SRAM card

The battery service life for the SRAM card is shown below:
Battery service life Battery service life (Total power failure time) [Hrs.]
Guaranteed value
Actual value (typical) After M9006 turns ON
Battery type name (minimum)
At storage 690 6336 8
Q02MEM-BAT
During operation 11784 13872 8
The actual value indicates the average service life; the guaranteed value indicates the shortest service
life.
The life at storage indicates the time while the SRAM card is inserted into the PC CPU and the CPU is
turned OFF, or while the SRAM card is removed from the CPU.
The life during operation is the time while the SRAM card is inserted into the PC CPU and the CPU is
turned ON.
POINT
Note that the SRAM card in the CPU consumes the battery voltage even when the
CPU is turned ON.
For guidance, the service life of the battery for the SRAM card is guaranteed as
approximately 1.1 years on the condition that it is inserted into the CPU and the CPU is
turned on one hour a day.
The service life of Q6BAT is approximately 10 years when it is not connected with the
CPU module, or when it is connected with the CPU and is always live. Q6BAT should
be immediately replaced when the total of power failure time exceeds the guaranteed
life in the table above and M9006 turns ON.
Even when the total of power failure time is less than the guaranteed life in the table
above, it is recommended to replace the battery within the following years in terms of
preventive maintenance.
1 Ten years for Q02CPU-A
2 Four to five years for Q02HCPU-A or Q06HCPU-A
The battery for the SRAM card should be replaced immediately after M9048 turns ON.
7-6
MELSEC-Q
7.7.2 Battery replacement procedure
(1) Replacing the battery for the CPU module

When the service life of the battery for the CPU module expires, replace the
battery in the following procedure:
Turn ON the CPU module 10 minutes or more before removing the battery.
The capacitor backs up the memory for several minutes even when the battery is
removed. When the battery is removed for the following guaranteed time, the
contents of the memory may be lost. Replace the battery as quickly as possible.
You can also replace the battery while the CPU is turned ON. In such a case, the
contents of the memory are retained with the power supply voltage from the
power supply module.
Backup time by capacitor

Backup time by capacitor [min.]
3
Battery replacement
Turn OFF the PC.

Side of CPU
Open the cover of QCPU-A.
Remove the current battery Front side

from the holder.
Insert the new battery in the proper

orientation and connect the lead
connector to the connector.
Close the cover of QCPU-A.
Monitor M9006
OFF
to check whether it
turns ON or OFF.
ON
The battery for the memory card is defective.
Refer to section 7.7.2 (2). Completion
7-7
MELSEC-Q
(2) Replacing the battery for SRAM card

When the service life of the battery for the SRAM card expires, replace the
battery in the following procedure. The memory card does not have the
secondary battery to back up the memory. Therefore, to retain data, the battery
should be replaced while the SRAM card is inserted into the CPU module that is
turned ON.
POINTS
Note the following precautions before replacing the battery.
1 Back up the data with GPPW before replacing the battery.
2 The battery is replaced while the CPU module is turned ON. Be extremely
careful with surroundings to avoid an electric shock.
3 When removing/inserting the battery holder from/into the SRAM card, be careful
not to drop the battery from the battery holder.
Battery replacement
Open the front cover of QCPU-A

while it is turned ON.
Lower the battery holder lock switch

with a flat-blade driver or other tools.
Draw out the battery holder from Direction

the SRAM card. of removal
Remove the current battery from

the battery holder.
Insert the new battery in the proper

orientation into the battery holder.
Fully insert the battery holder into

the SRAM card and check that the "+" mark
battery holder lock switch is set to
LOCK position.
Monitor M9048
OFF
to check whether it turns
ON or OFF.
ON
Monitor M9006 OFF

to check whether it turns
ON or OFF.
ON
The battery for the CPU module is defective.
Refer to section 7.7.2 (1). Completion
7-8
8 EMC DIRECTIVE AND LOW-VOLTAGE INSTRUCTION
MELSEC-Q
8. EMC DIRECTIVE AND LOW-VOLTAGE INSTRUCTION
For the products sold in the European countries, the conformance to the EMC
Directive, which is one of the European Directives, has been legally obliged to be
certified since 1996. Also, the conformance to the Low Voltage Directive, which is one
of the European Directives, has been legally obliged to be certified since 1997.
The manufacturers who recognize their products to conform to the EMC Directive and
Low Voltage Directive require to declare that their products conform to these Directives
and put "CE mark" on their products.
8.1 Requirements for conformance to EMC Directive
The EMC Directive specifies both "emission (electromagnetic interference) which

means that an intense electromagnetic wave is not emitted to the outside" and
"immunity (electromagnetic sensitivity) which means that products are not affected by
the electromagnetic wave from the outside". The applicable products are requested to
meet these requirements. The sections 8.1.1 through 8.1.6 summarize the precautions
on conformance to the EMC Directive of the machinery constructed using the
MELSEC-Q series sequencers.
The detail of these precautions has been prepared based on the requirements for the
control and the applicable standards owned by us and with our best efforts. However,
we will not assure that the overall machinery manufactured according to that detail
conform to the above-mentioned directives. The method of conformance to the EMC
directive and the judgment on whether or not the machinery conforms to the EMC
Directive must be determined finally by the manufacturer of the machinery.
8.1.1 Standards on EMC Directive
The standards on the EMC Directive are listed below.

Specification Test item Test detail Standard value
30 M-230 M Hz QP : 30 dBµ V/m
EN55011
Radiation noise 2
Radio waves emitted from the
product are measured.
(30 m in measurement range) 1
230 M-1000 M Hz QP : 37 dBµ V/m
8
EN50081-2 :
1995 (30 m in measurement range)
EN55011 Noise emitted from the product to 150 k-500 k Hz QP : 79 dB, Mean : 66 dB 1
Conductive noise the power line is measured. 500 k-30 M Hz QP : 73 dB, Mean : 60 dB
Immunity test in which static
EN61000-4-2
electricity is applied to the cabinet of 15 k V Aerial discharge
Electrostatic immunity 2
the equipment.
Power line :2kV
Immunity test in which burst noise is
EN61000-4-4 Digital I/O (24 V or higher) : 1 k V
applied to the power line and signal
First transient burst noise 2 (Digital I/O (24 V or less)) > 250 V
EN61131-2 : lines.
(Analog I/O, signal lines) > 250 V
1996
EN61000-4-3
Immunity test in which field is 10 V/m, 26-1000 M Hz,
Radiation field AM
irradiated to the product. 80%AM modulation@1 k Hz
modulation 2
EN61000-4-12 Immunity test in which damped
Power line :1kV
Damped oscillation wave oscillatory wave is superimposed on
Digital I/O (24 V or higher) : 1 k V
immunity the power line.
( 1) QP : Quasi-peak value, Mean : Average value
( 2) The PC is an open type device (device installed to another device) and must be installed in a conductive control box.
The tests for the corresponding items were performed while the PC was installed to inside the control box.
8-1
MELSEC-Q
8.1.2 Installation instructions for EMC
(1) Control cabinet

When constructing a control cabinet where the PC system will be installed, the
following instructions must be followed.
(a) Use a conductive control cabinet.
(b) When attaching the control cabinet's top plate or base plate, mask painting
and weld so that good surface contact can be made between the cabinet
and plate.
(c) To ensure good electrical contact with the control cabinet, mask the paint on
the installation bolts of the inner plate in the control cabinet so that contact
between surfaces can be ensured over the widest possible area.
(d) Earth the control cabinet with a thick wire so that a low impedance
connection to ground can be ensured even at high frequencies. (22 mm2
wire or thicker is recommended.)
(e) Holes made in the control cabinet must be 10 cm (3.94 in.) diameter or less.
If the holes are 10 cm (3.94 in.) or larger, radio frequency noise may be
emitted.
In addition, because radio waves leak through a clearance between the
control panel door and the main unit, reduce the clearance as much as
practicable.
The leakage of radio waves can be suppressed by the direct application of
the EMI gasket listed below on the paint surface.
Our tests have been carried out on the panel having the damping
characteristics of 37 db max. and 30 db mean (measured by 3 m method
with 30 to 300 M Hz).
(2) Connection of power and earth wires

Earthing and power supply wires for the PC system must be connected as
described below.
(a) Provide an earthing point near the power supply module. Earth the power
supply's LG and FG terminals (LG : Line Ground, FG : Frame Ground) with
the thickest and shortest wire possible. (The wire length must be 30 cm
(11.18 in.) or shorter.) The LG and FG terminals function is to pass the noise
generated in the PC system to the ground, so an impedance that is as low
as possible must be ensured. As the wires are used to relieve the noise, the
wire itself carries a large noise content and thus short wiring means that the
wire is prevented from acting as an antenna.
(b) The earth wire led from the earthing point must be twisted with the power
supply wires. By twisting with the earthing wire, noise flowing from the power
supply wires can be relieved to the earthing. However, if a filter is installed
on the power supply wires, the wires and the earthing wire may not need to
be twisted.
8-2
MELSEC-Q
8.1.3 Cables
The cables extracted from the control panel contain a high frequency noise
component. On the outside of the control panel, therefore, they serve as antennas to
emit noise. To prevent the noise emission, ensure to use a shielded cable for the
cables which are connected to the I/O unit and intelligent function unit and may be
extracted to the outside of the control panel.
The use of a shielded cable is also increases noise resistance. The signal lines
connected to the sequencer I/O unit and intelligent function unit use shielded type
cables to assure a noise resistance under the conditions where the shield is earthed. If
a shielded cable is not used or not earthed correctly, the noise resistance cannot meet
the specified requirements.
When a shield of the shielded cable is earthed to the cabinet body, please ensure that
the shield contact with the body is over a large surface area. If the cabinet body is
painted it will be necessary to remove paint from the contact area. All fastenings must
be metallic and the shield and earthing contact must be made over the largest
available surface area. If the contact surfaces are too uneven for optimal contact to be
made either use washers to correct for surface inconsistencies or use an abrasive to
level the surfaces. The following diagrams show examples of how to provide good
surface contact of shield earthing by use of a cable clamp.
(1) Earthing of shielded of shield cable

(a) Earth the shield of the shielded cable as near the unit as possible taking
care so that the earthed cables are not induced electromagnetically by the
cable to be earthed.
(b) Take an appropriate measure so that the shield section of the shielded cable
from which the outer cover was partly removed for exposure is earthed to
the control panel on an increased contact surface. A clamp may also be
used as shown in the figure below. In this case, however, apply a cover to
the painted inner wall surface of the control panel which comes in contact
with the clamp.
Screw
Shield section Clamp fitting
Paint mask
Shielded cable
Note) The method of earthing by soldering a wire onto the shield section of the
shielded cable as shown below is not recommended. The high frequency
impedance will increase and the shield will be ineffective.
Shielded cable
Wire
Crimp terminal
8-3
MELSEC-Q
(2) MELSECNET (II) and MELSECNET/10 units

(a) Ensure to use a double-shielded coaxial cable for the MELSECNET unit
which uses coaxial cables such as A1SJ71AF21 and A1SJ71BR11. Noise in
the range of 30 MHz or higher in radiation noise can be suppressed by the
use of double-shielded coaxial cables (Mitsubishi Cable: 5C-2V-CCY). Earth
the outer shield to the ground. The precautions on shielding to be followed
are the same as those stated in item (1) above.
Earth here
(b) Ensure to attach a ferrite core to the double-shielded coaxial cable

connected to the MELSECNET unit. In addition, position the ferrite core on
each cable near the outlet of the control panel. The ferrite core of the TDK-
make ZCAT3035 is recommended.
(3) Ethernet module

Precautions to be followed when AUI cables and coaxial cables are used are
described below.
(a) Ensure to earth also the AUI cables connected to the 10BASE5 connectors
of the A1SJ71E71-B5. Because the AUI cable is of the shielded type, as
shown in the figure below, partly remove the outer cover of it, and earth the
exposed shield section to the ground on the widest contact surface.
AUI cable
Shield
(b) Ensure to use a double-shielded cable for the coaxial cables connected to
the 10BASE2 connectors of the A1SJ71E71-B2. The precautions on
earthing are the same as those for the MELSECNET unit.
(c) For the A1SJ71E71-B2/B5, ensure to attach a ferrite core after completing
items (a) and (b) above. The ferrite core of the TDK-make ZCAT3035 is
recommended.
Ethernet is the registered trademark of XEROX, US.
8-4
MELSEC-Q
(4) Positioning Modules

Precautions to be followed when the machinery to conform to the EMC Directive
are configured using the A1SD75P -S3 are described below.
(a) When wiring with a 2 m (6.6 ft.) or less cable
Ground the shield section of the external wiring cable with the cable clamp.
(Ground the shield at the closest location to the A1SD75 external wiring
connector.)
Wire the external wiring cable to the drive unit and external device with the
shortest distance.
Install the drive unit in the same panel.
External wiring connector
A1SD75
module
Power supply
CPU module
module
Cable clamp
External wiring cable (within 2 m (6.56 ft.))
Drive unit
(b) When wiring with cable that exceeds 2 m (6.6 ft.), but is 10 m (32.8 ft.) or
less
Ground the shield section of the external wiring cable with the cable clamp.
(Ground the shield at the closest location to the AISD75 external wiring
connector.)
Install a ferrite core.
Wire the external wiring cable to the drive unit and external device with the
shortest distance.
External wiring connector
A1SD75
module
Power supply
CPU module
module
Ferrite core
Cable clamp
External wiring cable (2 m to 10 m (6.56 ft. to 32.81 ft.))
Drive unit
(c) Ferrite core and cable clamp types and required quantities
• Cable clamp
Type : AD75CK (Mitsubishi Electric)
• Ferrite core
Type : ZCAT3035-1330 (TDK ferrite core)
• Required quantity
Required Qty
Cable length Prepared part
1 axis 2 axes 3 axes
Within 2 m (6.6 ft.) AD75CK 1 1 1
2 m (6.6 ft.) to 10m AD75CK 1 1 1
(32.8 ft.) ZCAT3035-1330 1 2 3
8-5
MELSEC-Q
(5) CC-Link Module

(a) Be sure to ground the cable shield that is connected to the CC-Link module
close to the exit of control panel or to any of the CC-Link stations within 30
cm (11.8 in.) from the module or stations.
The CC-Link dedicated cable is a shielded cable. As shown in the illustration
below, remove a portion of the outer covering and ground as large a surface
area of the exposed shield part as possible.
CC-Link dedicated cable

Shield
(b) Always use the specified CC-Link dedicated cable.
(c) Do not use a ferrite core for the CC-Link module or CC-Link stations.
(d) The CC-Link module, the CC-Link stations and the FG line inside the control
panel should be connected at both the FG terminal and the SLD terminal as
shown in the diagram below.
[Simplified diagram]
Master module Remote module Local module
DA DA DA Terminal resistor
Terminal resistor
DB DB DB
DG DG DG
SLD CC-Link SLD CC-Link SLD
FG dedicated FG dedicated FG
cable cable
(6) I/O and other communication cables

For the I/O signal lines and other communication cables (RS232C, RS422), if
extracted to the outside of the control panel, also ensure to earth the shield
section of these lines and cables in the same manner as in item (1) above.
8.1.4 Power supply module
The precautions required for each power supply module are described below. Always
observe the items noted as precautions.
Model Precautions
A1S61P
Unused
A1S62P
A1S63P ( 1) Use the 24 V DC panel power equipment conforming to the CE standard.
A1S61PEU
A1S62PEU
Always ground the LG and FG terminals after short-circuiting them.
A1S61PN
A1S62PN
( 1) If a sufficient filter circuitry is built into a 24 V DC external power supply module, the noise
generated by A1S63P will be absorbed by that filter circuit, so a line filter may not be
required.
Filtering circuitry of version F or later of A1S63P is improved so that a external line filter is
not required.
8-6
MELSEC-Q
8.1.5 Ferrite core
A ferrite core has the effect of reducing radiation noise in the 30 M Hz to 100 M Hz
band. With the exception of some models, it is not required to fit ferrite cores to cables,
but it is recommended to fit ferrite cores if shield cables pulled out of the enclosure do
not provide sufficient shielding effects. The ferrite cores used in our tests are TDK's
ZCAT3035.
It should be noted that the ferrite cores should be fitted to the cables in the position
immediately before they are pulled out of the enclosure. If the fitting position is
improper, the ferrite will not produce any effect.
8.1.6 Noise filter (power supply line filter)
A noise filter is a component which has an effect on conductive noise. With the
exception of some models, it is not required to fit the noise filter to the power supply
line, but fitting it can further suppress noise. (The noise filter has the effect of reducing
conductive noise in the 10 M Hz or less band.) Use any of the following noise filters
(double type filters) or equivalent.
Model name FN343-3/01 FN660-6/06 ZHC2203-11
Manufacturer SCHAFFNER SCHAFFNER TDK
Rated current 3A 6A 3A
Rated voltage 250 V
The precautions required when installing a noise filter are described below.
(1) Do not bundle the wires on the input side and output side of the noise filter. When
bundled, the output side noise will be induced into the input side wires from which
the noise was filtered.
Input side Input side
(power supply side) (power supply side)
Introduction Introduction
Filter Filter
Output side Output side

(device side) (device side)
(a) The noise will be included when the (b) Separate and lay the input
input and output wires are bundled. and output wires.
(2) Earth the noise filter earthing terminal to the control cabinet with the shortest wire
possible (approx. 10 cm (3.94 in.)).
8-7
MELSEC-Q
8.2 Requirement to Conform to the Low-Voltage Instruction
The low-voltage instruction, one of the European Instructions, is now regulated.

The low-voltage instruction require each device which operates with power supply
ranging from 50 V AC to 1000 V and 75 V DC to 1500 V to satisfy necessary safety
items.
In the Sections from 8.2.1 to 8.2.7, cautions on installation and wiring of the MELSEC-
AnS series PC to conform to the low-voltage instruction regulation are described.
We have put the maximum effort to develop this material based on the requirements
and standards of the regulation that we have collected. However, compatibility of the
devices which are fabricated according to the contents of this manual to the above
regulation is not guaranteed. Each manufacturer who fabricates such device should
make the final judgement about the application method of the low-voltage instruction
and the product compatibility.
8.2.1 Standard applied for MELSEC-AnS
The standard applied for MELSEC-AnS is EN61010-1 safety of devices used in

measurement rooms, control rooms, or laboratories.
For the modules which operate with the rated voltage of 50 V AC/75 V DC or above,
we have developed new models that conform to the above standard.
For the modules which operate with the rated voltage under 50 V AC/75 V DC, the
conventional models can be used, because they are out of the low-voltage instruction
application range.
8.2.2 Precautions when using the MELSEC-AnS series PC
Module selection
(1) Power module

For a power module with rated input voltage of 100/200 V AC, select a model in
which the internal part between the first order and second order is intensively
insulated, because it generates hazardous voltage (voltage of 42.4 V or more at
the peak) area.
For a power module with 24 V DC rated input, a conventional model can be
used.
(2) I/O module

For I/O module with rated input voltage of 100/200 V AC, select a model in which
the internal area between the first order and second order is intensively insulated,
because it has hazardous voltage area.
For I/O module with 24 V DC rated input, a conventional model can be used.
8-8
MELSEC-Q
(3) CPU module, memory cassette, base unit

Conventional models can be used for these modules, because they only have a
5 V DC circuit inside.
(4) Special module

Conventional models can be used for the special modules including analog
module, network module, and positioning module, because the rated voltage is
24 V DC or smaller.
(5) Display device

Use the display conforming to the CE standard.
8.2.3 Power supply
The insulation specification of the power module was designed assuming installation
category II. Be sure to use the installation category II power supply to the PC.
The installation category indicates the durability level against surge voltage generated
by a thunderbolt. Category I has the lowest durability; category IV has the highest
durability.
Category IV Category III Category II Category I
Figure 1. : Installation Category
Category II indicates a power supply whose voltage has been reduced by two or more
levels of isolating transformers from the public power distribution.
8-9
MELSEC-Q
8.2.4 Control box
Because the PC is an open device (a device designed to be stored within another

module), be sure to use it after storing in the control box.
(1) Electrical shock prevention

In order to prevent persons who are not familiar with the electric facility such as
the operators from electric shocks, the control box must have the following
functions :
(a) The control box must be equipped with a lock so that only the personnel who
has studied about the electric facility and have enough knowledge can open
it.
(b) The control box must have a structure which automatically stops the power
supply when the box is opened.
(2) Dustproof and waterproof features

The control box also has the dustproof and waterproof functions. Insufficient
dustproof and waterproof features lower the insulation withstand voltage,
resulting in insulation destruction. The insulation in our PC is designed to cope
with the pollution level 2, so use in an environment with pollustion level 2 or
below.
Pollution level 1 : An environment where the air is dry and conductive
dust does not exist.
Pollution level 2 : An environment where conductive dust
does not usually exist, but occasional temporary
conductivity occurs due to the accumulated dust.
Generally, this is the level for inside the control box
equivalent to IP54 in a control room or on the floor of a
typical factory.
Pollution level 3 : An environment where conductive dust exits and
conductivity may be generated due to the accumulated
dust.
An environment for a typical factory floor.
Pollution level 4 : Continuous conductivity may occur due to rain, snow,
etc. An outdoor environment.
As shown above, the PC can realize the pollution level 2 when stored in a control
box equivalent to IP54.
8.2.5 Module installation
(1) Installing modules contiguously

In AnS series PCs, the left side of each I/O module is left open. When installing
an I/O module to the base, do not make any open slots between any two
modules. If there is an open slot on the left side of a module with 100/200 V AC
rating, the printed board which contains the hazardous voltage circuit becomes
bare. When it is unavoidable to make an open slot, be sure to install the blank
module (A1SG60).
8 - 10
MELSEC-Q
8.2.6 Grounding
There are two kinds of grounding terminals as shown below. Either grounding terminal
must be used grounded.
Be sure to ground the protective grounding for the safety reasons.
Protective grounding : Maintains the safety of the PC and improves the

noise resistance.
Functional grounding : Improves the noise resistance.
8.2.7 External wiring
(1) 24 V DC external power supply

For special modules that require a 24 V DC I/O module or external power supply,
use a model whose 24 V DC circuit is intensively insulated from the hazardous
voltage circuit.
(2) External devices

When a device with a hazardous voltage circuit is externally connected to the
PC, use a model whose circuit section of the interface to the PC is intensively
insulated from the hazardous voltage circuit.
(3) Intensive insulation

Intensive insulation refers to the insulation with the dielectric withstand voltage
shown in Table 2.
Table 2 : Intensive Insulation Withstand Voltage

(Installation Category II, source : IEC664)
Rated voltage of hazardous voltage area Surge withstand voltage (1.2/50 µs)
150 V AC or below 2500 V
300 V AC or below 4000 V
8 - 11
MELSEC-Q
MEMO
8 - 12
9 LOADING AND INSTALLATION
MELSEC-Q
9. LOADING AND INSTALLATION
9.1 Module Installation
9.1.1 Precautions on handling modules
This section describes the precautions to handle the CPU, I/O, special function, power
supply, and base modules.
(1) Do not drop or apply a strong impact to the module housing, memory card,
terminal block connectors, and pin connectors.
(2) Do not remove the PC board of the modules from housing. Otherwise,
malfunctions may result.
(3) When using the expansion base module QA1S6 B, be sure to install the power
supply module.
Although the module may work without the power supply module under light load,
stable operation is not guaranteed.
(4) Limit the tightening torque for the module installation screws and terminal block
screws within the following range:
Location of screw Tightening torque range
QCPU-A module fastening screw (M3 × 12) 36 to 48N • cm
AnS series module installation screw (M4) 78 to 118N • cm
I/O module terminal block installation screw (M3.5)
59 to 88N • cm
Power supply module terminal screw (M3.5)
(5) When using the expansion cable, do not bind it with or place it close to the main
circuit (high-voltage, large-current) lines.
9-1
MELSEC-Q
9.1.2 Precautions on the base module installation
(1) Installing dimensions

The base modules are installed in the following dimensions:
OUT
CPU
5V
Hs
H
SG
FG
I/O0 I/O1 I/O2 I/O3 I/O4 I/O5 I/O6 I/O7

POWER
Ws
W
QA1S33B QA1S35B QA1S38B QA1S65B QA1S68B

W 255 325 430 315 420
Ws 1 235 305 410 295 400
H 130
Hs 1 110
Unit: mm
1: The tolerances of Ws and Hs are ±0.3 mm, respectively.
(2) Position of module installation

The shadowed area represents
the ceiling, wiring duct, or parts
in the control panel.
2
30mm or more PC
Control Door
panel
20mm
30mm or more or more
4
5mm or more 3 5mm or more
2: In the case where the wiring duct has the height of 50mm or less. In other cases, the figure should be 40mm or more.
3: The figure should be 20mm or more if an expansion cable is connected without removing the next module.
4: The figure should be 80mm or more for the connector type module.
9-2
MELSEC-Q
(3) Module installing position

(a) Install the PC in the following position to ensure ventilation for heat radiation.
(b) Do not install the PC in the following positions.
Vertical position Horizontal position
(4) Install the base module on a flat surface.

When the base module is installed on an uneven surface, the PC board may be
strained, resulting in malfunction.
(5) Do not install the PC close to a vibration source such as a large electromagnetic
contactor or no-fuse breaker. Install the PC to the separate panel or isolate it as
far as possible.
(6) Provide the following distances between the PC and devices (contactor or relay)
to avoid the influence of radiation noise or heat.
• Devices installed in front of the PC: 100mm or more
• Devices installed on either side of the PC: 50mm ore more
50mm or more
100mm 50mm or more

or more
Contactor,
relay, etc.
9-3
MELSEC-Q
(7) Note the followings to mount the PC to the DIN rail.

(a) Applicable type name of the DIN rail (JIS-C2B12)
TH35-7.5Fe
TH35-7.5A1
TH35-15Fe
(b) Interval between DIN rail mounting screws

To use DIN rail TH35-7.5Fe or TH35-7.5A1, secure the rail with the DIN rail
mounting screws with the pitch of 200mm or less to ensure strength.
DIN rail DIN rail mounting screw
35mm
P P P
Pitch = 200mm or less
9-4
MELSEC-Q
9.1.3 Installing/removing the dust-protective cover
To use QCPU-A, it is necessary to install the dust-protective cover supplied with the
basic base module to the I/O module on the right of the QCPU-A to prevent foreign
objects from entering the I/O module.
Be sure to install the dust-protective cover. Otherwise, foreign objects may enter the
I/O module, causing breakdown.
The installing/removing procedure of the dust-protective cover is described below:
(1) Installing the dust-protective cover

I/O module
Dust-protective cover
As illustrated above, insert the connector/terminal side of the dust-protective

cover into the I/O module first, then press the cover against the I/O module. This
completes the installation.
(2) Removing the dust-protective cover

I/O module
Release hole
Dust-protective cover
To remove the dust-protective cover from the I/O module, inset the tip of the flat-
blade driver into the release hole as illustrated above, move the driver to the rear
of the module, and release the claw of the cover from the release hole.
9-5
MELSEC-Q
9.1.4 Installing/removing modules
This section describes how to install/remove the power supply, CPU, I/O, and special
function modules to/from the base module.
(1) Installing/removing QCPU-A

(a) Installing QCPU-A
Insert the module Base module

fixing projection into
the fixing hole on the Base module Module
base module.
Module
connector
Press the module in
the direction of the Module attaching lever
arrow and attach it to
the base module.
Module fixing
Module fixing projection projection
Module fixing hole
Module fixing hole
Check if the module is
securely inserted into
the base module.
Completion
POINTS
(1) Be sure to insert the module fixing projection into the fixing hole first. Forcefully
mounting the module without inserting the projection into the hole may damage
the module connector or the module itself.
(2) When using the modules in a place subjected to especially large vibration or
impacts, secure the CPU module to the base module with a screw.
QCPU-A module fastening screw: M3 × 12 (prepared by user)
9-6
MELSEC-Q
(b) Removing QCPU-A
Remove the module Base module

fastening screw and pull
the top of the module so
that the module pivots
about the bottom.
Module
connector
Module
Remove the module

fixing projection from
the fixing hole while
lifting the module. Module fixing hole
Completion
POINT
When the CPU module is secured to the base module with a module fastening
screw, be sure to remove the screw first, then remove the module fixing projection
from the hole.
Forcefully removing the module from the base module may damage the module.
9-7
MELSEC-Q
(2) Installing/removing modules other than QCPU-A

(a) Installing the module other than QCPU-A
Insert the module
fixing projection into Base module
the fixing hole on the Module
base module.
Module
connector
Press the module in

the direction of the
arrow and attach it to Module fixing
the base module. hole
Module fixing
projection
Check that the module

is securely inserted
into the base module.
Secure the module with
a module fastening
screw.
Completion
Module fastening screw
Base module Module
POINT
Be sure to insert the module fixing projection into the fixing hole first.
Forcefully mounting the module without inserting the projection into the hole may
damage the module connector or the module itself.
9-8
MELSEC-Q
(b) Removing the module other than QCPU-A
Remove the module

fastening screw and
pull the top of the
module so that the Base module
module pivots about
the bottom.
Module
connector
Module
Remove the module

fixing projection from Module fixing
the fixing hole while hole
lifting the module.
Completion
POINT
When the module is secured to the base module with a module fastening screw, be
sure to remove the screw first, then remove the module fixing projection from the
hole.
Forcefully removing the module from the base module may damage the module.
9-9
MELSEC-Q
9.1.5 Setting expansion stages for the expansion base module
When two or more expansion base modules are used, the expansion stage number
should be set with the stage number setting connector of the expansion base module.
The expansion stage number is factory-set to "1," so that the first expansion base
module requires no setting.
Set the expansion stage number in the following procedure.
(1) The stage number setting connector is located inside the base cover of the IN
connector of the expansion base module.
First, loosen the upper and lower screws on the base cover of the IN connector,
and remove the base cover from the expansion base module.
(2) Insert a connector pin into the position of the desired stage number in the
connector (PIN1) located between the IN and OUT expansion cable connectors.
OUT
Stage number setting for expansion base modules

Stage number setting
1st stage 2nd stage 3rd stage 4th stage 5th stage 6th stage 7th stage
Position of
connector pin in
stage number
setting connector
POINT
To set the stage number setting connector, select the appropriate number from 1
through 7 in ascending order according to the number of expansion modules.
Do not assign the same stage number to several modules or skip any stage
numbers. Otherwise, improper I/O operation results.
9 - 10
MELSEC-Q
(3) Reattach the base cover to the expansion base module and fasten the screws.
9 - 11
MELSEC-Q
9.1.6 Connecting/disconnecting the expansion cable
(1) Precautions on handling the expansion cable

• Do not step on the expansion cable.
• Be sure to attach the base cover to the base module before connecting the
expansion cable to the base module.
(After setting the stage number of the expansion base module, reattach the
base cover and fasten it with screws.)
• When routing the expansion cable, provide 55mm or more minimum bend
radius for the cable.
If the bend radius is less than 55mm, malfunctions may occur due to the cable
deterioration or breakage.
• Do not hold the ferrite cores at both ends of the cable when
connecting/disconnecting the expansion cable.
Instead, hold the connectors of the expansion cable to connect/disconnect it.
Holding the ferrite cores may cause cable breakage inside the connector.
Moreover, the change in the positions of the ferrite cores may change the cable
characteristics.
Be careful not to change the positions of the ferrite cores when handling the
cable.
9 - 12
MELSEC-Q
(2) Connecting the expansion cable
POINT
To connect the expansion cable to the basic base module and expansion base
module, be sure to connect it from the OUT connector of the basic base module to
the IN connector of the expansion base module. The system does not properly
operate when the cable is connected from IN to IN, from OUT to OUT, or from OUT
to IN connectors.
To connect two or more expansion base module, be sure to connect the cable from
the OUT connector of the first expansion base module to the IN connector of the
second expansion base module.
(a) To connect the expansion cable to the basic base module, remove the
section below OUT of the base cover with a flat-blade driver (5.5 × 75.6 ×
100) or other tools. Perform the same procedure also to connecting the
expansion cable to the OUT connector of the expansion base module.
OUT
Base cover
(b) To connect the expansion cable to the next expansion base module, remove
the sticker attached on the section below IN of the base cover.
IN OUT
Sticker
9 - 13
MELSEC-Q
(c) Hold the connector of the expansion cable to connect the expansion cable to
each base module.
(d) After connecting the expansion cable, be sure to tighten the fastening
screws of the expansion cable connector.
(Tightening torque: 20N • cm)
(3) Disconnecting the expansion cable

To disconnect the expansion cable, confirm that the fastening screws are
completely removed. Then, hold the connector of the expansion cable and
disconnect it.
9 - 14
MELSEC-Q
9.2 Concept of fail-safe circuit
To prevent improper I/O operation of the PC, design the circuit configuration and
program so that the PC system is started up only in the following procedures.
1 Turn ON the power supply to the PC.

2 Turn ON the external power supply for processing.
3 Turn ON the start SW.
4 The program turns ON the power supply to the output devices.
5 After the program confirms that all external power supplies are turned ON, the
program for I/O control is executed.
If the startup procedure is changed so that, for example, the PC is turned ON after the
external power supply for processing the DC output module is turned ON, the DC
output module may produce improper output momentarily.
We have fully inspected the quality of the PC; however, some factor may cause
breakdown or abnormal operation. In preparation for such problems, it is
recommended to configure the circuit externally to the PC for the sections that may
lead to the abnormal operation of whole system, the machine breakdown or an
accident (such as an emergency stop, protection circuit, or interlock circuit).
The subsequent pages describe the examples of system circuit design and fail-safe
provisions against PC breakdown from the standpoints above.
9 - 15
MELSEC-Q
(1) Example of system circuit design
For AC power circuit For AC/DC power circuit

Power supply
Power supply
Transformer
Fuse Transformer Transformer
CPU Fuse Fuse

M9006
Ym CPU
DC power supply
M9006 DC power
M9039 establishing signal input
Yn Ym supply
M9039 (-)(+)
Yn
Y1 Fuse
Start/stop circuit XM
XM Can be started when TM TM setting should be
M9084 TM completed until the DC
RA1, the PC's RUN
Program output, turns ON. M9084 input signal is established.
Start SW TM
RA1 MC1 N0 M10
MC N0
Stop SW M10 Program
MC
Start SW
Input module RA1
RA2 MC
XM MC Stop SW
RA2 Input module

Output module
Alarm output XM
Ym (Lamp or buzzer)
L
Turns ON during
Yn RUN by M9039.
RA1 Alarm output
Output module (Lamp or buzzer)
MC Ym
Output module Turns ON during
L
RUN by M9039.
MC When stopped, the output Yn
RA1 When stopped, the output
devices are turned OFF.
At emergency stop or devices are turned OFF.
at limit stop At emergency stop or
MC2 Output module
MC MC at limit stop
MC1
MC1 Interlock circuit

MC2 RA2
Interlock circuit is externally
configured in the section
Y1
RA2 that controls opposite MC2
operation (forward/reverse) MC1
or the section that may
MC1
cause machine breakdown MC2 A voltage relay
or an accident. is recommended.
The startup procedure is as follows.

For AC power circuit For AC/DC power circuit
[1] Set the CPU to "RUN." [1] Set the CPU to "RUN."
[2] Turn the power supply "ON." [2] Turn the power supply "ON."
[3] Set the start SW to "ON." [3] Set the start SW to "ON."
[4] When the electromagnetic contactor (MC) turns "ON," the [4] When the DC power supply is established, turn RA2 "ON."
program starts up the output devices. [5] When the DC power supply is established 100%, set the timer
(TM) to "ON."
(The TM setting value is the time between the instant when
RA2 is turned ON and the instant when the DC voltage is
established 100%. Designate 0.5 seconds as the setting
value.)
[6] When the electromagnetic contactor (MC) turns "ON," the
program starts up the output devices.
(If a voltage relay is used as RA2, the timer (TM) in the
program is unnecessary.)
9 - 16
MELSEC-Q
(2) Fail-safe provisions against PC breakdown

The self-diagnostic function can detect the breakdown of the CPU or memory of
the PC. However, when the I/O control becomes abnormal, the CPU cannot
detect it. In such a case, all points may turn ON/OFF depending on the
breakdown level, so that the normal operation and safety of the controlled objects
may not be ensured.
As a manufacturer, we have fully inspected the product quality. However, it is
recommended to configure the fail-safe circuit externally to the PC to prevent
machine breakdown or an accident in case of the PC breakdown due to some
factors.
The examples of system configuration and fail-safe circuit are shown below:
<Example of system configuration>
16-point output
16-point output
16-point output
16-point output
16-point input
16-point input
16-point input
16-point input
16-point input
Power supply
Power supply
C
YB0 to YBF
Vacant
P
U
Output module for

fail-safe provision 1
1: The output module for the fail-safe provision should be installed to the last slot of the system (In the system example
above, YB0 to YBF).
<Example of fail-safe circuit>

ON-delay timer
Internal program YB0 T1
1s
OFF-delay timer
M9032
YB0 T2
1s
External load MC
YB1 L
YB0 YBF L
24V
0.5s 0.5s
- +
0V
DC24V
CPU module Output module
T1 T2
2
MC
2: YB0 repeats ON and OFF at 0.5-second interval. Use the non-contact output module for YB0 (A transistor is used in
the example above.).
9 - 17
MELSEC-Q
9.3 Installation Environment

Avoid the following conditions for the installation location of QCPU-A system:
(1) Location where the ambient temperature exceeds the range of 0 to 55°C.
(2) Location where the ambient humidity exceeds the range of 10 to 90%RH.
(3) Location where condensation occurs due to a sudden temperature change.
(4) Location where corrosive gas or flammable gas exists.
(5) Location where a lot of conductive powdery substance such as dust and iron filing,
oil mist, salt, or organic solvent exists.
(6) Location exposed to direct sunlight.
(7) Location where strong electric fields or magnetic fields form.
(8) Location where vibration or impact is directly applied to the main module.
9.4 Calculation Method of Heat Amount Generated by the PC

It is necessary to keep the temperature of the panel which stores the PC to the
operating ambient temperature of the PC, which is 55°C, or below.
For radiation design of the panel, it is necessary to know the average power
consumption (heat generation) of the devices and machinery stored inside. In this
section, a method to obtain the average power consumption of the QCPU-A system is
explained. Calculate the temperature increase in the panel from the power
consumption.
Calculation method of average power consumption
The power consuming parts of the PC may be roughly classified into the blocks as
shown below:
I5V 5VDC line
AC Power
power supply
Special
supply module CPU Output Input
function
module module module
module
Relay Input current
(IIN) E Current
I24V 24VDC line transistor
External Output current
(IOUT) Vdrop Input
24VDC current
power (IIN)
Output
supply current
(IOUT)
AC LOAD AC E AC
DC DC DC
(1) Power consumption by power supply module

The power conversion efficiency of the power supply module is about 70%, and
30% is consumed as heat generated, thus, 3/7 of the output power is the power
consumption. Therefore, the calculation formula is:
3
Wpw = {(I5V × 5) + (I24V × 24)} (W)
7
I5V : Current consumption of 5VDC logic circuit of each module
I24V : Average current consumption of 24VDC power supply for internal
consumption of the output module
(Current consumption equivalent to the points simultaneously ON)
……… Not applicable to a system where 24VDC is supplied externally and
a power module which does not have a 24VDC output is used.
9 - 18
MELSEC-Q
(2) Total power consumption of each module at 5VDC logic part

Power of the 5VDC output circuit of the power supply module is the power
consumption of each module.
W5V=I5V × 5 (W)
(3) Total 24VDC average power consumption of the output module (power
consumption equivalent to the points simultaneously ON)
Average power of the 24VDC output circuit of the power supply module is the total
power consumption of each module.
W24V=I24V × 24 (W)
(4) Average power consumption of the output modules due to voltage drops at the
output part (power consumption equivalent to the points simultaneously ON)
WOUT= IOUT × Vdrop × Output points × Simultaneous ON ratio (W)

IOUT : Output current (current actually used) (A)
Vdrop : Voltage drop of each output module (V)
(5) Average power consumption of the input modules at the input part (power
consumption equivalent to the points simultaneously ON)
WIN= IIN × E × Input points × Simultaneous ON ratio (W)
IIN : Input current (actual value in case of AC) (A)
E : Input voltage (voltage for actual usage) (V)
(6) Power consumption of the power supply part of the special function module is:
Ws= I5V × 5 × I24V × 24 + I100V × 100 (W)

The total of the power consumption calculated for each block as above is the
power consumption of the PC system as a whole.
W= W PW + W5V + W24V + WOUT + WIN + WS (W)
Calculate the amount of heat generation and temperature increase inside the
panel from the total power consumption (W).
Simplified calculation formula to obtain temperature increase inside panel is
shown next:
W
T= [°C]
UA
W : Power consumption of the PC system as a whole (the value obtained above)
2
A : Inside surface area of the panel [m ]
U : When inside temperature of the panel is kept constant by a fan, etc..............6
When the air inside the panel is not circulated.........................................................4
POINT
When the temperature increase inside the panel exceeds the specified range, it is
recommended to lower the temperature inside the panel by installing a heat
exchanger to the panel.
If a conventional ventilation fan is used, it sucks dust along with the outside air,
which may affect the PC, so care must be taken.
9 - 19
MELSEC-Q
9.5 Wiring the power supply
This section describes the precautions on wiring the power supply.
(1) Separate the wiring systems for the power supply of the PC, the I/O devices, and
the power equipment as shown below.
In a high-noise environment, connect an isolating transformer.
Main power Power supply Isolating

supply of PC transformer
AC200V PC
T1
Power supply
for I/O devices
I/O devices
Power supply for
main circuit equipment
Main circuit equipment
(2) Do not connect the 24VDC outputs of several power supply modules in parallel to
supply power to a single I/O module. The parallel connection may damage the
power supply module.
Power supply I/O

module module
DC24V
Power supply I/O
module module
Power supply 24VDC

module external power
supply
DC24V
(3) Twist the 100VAC, 200VAC, and 24VDC cables as tight as possible and connect
them between modules in the shortest distance.
2
To minimize the voltage drop, use the cable as thick as possible (2 mm max.).
(4) Do not bind the 100VAC and 24VDC cables with or place them close to the main
circuit (high-voltage, large-current) lines or I/O signal lines. Isolate them 100mm or
more if possible.
9 - 20
MELSEC-Q
(5) To avoid lightning surges, connect the lightning surge absorber as shown below:
I/O device
AC
for PC
E2
E1 Lightning surge absorbe
POINTS
(1) Isolate the ground for the lightning surge absorber (E1) and the ground for the
PC (E2).
(2) Select the lightning surge absorber so that even the maximum power supply
voltage does not exceed the allowable circuit voltage of the surge absorber.
9 - 21
MELSEC-Q
(6) The following is the wiring example of the power supply and grounding cables for
the connection of the basic and expansion base modules.
(QA1S38B)
AC100/110V
AC200/220V A1S62PN CPU
AC
+24V
Fuse 24G
AC (FG)
DC DC24V
DC24V
(LG)
INPUT
100-240VAC
Connected to the 24VDC

terminal of the module that Expansion base module
requires 24VDC inside the (QA1S68B)
I/O module. A1S62PN I/O
Expansion cable
+24V
24G
(FG)
AC100/240V (LG)
INPUT
100-240VAC
Ground cable
Ground
POINTS
2
(1) Use the cable as thick as possible (2mm max.) for the 100/200VAC and
24VDC cables. Be sure to twist the cable from the connected terminal. Use the
crimp terminal with an insulating sleeve to prevent short-circuit when a screw is
loosened.
(2) When connecting the LG and FG terminals, be sure to connect them to the
ground. Otherwise, they may easily be affected by noise. Touching the LG
terminal may cause an electric shock because it has the potential of half the
input voltage.
(3) A1S61PN and A1S62PN feature the wide range of 100 to 240VAC. They do
not require switching.
9.6 Precautions on the connection with an uninterruptible power supply (UPS)
Note the following precautions when connecting the QCPU-A system with the
uninterruptible power supply (hereafter abbreviated as UPS).
Use the UPS of constant inverter feeding system with the voltage distortion factor of
5% or less.
Do not use the UPS of constant commercial feeding system.
9 - 22
10 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION
MELSEC-Q
10. MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION
• Do not touch the terminals while the power is on. Doing so may cause electric
! DANGER shock or malfunctioning.
• Be sure to connect the battery correctly. Do not charge, disassemble, heat, throw
into fire, short, or solder batteries.
Improper handling of batteries may cause injury to the operator or fire due to heat
generation, explosion, or ignition.
• Before cleaning the module or retightening the screws, make sure all phases of the
power supply have been obstructed from the outside. Failure to completely shut off
the power-supply phases may cause electric shock.
If the screws are loose, it may result in short circuits, fire or malfunctioning.
If the screws are tightened too much, it may damage the screws and the module
may result in short circuits, malfunctioning or cause the module to fall out.
• Never disassemble or modify the module. This may cause breakdowns,

! CAUTION malfunctioning, injury and fire.
• Before attaching or detaching the module, make sure all phases of the power
supply have been obstructed from the outside. Failure to completely shut off the
power-supply phases may cause module breakdowns and malfunctioning.
• When using a cellular phone, keep it 25 cm or more away from the PC.
Otherwise, malfunction may result.
In order to use the PC always in good condition, conducting daily and periodical
maintenance/inspection on the following items are strongly recommended.
10
10 - 1
MELSEC-Q
10.1 Routine Inspection
Routine inspection items recommended are shown in Table 10.1.
Table 10.1 Routine Inspection

Item Inspection Item Content of Inspection Decision Criteria Action
Confirm if installation
Installation condition of the
1 screws are not loose or It is installed securely. Retighten the screw.
base unit
cover is not detached.
Confirm if the module
Installation condition of the The installation screws are Tighten the module
2 installation screw is firmly
I/O modules firmly tightened. installation screw firmly.
tightened.
Loosening of terminal Retighten the terminal
No loosening.
screw screw.
Closeness of crimp-style There is an appropriate
3 Connection conditions Correct the distance.
terminals distance.
Connectors of extension No loosening at Retighten the connector
cable connectors. fixed screw.
The LED is ON. (Faulty if it
"POWER" LED Confirm it is lit. Per Section 11.2.2.
is OFF.)
The LED is ON. (Faulty if it
"MODE" LED Confirm it is lit. Per section 11.2.3.
is OFF.)
Confirm it is lit in the The LED is ON. (Faulty if it Per Sections 11.2.4 and
"RUN" LED
LEDs on the main module
"RUN" state. is OFF or flashing.) 11.2.5.

Confirm it is lit at error The LED is OFF. (ON Per Sections 11.2.6 and
"ERROR" LED
occurrence. when error has occurred.) 11.2.7.
4 The LED is ON when input
Confirm if it correctly turns is ON, and OFF when
Input LED Per Section 11.4.1.
on and off. input is OFF. (Faulty other
than the above.)
The LED is ON when
output is ON, and OFF
Confirm if it correctly turns
Output LED when output is OFF. Per Section 11.4.2.
on and off.
(Faulty other than the
above.)
10 - 2
MELSEC-Q
10.2 Periodic Inspection
Inspection on items shown below should be conducted once or twice every six months
to a year. Conduct the inspection when the equipment is moved or modified, or wiring
is changed.
Table 10.2 Periodic Inspection

Item Inspection Item Content of Inspection Decision Criteria Action
Ambient
environment
Measure with temperature 0 to 55°C When used in a panel,

temperature
Ambient
and humidity gauge. temperature inside the

1 Ambient humidity 10 to 90%RH
Measure presence of panel is the ambient
There is no corrosive gas
Atmosphere corrosive gasses. temperature.
present.
Power supply voltage Measure voltage between 85 to 132VAC Change the power
2
check 100/200VAC. 170 to 264VAC supply source.
Test by moving the
Installation
condition
Loosening, play Must be attached solidly. Retighten the screw.

module.
3
Adhesion of dirt or
Visual inspection No adhesion. Remove and clean.
foreign substance
Loosening of Retighten with a
No loosening. Retighten.
terminal screw screwdriver.
Connection
conditions
Closeness of crimp- There is an appropriate

4 Visual inspection Correct the distance.
style terminals distance.
Loosening of Retighten the
Visual inspection No loosening.
connector connector fixed screw.
Confirm M9006 or M9007 Even when there is no
is OFF with a peripheral low-battery display,
5 Battery (Preventive maintenance)
device in the monitor replace if specified
mode. battery life is over. 1
1: Refer to section 7.7 to the battery replacement procedure.
10 - 3
MELSEC-Q
MEMO
10 - 4
11 TROUBLESHOOTING
MELSEC-Q
11. TROUBLESHOOTING
11
The description, cause determination, and corrective actions of each error which may
occur during system usage are described.
11.1 Fundamentals of Troubleshooting
Besides using obviously highly-reliable devices to increase system reliability, it is an

important point to quickly startup the system again when an error occurs.
In order to quickly startup the system, find the cause of the problem and resolve it.
There are the following three basic points to be aware of when performing
troubleshooting.
(1) Visual confirmation

Confirm the following points:
(a) Machine operation (stop status and operation status)
(b) Power supply ON/OFF
(c) I/O equipment status
(d) Wiring status (I/O line and cable)
(e) Display status of each display module (POWER LED, RUN LED, ERROR
LED, I/O LED, etc.)
(f) Status of each setting switch (extension base, power failure protection, etc.)
After confirming (a) to (f), connect a peripheral device and observe the operation
status of the PC and program contents.
(2) Error confirmation

Observe how the error changes by performing the following operations:
(a) Set the RUN/STOP switch to "STOP."
(b) Reset using the RUN/STOP switch.
(c) Turn ON/OFF the power.
(3) Narrow down the range

By performing the (1) and (2) above, assume the faulty area in the following:
(a) PC or external?
(b) I/O module or others?
(c) Sequence program?
11 - 1
11 TROUBLESHOOTING
MELSEC-Q
11.2 Troubleshooting
The error detail determination method, error details corresponding to the error code,
and corrective actions are described.
11.2.1 Troubleshooting flowchart
The error details are described by events.
Error occurrence details
To "Flowchart for actions when the "POWER"

The "POWER" LED is OFF.
LED is turned OFF" in Section 11.2.2
To "Flowchart for actions when the "MODE"

The "MODE" LED is OFF.
LED turns OFF" in Section 11.2.3.
To "Flowchart for actions when the "RUN"

The "RUN" LED is OFF.
LED is turned OFF" in Section 11.2.4
To "Flowchart for actions when the "RUN"

The "RUN" LED is flashing.
LED is flashing" in Section 11.2.5
To "Flowchart for actions when the "ERROR"

The "ERROR" LED is ON.
LED is turned ON" in Section 11.2.6
The "ERROR" LED To "Flowchart for actions when the "ERROR"

is flashing. LED is flashing" in Section 11.2.7
The I/O module will To "Flowchart for actions when the output
not operate correctly. module's output load does not turn ON" in
Section 11.2.8
The program cannot To "Flowchart for actions when the program

be written. cannot be written" in Section 11.2.9
11 - 2
11 TROUBLESHOOTING
MELSEC-Q
11.2.2 Flowchart for actions when the "POWER" LED is turned OFF
The corrective action when the "POWER" LED turns OFF when the power is turned
ON or during operation is described.
The "POWER" LED

turned OFF.
Is the power NO
Supply the power.
being supplied?
YES
NO Does the YES
"POWER" LED
turn ON?
Is the
power supply NO Set the supplied voltage
voltage within AC85 to
132V or AC170 within the regulated range.
to 264V?
YES
NO Does the YES
"POWER" LED
turn ON?
Is the
power supply NO Fix the power module
module securely fixed
to the base securely.
unit?
YES
NO Does the YES
"POWER" LED
turn ON?
Are the
overvoltage (1) Check the current
protection and YES
capacity, and reduce the
overcurrent protection
amount of overcurrent.
operating?
(2) Turn OFF the input
power supply, then ON.
NO
NO Does the YES

"POWER" LED
turn ON?
Describe the problem to

the nearest service center,
retail store, or corporate
office, and obtain advice. Complete
11 - 3
11 TROUBLESHOOTING
MELSEC-Q
11.2.3 Flowchart for actions when the "MODE" LED turns OFF
The flowchart when the "MODE" LED turns OFF at power on is described.
The "MODE" LED

turns OFF.
Is the power NO
Supply the power.
supplied?
YES Does the

NO
YES
"MODE" LED
turn ON?
Is each module NO
Install each module correctly.
correctly installed?
YES
Does the
NO YES
"MODE" LED
turn ON?
Is the reset switch NO

Cancel the reset.
of the CPU module
canceled?
YES
Does the
NO YES
"MODE" LED
turn ON?
Is the expansion Connect the expansion

NO
cable properly cable properly. (From OUT
connected? connector to IN connector)
YES
Does the
NO YES
"MODE" LED
turn ON?
Describe the problem to the Completion

nearest system service, retail
store, or corporate office, and
obtain advice.
11 - 4
11 TROUBLESHOOTING
MELSEC-Q
11.2.4 Flowchart for actions when the "RUN" LED is turned OFF
The corrective action when the "RUN" LED turns OFF during operation is described.
The "RUN" LED

turned OFF.
Is there
an error display when YES Perform the correction using the
the peripheral device is error detail list.
connected?
NO
"RUN" LED turns ON (1) Part error or bad connection

Reset the QCPU-A using
of PC.
the RUN/STOP switch.
(2) Caused by excessive noise.
"RUN" LED turns OFF For (1)

For (2)
Set the QCPU-A RUN/STOP Describe the problem to the

switch to the "STOP" nearest service center, retail
position, and write END to store, or corporate office, and
the address 0 of the obtain advice.
peripheral device.
Set the RUN/STOP switch

to the "RUN" position and "RUN" LED does not turn ON
operate by setting the
system to the monitor mode
with the peripheral device.
"RUN" LED turns ON
Possibility of error in the

sequence program.
Check the program, and Connect a surge suppression

correct the errors in the circuit such as a CR to the noise
program. source.
11 - 5
11 TROUBLESHOOTING
MELSEC-Q
11.2.5 Flowchart for actions when the "RUN" LED is flashing
The corrective action when the "RUN" LED is flashing when turning on the power,
starting operation, or during operation is described.
The "RUN" LED

is flashing.
Hardware error Confirm the error details

from the peripheral device.
(Refer to Section 11.3.)
Describe the problem to the

nearest service center, retail
obtain advice.
Reset the QCPU-A using

Correct the error details.

(Refer to Section 11.3.)

to the "RUN" position.
Does the NO
"RUN" LED
turn ON?
YES
Complete
11 - 6
11 TROUBLESHOOTING
MELSEC-Q
11.2.6 Flowchart for actions when the "ERROR" LED is turned ON
The flowchart when the "ERROR" LED turns ON during operation is described.
The "ERROR" LED

turned ON.
NO
Is the M9008 ON?
YES
Hardware error Check the corrective action

Cause of error
in the error code list.
Software error
YES
Reset the QCPU-A using Can it be corrected?
NO

to the "STOP" position. Perform corrective action.
Correct the error details.

to the "RUN" position.

YES Does the
the nearest system service,
"RUN" LED
turn ON?
office, and obtain advice.
NO
Complete
11 - 7
11 TROUBLESHOOTING
MELSEC-Q
11.2.7 Flowchart for actions when the "ERROR" LED is flashing
The flowchart when the "ERROR" LED is flashing during operation is described.
The "ERROR" LED

is flashing.
Is the details If "0"

of the special register
D9124 "0"?
If not "0" Describe the problem to the

nearest system service, retail
obtain advice.
Reset the annunciator coil
that is ON using the RST
F instruction.
Complete
11 - 8
11 TROUBLESHOOTING
MELSEC-Q
11.2.8 Flowchart for actions when the output module's output load does not turn ON
The corrective action when the output load of the output module does not turn ON
during operation is described.
The output load

does not turn ON.
Is the output NO Check the output status

module's operation with the peripheral device
display ON? in monitor mode.
YES
Is the operation OFF Measure the input to the

display of the input module and voltage
module ON? between COM terminals.
0V Supply
ON voltage
value
Is the Confirm that the input

voltage of the NO signal is OFF with the
load power supply peripheral device in Monitor
included? monitor mode. signal OFF
YES
What is the
Check the wiring of the Check the external
voltage of between 0V
each output COM terminal load power, and recover wiring and external
of the output the power. input equipment.
module?
The supplied
voltage value
is output.
Output module error. Check the load wiring and
Replace the output module. load, and recover.
Confirm the rush current Change the output relay Describe the problem to
NG
when the maximum load number to set the current the nearest system service,
turn ON simultaneously. when the maximum load retail store, or corporate
turn ON simultaneously office, and obtain advice.
within specification.
OK
POINT
For problems when the input signal does not turn off and load does not turn off,
perform troubleshooting by referring to the problem examples for the I/O module in
section 11.4.
11 - 9
11 TROUBLESHOOTING
MELSEC-Q
11.2.9 Flowchart for actions when the program cannot be written
The flowchart when the program and other data cannot be written to the CPU is
described.
The program cannot

be written.
Is the RUN/ RUN Set the RUN/STOP

STOP switch
switch to STOP.
at STOP?
STOP
Can the program YES
be written?
NO
Reset the CPU.
NO Can the program YES

be written?
Is an invalid YES Replace it with an

memory card available memory card
being used? (Q2MEM-1MBS).
Or, use built-in RAM instead
of installing a memory card.
NO NO Can the program YES

be written?

the nearest system service,
office, and obtain advice. Complete
11 - 10
11 TROUBLESHOOTING
MELSEC-Q
11.3 Error Code List
When an error occurs while the PC is running or during RUN, error is displayed, or
error code, detailed error code and error step are stored to special registers, D9008,
D9091 and D9010, respectively, by the self-diagnosis function.
Details of errors and corrective actions are shown below.
11.3.1 Procedure to read an error code
When an error occurs, the error code can be read with a peripheral device. Refer to the
operating manuals of the peripheral device for operating procedures.
11.3.2 Error code list
Meanings and causes of error message, error codes, detailed error codes and
corrective actions are described.
Error Code List

Detailed
Error Code
Error Massage Error Code Error and Cause Corrective Action
(D9008)
(D9091)
"INSTRCT CODE 10 101 Instruction codes which the CPU cannot (1) Read the error step using a peripheral
ERR" (Checked decode are included in the program. device and correct the program of the
when STOP step.
RUN or at (2) Check the ROM if it contains
execution of instruction codes which cannot be
instruction.) decoded. If it does, replace it with a
correct ROM.
102 Index qualification is specified for a 32-bit Read the error step using a peripheral
constant. device and correct the program of the
103 Device specified by an dedicated step.
instruction is not correct.
104 An dedicated instruction has incorrect
program structure.
105 An dedicated instruction has incorrect
command name.
106 Index qualification using Z or V is included
in the program between LEDA/B IX and
LEDA/B IXEND .
107 (1) Index qualification is specified for the
device numbers and set values in the
OUT instruction of timers and counters.
(2) Index qualification is specified at the
label number of the pointer (P) provided
to the head of destination of the CJ ,
SCJ , CALL , CALLP , JMP ,
LEDA/B FCALL and
LEDA/B BREAK instructions or at the
label number of the interrupt pointer (I)
provided to the head of an interrupt
program.
108 Errors other than 101 to 107 mentioned
above.
11 - 11
11 TROUBLESHOOTING
MELSEC-Q
Error Code List (Continue)

Detailed
Error Code
(D9008)
(D9091)
"PARAMETER 11 111 Capacity settings of the main and sub Read parameters in the CPU memory,
ERROR" programs, microcomputer program, file check the contents, make necessary
(Checked at register comments, status latch, sampling corrections and write them again to the
power on and at trace and extension file registers are not memory.
STOP/PAUSE within the usable range of the CPU.
RUN.) 112 Total of the set capacity of the main and
sub programs, file register comments,
status latch, sampling trace and extension
file registers exceeds capacity of the
memory cassette.
113 Latch range set by parameters or setting of Read parameters in the CPU memory,
M, L or S is incorrect. check the contents, make necessary
114 Sum check error corrections and write them again to the
115 Either of settings of the remote memory
RUN/PAUSE contact point by parameters,
operation mode at occurrence of error,
annunciator indication mode, or STOP
RUN indication mode is incorrect.
116 The MNET-MINI automatic refresh setting
by parameters is incorrect.
117 Timer setting by parameters is incorrect.
118 Counter setting by parameters is incorrect.
"MISSING END 12 121 The END (FEND) instruction is not given in Write the END instruction at the end of
INS" the main program. the main program.
(Checked at 122 The END (FEND) instruction is not given in Write the END instruction at the end of
STOP RUN.) the sub program if the sub program is set the sub program.
by parameters.
"CAN'T 13 131 The same device number is used at two or Eliminate the same pointer numbers
EXECUTE (P)" more steps for the pointers (P) and provided at the head of jump destination.
(Checked at interrupt pointers (I) used as labels to be
execution of specified at the head of jump destination.
instruction.) 132 Label of the pointer (P) specified in the Read the error step using a peripheral
CJ , SCJ , CALL , CALLP , JMP , device, check contents and insert a jump
destination pointer (P).
LEDA/B FCALL or LEDA/B BREAK
instruction is not provided before the END
instruction.
133 (1) The RET instruction was included in (1) Read the error step using a peripheral
the program and executed though the device, check contents and correct
CALL instruction was not given. program of the step.
(2) The NEXT and LEDA/B BREAK (2) Reduce the number of nesting levels
instructions were included in the of the CALL , CALLP and FOR
program and executed though the instructions to 5 or less.
FOR instruction was not given.
(3) Nesting level of the CALL , CALLP
and FOR instructions is 6 levels or
deeper, and the 6th level was executed.
(4) There is no RET or NEXT instruction
at execution of the CALL or FOR
instruction.
11 - 12
11 TROUBLESHOOTING
MELSEC-Q

Detailed
Error Code
(D9008)
(D9091)
"CAN'T 13 134 The CHG instruction was included in the Read the error step using a peripheral
EXECUTE (P)" program and executed though no sub device and delete the CHG instruction
(Checked at program was provided. circuit block.
execution of 135 (1) LEDA/B IX and LEDA IXEND (1) Read the error step using a
instruction.) peripheral device, check contents and
instructions are not paired.
correct program of the step.
(2) There are 33 or more sets of
(2) Reduce the number of sets of
LEDA/B IX and LEDA IXEND LEDA/B IX and LEDA IXEND
instructions. instructions to 32 or less.
"CHK FORMAT 14 141 Instructions (including NOP) other than Check the program of the CHK
ERR" LDX, LDIX, ANDX and ANIX are included instruction and correct it referring to
(Checked at contents of detailed error codes.
in the CHK instruction circuit block.
STOP/PAUSE
RUN.) 142 Multiple CHK instructions are given.
143 The number of contact points in the CHK
instruction circuit block exceeds 150.
144 The LEDA CHK instructions are not
paired with the LEDA CHKEND
instructions, or 2 or more pairs of them are
given.
145 Format of the block shown below, which is
provided before the CHK instruction
circuit block, is not as specified.
P254 CJ P
146 Device number of D1 in the CHK D1 D2

instruction is different from that of the
contact point before the CJ P
instruction.
147 Index qualification is used in the check
pattern circuit.
148 (1) Multiple check pattern circuits of the
LEDA CHK - LEDA CHKEND
instructions are given.
(2) There are 7 or more check condition
circuits in the LEDA CHK -
LEDA CHKEND instructions.
(3) The check condition circuits in the
instructions are written without using X
and Y contact instructions or compare
instructions.
(4) The check pattern circuits of the
instructions are written with 257 or
more steps.
"CAN'T 15 151 The IRET instruction was given outside of Read the error step using a peripheral
EXECUTE (I)" the interrupt program and was executed. device and delete the IRET instruction.
(Checked at
152 There is no IRET instruction in the Check the interrupt program if the IRET
occurrence of
interrupt.) interrupt program. instruction is given in it. Write the IRET
instruction if it is not given.
153 Though an interrupt module is used, no Monitor special register D9011 using a
interrupt pointer (I) which corresponds to peripheral device, and check if the
the module is given in the program. Upon interrupt program that corresponds to the
occurrence of error, the problem pointer (I) stored data is provided or if two or more
number is stored at D9011. interrupt pointers (I) of the same number
are given. Make necessary corrections.
11 - 13
11 TROUBLESHOOTING
MELSEC-Q

Detailed
Error Code
(D9008)
(D9091)
"CASSETTE 16  (1) A memory card is inserted or removed (1) Do not insert or remove a memory
ERROR" while the CPU module is ON. card while the CPU module is ON.
(2) An invalid memory card is inserted. (2) Insert an available memory card.
"RAM ERROR" 20 201 The sequence program storage RAM in the Since this is CPU hardware error, consult
(Checked at CPU module caused an error. Mitsubishi representative.
power on.) 202 The work area RAM in the CPU module
caused an error.
203 The device memory in the CPU module
caused an error.
204 The address RAM in the CPU module
caused an error.
"OPE CIRCUIT 21 211 The operation circuit for index qualification Since this is CPU hardware error, consult
ERROR" in the CPU does not work correctly. Mitsubishi representative.
(Checked at 212 Hardware (logic) in the CPU does not
power on.) operate correctly.
213 The operation circuit for sequential
processing in the CPU does not operate
correctly.
"OPE. CIRCUIT 214 In the END processing check, the
ERR." operation circuit for index qualification in
(Checked at the CPU does not work correctly.
execution of the 215 In the END processing check, the
END instruction) hardware in the CPU does not operate
correctly.
"WDT ERROR" 22  Scan time is longer than the WDT time. (1) Check the scan time of the user's
(Checked at (1) Scan time of the user's program has program and shorten it using the CJ
execution of END been extended due to certain instructions.
processing.) conditions. (2) Monitor contents of special register
(2) Scan time has been extended due to D9005 using a peripheral device. If
momentary power failure occurred the contents are other than 0, power
during scanning. supply voltage may not be stable.
Check power supply and reduce
variation in voltage.
"END NOT 24 241 Whole program of specified program (1) Reset and run the CPU again. If the
EXECUTE" capacity was executed without executing same error recurs, Since this is CPU
(Checked at the END instructions. hardware error, consult Mitsubishi
execution of the (1) When the END instruction was to be representative.
END instruction.) executed, the instruction was read as
other instruction code due to noise.
(2) The END instruction changed to other
instruction code due to unknown cause.
"MAIN CPU 26  The main CPU is malfunctioning or faulty. Since this is CPU hardware error, consult
DOWN" Mitsubishi representative
"UNIT VERIFY 31  Current I/O module information is different Read detailed error code using a
ERR" from that recognized when the power was peripheral device and check or replace
(Checked turned on. the module which corresponds to the
continuously.) (1) The I/O module (including special data (I/O head number).
function modules) connection became Or, monitor special registers D9116 to
loose or the module was disconnected D9123 using a peripheral device and
during operation, or wrong module was check or replace the modules if
connected. corresponding data bit is "1".
11 - 14
11 TROUBLESHOOTING
MELSEC-Q

Detailed
Error Code
(D9008)
(D9091)
"FUSE BREAK 32  (1) There is an output module of which fuse (1) Check the FUSE BLOWN indicator
OFF" is blown. LED on the output module and
(Checked (2) The external power supply for output replace the fuse.
continuously.) load is turned OFF or is not connected. (2) Read detailed error code using a
peripheral device and replace the
fuse of the output module which
corresponds to the data (I/O head
number).
Or, monitor special registers D9100 to
D9107 using a peripheral device and
replace the fuse of the output module
of which corresponding data bit is "1".
(3) Check the ON/OFF status of the
external power supply for output load.
"CONTROL-BUS 40 401 Due to the error of the control bus which Since it is a hardware error of special
ERR" connects to special function modules, the function module, CPU module or base
FROM/TO instruction cannot be executed. module, replace and check defective
402 If parameter I/O assignment is being module(s). Consult Mitsubishi
executed, special function modules are not representative for defective modules.
accessible at initial communication.
At error occurrence, the head I/O number
(upper 2 digits of 3 digits) of the special
function module that caused error is stored
at D9010.
403 Hardware failure. The factor is stored in
D9184.
405 (1) The expansion cable is not properly (1) Connect the expansion cable properly.
connected. (2) The hardware failure occurs in the
(2) QA1S base failure. The base special function, CPU, or base
information is different from that module. Replace the module and find
obtained at power on. the faulty one. Describe the problem
The failed base is stored in D9068 as a to the nearest system service, retail
bit pattern. store, or corporate office, and obtain
The failed base is stored in D9010 from advice.
the upper stage.
"SP.UNIT DOWN" 41 411 Though an access was made to a special Since it is hardware error of the special
function module at execution of the function module to which an access was
FROM/TO instruction, no response is made, consult Mitsubishi representative.
received.
412 If parameter I/O assignment is being
executed, no response is received from a
special function module at initial
communication.
At error occurrence, the head I/O number
(upper 2 digits of 3 digits) of the special
function module that caused error is stored
at D9011.
"LINK UNIT 42  Two of A1SJ71AP21/R21 and Specify one of A1SJ71AP21/R21 and
ERROR" A1SJ71AT21B are specified as master A1SJ71AT21B as a master station and
stations. another as a local station.
"I/O INT. 43  Though the interrupt module is not loaded, Since it is hardware error of a module,
ERROR" an interrupt occurred. replace and check a defective module.
For defective modules, consult Mitsubishi
representative.
11 - 15
11 TROUBLESHOOTING
MELSEC-Q

Detailed
Error Code
(D9008)
(D9091)
"SP.UNIT 44 A special function module is assigned as Execute I/O assignment again using
LAY.ERR." an I/O module, or vice versa, in the I/O parameters from the peripheral device
441
assignment using parameters from the according to the loading status of special
peripheral device. function modules.
There are 9 or more special function Reduce the special function modules
modules (except A1SI61) which can (except A1SI61) which can execute
442
execute interruption to the CPU module interrupt start to 8 or less.
loaded.
443 Three or more A1SJ71AP21/R21 and Reduce the number of A1SJ71AP21/R21
A1SJ71AT21B are installed. and A1SJ71AT21B to two or less.
444 There are 7 or more modules such as a Reduce the computer link modules to 6 or
computer link module loaded to one CPU less.
module.
445 There are 2 or more A1SI61 modules Reduce the A1SI61 module to 1.
loaded.
446 Modules assigned by parameters for Perform again module assignment for
MNT/MINI automatic refresh from the MNT/MINI automatic refresh with
peripheral device do not conform with the parameters according to actually linked
types of station modules actually linked. station modules.
447 The number of modules of I/O assignment Reduce the number of loaded special
registration (number of loaded modules) function modules.
per one CPU module for the special
function modules which can use dedicated
instructions is larger than the specified
limit. (Total of the number of computers
shown below is larger than 1344.)
Number of A1SJ71C24-R2 (PRF/R4)
being installed 10
Number of A1SJ71UC24
being installed 10
Number of A1SJ71PT32-S3
being installed 125
Number of A1SJ71PT32 (S3)
being installed 125
448 (1) Five or more A1SJ71LP21 and (1) Reduce the number to four or less.
A1SJ71BR11 are installed. (2) Reduce the total number to four or
(2) Five or more A1SJ71AP21/R21, less.
A1SJ71AT21B, A1SJ71LP21, and
A1SJ71BR11 are installed in total.
449 An invalid base module is used. Use an available base module.
Failure of base module hardware Replace the failed base module.
"SP.UNIT 46 461 Module specified by the FROM/TO Read the error step using a peripheral
ERROR" instruction is not a special function module. device and check and correct contents of
(Checked at the FROM/TO instruction of the step.
execution of the
FROM/TO
instruction or the 462 Module specified by the dedicated Read the error step using a peripheral
dedicated instruction for special function module is device and check and correct contents of
instructions for not a special function module or not a the dedicated instruction for special
special function corresponding special function module. function modules of the step.
modules.)
11 - 16
11 TROUBLESHOOTING
MELSEC-Q

Detailed
Error Code
(D9008)
(D9091)
"LINK PARA. 47 0 [When using MELSECNET/(II)] (1) Write the parameters again and
ERROR" (1) When the link range at a data link CPU check.
which is also a master station (station (2) Check the station number settings.
number = 00) is set by parameter (3) Persistent error occurrence may
setting at a peripheral device, for some indicate a hardware fault. Consult
reason the data written to the link your nearest Mitsubishi representa-
parameter area differs from the link tive, explaining the nature of the
parameter data read by the CPU. problem.
Alternatively, no link parameters have
been written.
(2) The total number of slave stations is set
at 0.
470 [When using MELSECNET/10] Write the network refresh parameters
(1) The contents of the network refresh again and check.
parameters written from a peripheral
device differ from the actual system at
the base unit.
(2) The network refresh parameters have
not been written
471 [When using MELSECNET/10] Write the network parameters again and
(1) The transfer source device range and check.
transfer destination device range
specified for the inter-network transfer
parameters are in the same network.
(2) The specified range of transfer source
devices or transfer destination devices
for the inter-network transfer
parameters spans two or more
networks.
(3) The specified range of transfer source
devices or transfer destination devices
for the inter-network transfer
parameters is not used by the network.
472 [When using MELSECNET/10] Write the routing parameters again and
The contents of the routing parameters check.
written from a peripheral device differ from
the actual network system.
473 [When using MELSECNET/10] (1) Write the parameters again and
(1) The contents of the network parameters check.
for the first link unit, written from a (2) Check the station number settings.
peripheral device, differ from the actual (3) Persistent error occurrence may
network system. indicate a hardware fault. Consult
(2) The link parameters for the first link unit your nearest Mitsubishi representa-
have not been written. tive, explaining the nature of the
(3) The setting for the total number of problem.
stations is 0.
474 [When using MELSECNET/10]
(1) The contents of the network parameters
for the second link unit, written from a
peripheral device, differ from the actual
network system.
(2) The link parameters for the second link
unit have not been written.
(3) The setting for the total number of
stations is 0.
475 [When using MELSECNET/10]
(1) The contents of the network parameters
for the third link unit, written from a
peripheral device, differ from the actual
network system.
(2) The link parameters for the third link
unit have not been written.
(3) The setting for the total number of
stations is 0.
11 - 17
11 TROUBLESHOOTING
MELSEC-Q

Detailed
Error Code
(D9008)
(D9091)
"LINK PARA. 47 476 [When using MELSECNET/10] (1) Write the parameters again and
ERROR" (1) The contents of the network parameters check.
for the fourth link unit, written from a (2) Check the station number settings.
peripheral device, differ from the actual (3) Persistent error occurrence may
network system. indicate a hardware fault. Consult
(2) The link parameters for the fourth link your nearest Mitsubishi representa-
unit have not been written. tive, explaining the nature of the
(3) The setting for the total number of problem.
stations is 0.
"OPERATION 50 501 (1) When file registers (R) are used, Read the error step using a peripheral
ERROR" operation is executed outside of device and check and correct program of
(Checked at specified ranges of device numbers the step.
execution of and block numbers of file registers (R).
instruction.) (2) File registers are used in the program
without setting capacity of file registers.
502 Combination of the devices specified by
instruction is incorrect.
503 Stored data or constant of specified device
is not in the usable range.
504 Set number of data to be handled is out of
the usable range.
505 (1) Station number specified by the
LEDA/B LRDP , LEDA/B LWTP ,
LRDP , LWTP instructions is not a
local station.
(2) Head I/O number specified by the
LEDA/B RFRP , LEDA/B RTOP ,
RFRP , RTOP instructions is not of a
remote station.
506 Head I/O number specified by the
LEDA/B RFRP , LEDA/B RTOP ,
RFRP , RTOP instructions is not of a
special function module.
507 (1) When the AD57(S1) or AD58 was AD57 (S1) and AD58 cannot be used
executing instructions in divided with QCPU-A.
processing mode, other instructions Review the program.
were executed to either of them.
(2) When an AD57(S1) or AD58 was
executing instructions in divided
processing mode, other instructions
were executed in divided mode to
another AD57(S1) or AD58.
509 (1) An instruction which cannot be (1) Read the error step using a peripheral
executed by remote terminal modules device and correct the program,
connected to the MNET/MINI-S3 was meeting loaded conditions of remote
executed to the modules. terminal modules.
(2) When the PRC instruction was (2) Provide interlock using M9081
executed to a remote terminal, the (communication request registration
communication request registration areas BUSY signal) or D9081
areas overflowed. (number of vacant areas in the
(3) The PIDCONT instruction was communication request registration
executed without executing the areas) when the PRC instruction is
PIDINIT instruction. executed to a remote terminal.
The PID57 instruction was executed (3) Correct the program specified by the
without executing the PIDINIT or ZCHG instruction to other.
PIDCONT instruction.
The program presently executed was
specified by the ZCHG instruction.
11 - 18
11 TROUBLESHOOTING
MELSEC-Q

Detailed
Error Code
(D9008)
(D9091)
"MAIN CPU 60  (1) The CPU malfunctioned due to noise. (1) Take proper countermeasures for
DOWN" (2) Hardware failure. noise.
61 (2) Since it is hardware error, consult
Mitsubishi representative.
"BATTERY 70  (1) The battery voltage for the CPU module (1) Replace the battery of the CPU
ERROR" has dropped below the specified value. module.
(Checked at (2) The lead connector of the CPU module (2) Connect the lead connector when
power on.) battery is disconnected. using the standard RAM or the
(M9006 is ON.) memory retention function during
(3) The battery voltage for the memory power failure.
card has dropped below the specified (3) Replace the battery of the memory
value. (M9048 is ON.) card.
11 - 19
11 TROUBLESHOOTING
MELSEC-Q
11.4 Possible Troubles with I/O Modules
Examples of troubles concerning I/O circuits and the countermeasures are explained.
11.4.1 Troubles with the input circuit and the countermeasures
Examples of troubles concerning input circuits and the countermeasures are

explained.
Table 11.2 Troubles with the input circuit and the countermeasures
Situation Cause Countermeasure
• Leak current from input switch (driven by a • Connect an appropriate resistance so that voltage
contactless switch, etc.) between the terminals of the input module is lower
AC input than the OFF voltage.
AC input
Input signal C Input
Example 1 does not turn R Leak current module C Input
OFF. R module
For OR constant, 0.1 to 0.47µF+47 to 120Ω (1/2W)

is recommended.
• Driven by a limit switch with a neon lamp • Same as the example 1.
AC input • Or, provide a totally independent display circuit
Input signal separately.
Example 2 does not turn Input
Leak current
OFF. module
• Line capacity C of the leak current twisted pair • Same as the example 1.
cable due to line capacity of the wiring cable is • However, it does not occur when power supply is
about 100PF/m. on the side of input device as shown below.
AC input AC input
Input signal
Example 3 does not turn
OFF. Leak Input Input
current module module
Power supply Power supply
• Driven by a switch with LED display • Connect an appropriate resistance so that voltage
between the terminal of the input module and the
DC input (sink) common is lower than the OFF voltage as shown
below.
DC input (sink)
Input signal Leak current Input
Example 4 does not turn module
OFF. Resistor Input
module
* An example of calculation of resistance to be

connected is provided on the following page.
11 - 20
11 TROUBLESHOOTING
MELSEC-Q
Table 11.2 Troubles with the input circuit and the countermeasures
• Revolving path due to the use of two power • Use only one power supply.
supplies. • Connect a diode to prevent the revolving path
(figure below).
Input signal
Example 5 does not turn L Input
OFF. E1 E2 module Input
L
E1 E2 module
E1 > E2
<Calculation example for example 4>

When a switch with a LED display is connected to A1SX40 and there is a leak current
at 4mA:
A1SX40
Leak current 4mA Input

module
3.6k
24VDC
(1) Since OFF current of A1SX40 does not satisfy the 1mA, it does not turn OFF.
Thus, a resistance is connected as shown below.
A1SX40
4mA
Iz=1mA
IR=3mA R Z
Input impedance
3.3k
3.6k
24VDC
(2) Calculation of resistance R connected will be as follows:

To satisfy the OFF current of 1mA for A1SX40, a resistance R with which 3mA
flows to the connected resistance is required.
IR : IZ = Z (Input impedance) : R
IZ 1
R (Input impedance) = 3.3 = 1.1 [k ]
IR 3
R < 1.1k
If resistance R is 1k , power capacity W of the resistance R is:
2 2
W = (Input voltage) ÷ R = 26.4 ÷ 1000 = 0.7 (W)
(3) Since the power capacity of a resistance is selected at 3 to 5 times the actual
power consumption, a resistance at 1[k ], 2 to 3[W] needs to be connected to the
terminal causing the problem.
11 - 21
11 TROUBLESHOOTING
MELSEC-Q
11.4.2 Possible troubles in the output circuit
Examples of troubles concerning output circuits and the countermeasures are

explained.
Table 11.3 Troubles with the output circuit and the countermeasures
• When the load is subjected to half wave • Connect a resistance at several tens to several
rectification inside. (Solenoids have these types). hundred of k to the both ends of the load.
A1SY22 With this kind of usage, there is no problem
Output module D1 [1] with the output element, but the diode built-
An excessive in to the load may deteriorate and burn-out.
voltage is Load Resistance
Example 1 impressed to the
load when [2]
output is off. • When the polarity of the power supply is [1], C is Load
charged, and when the polarity is [2], the voltage
charged in C + voltage of the power supply are
impressed to the both ends of D1. The maximum
value of the voltage is about 2.2E.
• Leak current caused by built-in surge killer • Connect a resistance to the both ends of the load.
When the wiring distance from the output
A1SY22 card to the load is long, be aware of the risk
Output module
Load of a leak current due to line capacity.
Load does not
Example 2 OFF Leak current Resistance
(Triac output)
Load
• Start the relay first, then start the CR-type timer at

the contact.
In some timers, internal circuit may be half
A1SY22
When load is wave rectification type, so the caution as to
Output module
CR type timer, CR timer the example 1 is necessary here.
Example 3 the time limit
fluctuates. Leak current Resistance Calculate the
(Triac output) constant of the
resistance based
CR timer on the load.
11 - 22
APPENDICES
MELSEC-Q
APPENDICES
Appendix 1 Instruction List
The list of instructions that can be used with the QCPU-A is shown.
Refer to the following programming manuals for the details of the instructions.
• ACPU Programming Manual (Basics) IB-66249

• ACPU Programming Manual (Common Instructions) IB-66250
• AnACPU/AnUCPU Programming Manual (Dedicated Instructions) IB-66251
• AnACPU/AnUCPU Programming Manual (AD57 Instructions) IB-66257
• AnACPU/AnUCPU Programming Manual (PID Control Instructions) IB-66258
(1) Sequence instructions

(a) Contact instruction
Contact LD, LDI, AND, ANI, OR, ORI
(b) Connection instruction

Contact ANB, ORB, MPS, MRD, MPP
(c) Output instruction

Output OUT, SET, RST, PLS, PLF
(d) Shift instruction

Shift SFT, SFTP
(e) Master control instruction

Master control MC, MCR
(f) End instruction

Program end FEND, END
(g) Other instructions

Stop STOP
No operation NOP
Page break (Page break operation for printer output) NOPLF
App - 1
APPENDICES
MELSEC-Q
(2) Basic instructions

(a) Comparison instruction
16-bit LD=, AND=, OR=
=
32-bit LDD=, ANDD=, ORD=
16-bit LD< >, AND< >, OR< >
<>
32-bit LDD< >, ANDD< >, ORD< >
16-bit LD>, AND>, OR>
>
32-bit LDD>, ANDD>, ORD>
16-bit LD<=, AND<=, OR<=
≤
32-bit LDD<=, ANDD<=, ORD<=
16-bit LD<, AND<, OR<
<
32-bit LDD<, ANDD<, ORD<
16-bit LD>=, AND>=, OR>=
≥
32-bit LDD>=, ANDD>=, ORD>=
(b) BIN arithmetic operation instructions

16-bit Two types each for +, +P
+ Addition
32-bit Two types each for D+, D+P
16-bit Two types each for –, – P
– Subtraction
32-bit Two types each for D –, D – P
16-bit , P
Multiplication
32-bit D ,D P
16-bit /, /P
/ Division
32-bit D/, D/P
16-bit INC, INCP
+1 Addition
32-bit DINC, DINCP
16-bit DEC, DECP
-1 Subtraction
32-bit DDEC, DDECP
(c) BCD arithmetic operation instructions

BCD 4-digit Two types each for B+, B+P
+ Addition
BCD 8-digit Two types each for DB+, DB+P
BCD 4-digit Two types each for B–, B–P
– Subtraction
BCD 8-digit Two types each for DB, DB–P
BCD 4-digit B ,B P
Multiplication
BCD 8-digit DB , DB P
BCD 4-digit B/, B/P
/ Division
BCD 8-digit DB/, DB/P
(d) BCD-BIN conversion instructions

16-bit BCD, BCDP
BIN BCD
32-bit DBCD, DBCDP
16-bit BIN, BINP
BCD BIN
32-bit DBIN, DBINP
App - 2
APPENDICES
MELSEC-Q
(e) Data transfer instructions

16-bit MOV, MOVP
Transfer
32-bit DMOV, DMOVP
16-bit XCH, XCHP
Exchange
32-bit DXCH, DXCHP
16-bit CML, CMLP
Negation transfer
32-bit DCML, DCMLP
Batch transfer 16-bit BMOV, BMOVP
Batch transfer same data 16-bit FMOV, FMOVP
(f) Program branch instructions

Jump CJ, SCJ, JMP
Call subroutine CALL, CALLP, RET
Enable/disable an interrupt program EI, DI, IRET
(g) Refresh instructions

Link refresh COM
Partial refresh SEG
(3) Application instructions

(a) Logical operation instructions
16-bit Two types each for WAND, WANDP
Logical product
32-bit DAND, DANDP
16-bit Two types each for WOR, WORP
Logical sum
32-bit DOR, DORP
16-bit Two types each for WXOR, WXORP
Exclusive logical sum
32-bit DXOR, DXORP
16-bit Two types each for WXNR, WXNRP
Not exclusive logical sum
32-bit DXNR, DXNRP
Complements of 2 (sign invert) 16-bit NEG, NEGP
(b) Rotation instructions

16-bit ROR, RORP, RCR, RCRP
Right rotation
32-bit DROR, DRORP, DRCR, DRCRP
16-bit ROL, ROLP, RCL, RCLP
Left rotation
32-bit DROL, DROLP, DRCL, DRCLP
(c) Shift instructions

16-bit SFR, SFRP, BSFR, BSFRP
Right shift
Device DSFR, DSFRP
16-bit SFL, SFLP, BSFL, BSFLP
Left shift
Device DSFL, DSFLP
App - 3
APPENDICES
MELSEC-Q
(d) Data processing instruction

Search data 16-bit SER, SERP
16-bit SUM, SUMP
Check bit
32-bit DSUM, DSUMP
2n-bit DECO, DECOP
Decode
16-bit SEG
Encode 2n-bit ENCO, ENCOP
Set bit 16-bit BSET, BSETP
Reset bit 16-bit BRST, BRSTP
Separate 16-bit DIS, DISP
Connection 16-bit UNI, UNIP
(e) FIFO instructions

Write 16-bit FIFW, FIFWP
Read 16-bit FIFR, FIFRP
(f) ASCII instructions

ASCII conversion ASC
Print ASCII PR (two types), PRC
(g) Buffer memory access instructions

1 word FROM, FROMP
Read data
2 word DFRO, DFROP
1 word TO, TOP
Write data
2 word DTO, DTOP
(h) FOR to NEXT instructions

Repeat FOR, NEXT
(i) Display instructions

Display LED, LEDC
Reset display LEDR
(j) Data link module instructions

Read data 1 word LRDP, RFRP
Write data 1 word LWTP, RTOP
(k) Other instructions

Reset WDT WDT, WDTP
Failure check CHK
Status latch SLT, SLTR
Sampling trace STRA, STRAR
Set/reset carry flag 1-bit STC, CLC
Timing clock 1-bit DUTY
App - 4
APPENDICES
MELSEC-Q
(4) Dedicated instructions

(a) Direct processing instructions
Direct output DOUT
Direct set DSET
Direct reset DRST
(b) Structured program instructions

Add circuit index IX, IXEND
Repeat forced end BREAK
Call subroutine FCALL
Change failure check circuit pattern CHK, CHKEND
(c) Data operation instructions

Search 32-bit data DSER
Swap 16-bit upper/lower byte SWAP
Separate data DIS
Connection data UNI
Test bit TEST, DTEST
(d) I/O operation instructions

Flip-flop control FF
Numeric key input from keyboard KEY
(e) Real value processing instructions (BCD format processing)

BCD 4-digit square root BSQR
BCD 8-digit square root BDSQR
SIN (sine) operation BSIN
COS (cosine) operation BCOS
TAN (tangent) operation BTAN
SIN-1 (arcsine) operation BASIN
COS-1 (arccosine) operation BACOS
TAN-1 (arctangent) operation BATAN
(f) Real value processing instructions (Floating point format real

value processing)
Real value 16/32-bit BIN conversion INT, DINT
16/32-bit BIN real value conversion FLOAT, DFLOAT
Addition ADD
Subtraction SUB
Multiplication MUL
Division DIV
Angle radian conversion RAD
Radian angle conversion DEG
SIN (sine) operation BSIN
COS (cosine) operation BCOS
TAN (tangent) operation BTAN
SIN-1 (arcsine) operation BASIN
-1
COS (arccosine) operation BACOS
TAN-1 (arctangent) operation BATAN
Square root SQR
Exponential EXP
Logarithm LOG
App - 5
APPENDICES
MELSEC-Q
(g) Text string processing instructions

16/32-bit BIN decimal ASCII conversion BINDA, DBINDA
16/32-bit BIN hexadecimal ASCII conversion BINHA, DBINHA
16/32-bit BCD decimal ASCII conversion BCDDA, DBCDDA
Decimal ASCII 16/32-bit BIN conversion DABIN, DDABIN
Hexadecimal ASCII 16/32-bit BIN conversion HABIN, DHABIN
Decimal ASCII 16/32-bit BCD conversion DABCD, DDABCD
Read device comment data COMRD
Detect text string length LEN
16/32-bit BIN decimal text string conversion STR, DSTR
Decimal text string 16/32-bit BIN conversion VAL, DVAL
Hexadecimal data ASCII conversion ASC
ASCII hexadecimal data conversion HEX
Transfer text string SMOV
Concatenate text string SADD
Compare text string SCMP
Separate in byte units WTOB
Concatenate byte-unit data BTOW
(h) Data control instructions

Control upper/lower limit LIMIT, DLIMIT
Control dead band BAND, DBAND
Control zone ZONE, DZONE
(i) Clock instructions

Read clock data DATERD
Write clock data DATEWR
(j) Extension file register instructions

Expansion file register block number conversion RSET
Block transfer between expansion file registers BMOVR
Block exchange between expansion file register BXCHR
Direct read of expansion file register in 1 word units ZRRD
Direct read of expansion file register in 1 byte units ZRRDB
Direct write of expansion file register in 1 word units ZRWR
Direct write of expansion file register in 1 byte units ZRWRB
(k) 1ms timer instruction

Set 1ms timer ZHTIME
(l) Data link instructions

1: New instructions set for exclusive use with AnUCPU
Read local station word device LRDP
Write local station word device LWTP
Read data from the remote I/O station special function module RFRP
Write data from the remote I/O station special function module RTOP
1 Read word device from connected station ZNRD
1 Write word device to connected station ZNWR
1 Network refresh instruction ZCOM
App - 6
APPENDICES
MELSEC-Q
(m) AD61(S1) high-speed counter module control instructions

(The AD61 dedicated instructions cannot be executed with A1SD61.)
Set preset value PVWR1, PVWR2
Write setting data for large/small/match determination SVWR1, SVWR2
Read current value from CH1/CH2 PVRD1, PVRD2
(n) AJ71C24(S8) computer link module control instructions

Character up to 00H code PR
Data send
Intended number of characters PRN
Data received INPUT
Read communication status SPBUSY
Communication processing forced interrupt SPCLR
(o) AJ71C21(S1) terminal interface module control instructions

Output data to RS-232C (data up to 00H code) PR2
Output data to RS-422 (data up to 00H code) PR4
Output data to RS-232C (for number of intended points) PRN2
Output data to RS-422 (for number of intended points) PRN4
Read input data from RS-232C INPUT2
Input data from RS-422 INPUT4
Read data from RAM GET
Write data to RAM PUT
Communication processing forced interrupt SPCLR
(p) MELSECNET/MINI-S3 master module control instructions

Key input from operation box INPUT
Data send/received for specified number of bytes to/from
PR, PRN, INPUT
AJ35PTF-R2
Read/write data for MINI standard protocol module MINI
Reset error for remote terminal module MINIERR
Communication status forced interrupt SPCLR
(q) PID operation instructions

Set control data PIDINIT
PID operation PIDCONT
Monitor PID operation result for AD57(S1) PID57
(r) AD59(S1) memory card/centronix interface module control

instructions
Characters up to 00H code PR
Output to printer
Intended number of characters PRN
Read data to memory card GET
Write data to memory card PUT
App - 7
APPENDICES
MELSEC-Q
(s) AD57(S1) control instructions

Display mode setting instructions CMODE
Display canvas screen CPS1
Change VRAM display address CPS2
Screen display control Transfer canvas CMOV
instructions Clear screen CLS
Clear VRAM CLV
Scroll up/down CSCRU, CSCRD
Display cursor CON1, CON2
Cursor control instructions Erase cursor COFF
Set cursor position LOCATE
Normal/inverted display of characters
CNOR, CREV
to be displaye
Display condition setting
Normal/inverted display of characters CRDSP, CRDSPV
instructions
Specify color of characters COLOR
Change color characters CCDSP, CCDSPV
Display ASCII character PR, PRN
Write ASCII character PRV, PRNV
Specified character display
Display character EPR, EPRN
instructions
Write character EPRV, EPRNV
Continuous display same character CR1, CR2, CC1, CC2
Display – (minus) CINMP
Display - (hyphen) CINHP
Fixed character display Display . (period, decimal point) CINPT
instructions Display numeric characters CIN0 to CIN9
Display alphanumeric characters CINA to CINZ
Display space CINSP
Specified column clear instruction CINCLR
Conversion instructions for displayed text string into ASCII code INPUT
VRAM data control Read data GET
instructions Write data PUT
Display status read instruction STAT
(t) CC-Link dedicated instructions

Link parameter setting PLPA
Refresh parameter setting RRPA
Read master station buffer memory RIFR
Write to master station buffer memory RITO
Read buffer memory of intelligent remote station RIRD
Write to buffer memory of intelligent remote station RIWT
Write to buffer memory of intelligent remote station (with handshaking) RISEND
Read buffer memory of intelligent remote station (with handshaking) RIRCV
App - 8
APPENDICES
MELSEC-Q
Appendix 2 Lists of Special Relays and Special Registers
The list of the special relays and special registers that can be used by the QCPU-A is
shown below:
Appendix 2.1 List of special relays
The special relays are the internal relays that have specific applications in the
sequencer. Therefore, the coil cannot be turned ON/OFF on the program. (Except for
the ones marked by 1 or 2 in the table.)
Refer to the Network System Reference Manual for the special relays after M9200.
Special Relay List

Number Name Description Details Applicable CPU
• Turned on when there is one or more output units of Usable with all types
which fuse has been blown. Remains on if normal of CPUs
1 OFF: Normal
Fuse blown status is restored. Only remote I/O
M9000 ON: Fuse blown unit
Output modules of remote I/O stations are also station information is
checked fore fuse condition. valid for A2C.
• Turned on if the status of I/O module is different from
entered status when power is turned on. Remains on Usable with all types
if normal status is restored. of CPUs
1 I/O unit OFF: Normal
I/O module verification is done also to remote I/O Only remote I/O
M9002 verify error ON: Error
station modules. station information is
(Reset is enabled only when special registers D9116 valid for A2C.
to D9123 are reset.)
• Turned on when the MINI (S3) link error is detected Dedicated to AnA,
MINI link master OFF: Normal
M9004 on even one of the AJ71PT32(S3) modules being  A2AS, AnU and
module error ON: Error
loaded. Remains on if normal status is restored. QCPU-A (A Mode).
• Turned on when an momentary power failure of 20
OFF: AC power good
1 AC DOWN msec or less occurred. Usable with all types
ON: AC power
M9005 detection Reset when POWER switch is moved from OFF to of CPUs.
DOWN
ON position.
• Turned on when battery voltage reduces to less than
OFF: Normal Usable with all types
M9006 Battery low specified. Turned off when battery voltage becomes
ON: Battery low of CPUs.
normal.
• Turned on when battery voltage reduces to less than
1 OFF: Normal Usable with all types
Battery low latch specified. Remains on if battery voltage becomes
M9007 ON: Battery low of CPUs.
normal
1 Self-diagnostic OFF: No error • Turned on when error is found as a result of self- Usable with all types
M9008 error ON: Error diagnosis. of CPUs.
Annunciator OFF: No detection • Turned on when OUT F of SET F instruction is Usable with all types
M9009
detection ON: Detected executed. Switched off when D9124 data is zeroed. of CPUs.
Unusable with A3H,
• Turned on when operation error occurs during
Operation OFF: No error A3M, AnA, A2AS,
M9010 execution of application instruction. Turned off when
error flag ON: Error AnU and QCPU-A
error is eliminated.
(A Mode).
• Turned on when operation error occurs during
1 Operation OFF: No error Usable with all types
execution of application instruction. Remains on if
M9011 error flag ON: Error of CPUs.
normal status is restored.
OFF: Carry off Usable with all types
M9012 Carry flag • Carry flag used in application instruction.
ON: Carry on of CPUs.
App - 9
APPENDICES
MELSEC-Q
Special Relay List (Continue)

• Clears the data memory including the latch range
Data memory OFF: No processing (other than special relays and special registers) in Usable with all types
M9016
clear flag ON: Output clear remote run mode from computer, etc. when M9016 of CPUs.
is on.
• Clears the unlatched data memory (other than
Data memory OFF: No processing Usable with all types
M9017 special relays and special registers) in remote run
clear flag ON: Output clear of CPUs.
mode from computer, etc. when M9017 is on.
2 Data link monitor OFF: F link • Specifies the lines to be monitored for link
 Dedicated to A3V.
M9018 switching ON: R link monitoring.
User timing clock • Relay which repeats on/off at intervals of
M9020
No. 0 predetermined scan.
User timing clock • When power is turned on or reset is per-formed, the
M9021
No. 1 n2 n2 clock starts with off.
User timing clock scan scan • Set the intervals of on/off by DUTY instruction. Usable with all types
M9022
No. 2 n1 of CPUs.
scan
User timing clock
M9023 DUTY n1 n2 M9020
No. 3
User timing clock
M9024
No. 4
• Writes clock data from D9025-D9028 to the clock Unusable with An,
2 Clock data set OFF: No processing element after the END instruction is executed A3H, A3M, A3V,
M9025 request ON: Set requested during the scan in which M9025 has changed from A2C, A52G, and
off to on. A0J2H.
Unusable with An,
OFF: No error A3H, A3M, A3V,
M9026 Clock data error • Switched on by clock data (D9025 to D9028) error.
ON: Error A2C, A52G and
A0J2H.
• Clock data is read from D9025-D9028 and month, Usable with A3N,
Clock data OFF: No processing
M9027 day, hour, minute and minute are indicated on the A3A, A3U, A4U, A73
display ON: Display
CPU front LED display. and A3N board.
Unusable with An,
2 Clock data read OFF: No processing • Reads clock data to D9025-D9028 in BCD when
A3H, A3M, A3V, A2C
M9028 request ON: Read request M9028 is on.
and A0J2H.
0.05
0.1 second
M9030 seconds 0.05
clock seconds
0.1
0.2 second 0.1
M9031 seconds • 0.1 second, 0.2 second, 1 second, 2 second, and 1
clock seconds
minute clocks are generated.
0.5 • Not turned on and off per scan but turned on and off
1 second seconds
M9032 0.5 Unusable with A3V.
clock seconds even during scan if corresponding time has elapsed.
1 • Starts with off when power is turned on or reset is
2 second second
M9033 1 performed.
clock second
30
1 minute 30
M9034 seconds
clock seconds
App - 10
APPENDICES
MELSEC-Q

ON • Used as dummy contacts of initialization and
M9036 Normally ON OFF
application instruction in sequence program.
ON
M9037 Normally OFF • M9036 and M9037 are turned on and off without
OFF
regard to position of key switch on CPU front. M9038
On only for 1 ON and M9039 are under the same condition as RUN Usable with all types
M9038 1 scan
scan after run OFF
status except when the key switch is at STOP of CPU
position, and turned off and on. Switched off if the
RUN flag (off
ON 1 scan key switch is in STOP position. M9038 is on for one
M9039 only for 1 scan OFF scan only and M9039 is off for one scan only if the
after run)
key switch is not in STOP position.
PAUSE enable OFF: PAUSE disabled
M9040 • When RUN key switch is at PAUSE position or
coil ON: PAUSE enabled Usable with all types
remote pause contact has turned on and if M9040 is
PAUSE status OFF: Not during pause of CPU
M9041 on, PAUSE mode is set and M9041 is turned on.
contact ON: During pause
Stop status OFF: During stop • Switched on when the RUN key switch is in STOP Usable with all types
M9042
contact ON: Not during stop position. of CPU
OFF: During sampling • Turned on upon completion of sampling trace
Sampling trace trace performed the number of times preset by parameter Unusable with A1 and
M9043
completion ON: Sampling trace after STRA instruction is executed. A1N.
completion Reset when STRAR instruction is executed.
• Turning on/off M9044 can execute STRA /
STRAR instruction.
(M9044 is forcibly turned on/off by a peripheral
OFF ON: STRA device.)
Same as execution When switched from OFF to ON: STRA instruction Unusable with A1 and
M9044 Sampling trace
ON OFF: STRAR When switched from ON to OFF: STRAR A1N.
Same as execution instruction
The value stored in D9044 is used as the condition
for the sampling trace.
At scanning, at time Time (10 msec unit)
OFF: Except during
Unusable with A1 and
M9046 Sampling trace trace • Switched on during sampling trace.
A1N.
ON: During trace
OFF: Sampling trace
Sampling trace stop • Switched on to start sampling trace. Unusable with A1 and
M9047
preparation ON: Sampling trace • Switched off to stop sampling trace. A1N.
start
ON: Flickers at
• Sets whether the RUN LED flickers or not when the
2 RUN LED flicker annunciator on.
annunciator relay F is turned on when the A0J2H  Usable with A0J2H.
M9048 flag OFF: No flicker at
is used.
annunciator on.
OFF: Low voltage is
Memory card • Turned ON when the drop in the battery voltage for
not detected. Dedicated to
M9048 battery voltage the memory card is detected. (Automatically turned 
ON: Low voltage is QCPU-A (A Mode)
detection OFF when the voltage recovers to normal.)
detected.
OFF: Up to NUL code
Switching the • When M9049 is off, up to NUL (00H) code are output.
are output. Unusable with An,
M9049 number of output • When M9049 is on, ASCII codes of 16 characters are
ON: 16 characters are A3V, A2C and A52G
characters output.
output.
App - 11
APPENDICES
MELSEC-Q

Operation result
storage memory
2 OFF: Not changed • Switched on to exchange the operation result storage
change contact  Dedicated to A3
M9050 ON: Changed memory data and the save area data.
(for CHG
instruction)
Usable with A3, A3N,
CHG instruction • Switched on to disable the CHG instruction.
OFF: Disable A3H, A3M, A3V,
M9051 execution • Switched on when program transfer is requested and 
ON: Enable A3A, A3U, A4U, A73
disable automatically switched off when transfer is complete.
and A3N board
• Switched on to execute the SEG instruction as an
OFF: 7SEG display
2 SEG instruction I/O partial refresh instruction. Unusable with An,
ON: I/O partial
M9052 switching Switched off to execute the SEG instruction as a A3V and A3N board
refresh
7SEG display instruction.
OFF: Sequence
EI / DI
2 interrupt control • Switched on to execute the link refresh enable, Unusable with An,
instruction
M9053 ON: Link interrupt disable (EI, DI) instructions. A3V and A3N board
switching
control
Unusable with An,
OFF: Other than step
STEP RUN • Switched on when the RUN key switch is in STEP AnS, AnSH, A1FX,
M9054 run
flag RUN position. A2C, A0J2H, and
ON: During step run
A52G
Status latch OFF: Not complete • Turned on when status latch is completed. Turned off Unusable with A1 and
M9055
complete flag ON: Complete by reset instruction. A1N.
OFF: Other than P, I
Main program Usable with A3, A3N,
M9056 set request
P, I set request A3H, A3M, A3V,
ON: P, I set request • Provides P, I set request after transfer of the other 
A3A, A73, A3U, A4U
Subprogram 1 program (for example subprogram when main
M9057 and A3N board
P, I set request OFF: Except during P, I program is being run) is complete during run.
Subprogram 2 set request Automatically switched off when P, I setting is
M9060
P, I set request ON: During P, I set complete.
 Dedicated to A4U
Subprogram 3 request
M9061
P, I set request
• Turned on when one of remote terminal modules has
become a faulty station.
• Communication error is detected when normal
communication is not restored after the number of
retries set at D9174.
Remote terminal OFF: Normal • Turned off when communication with all re-mote Usable with A2C and
M9060 
error ON: Error terminal modules is restored to normal with A52G
automatic online return enabled.
• Remains on when automatic online return is
disabled.
• Not turned on or off when communication is
suspended at error detection.
• Turned on when communication with a remote
terminal module or an I/O module is faulty.
• Communication error occurs due to the following
reasons.
• Initial data error
Communication OFF: Normal • Cable breakage Usable with A2C and
M9061 • Power off for remote terminal modules or I/O 
error ON: Error A52G
modules
• Turned off when communication is restored to
normal with automatic online return enabled.
• Remains on when communication is suspended at
error detection with automatic online return disabled.
App - 12
APPENDICES
MELSEC-Q

OFF: Other than divid-
• Turned on when canvas screen transfer to
Divided transfer ed processing Usable with AnA and
M9065 AD57(S1)/AD58 is done by divided processing, and 
status ON: Divided AnU.
turned off at completion of divided processing.
processing
Transfer
2 OFF: Batch transfer • Turned on when canvas screen transfer to Usable with AnA and
processing 
M9066 ON: Divided transfer AD57(S1)/AD58 is done by divided processing. AnU.
switching
• Turned on when one of I/O modules has become a
faulty station.
• Communication error is detected when normal
communication is not restored after the number of
retries set at D9174.
I/O module
OFF: Normal • Turned off when communication with all I/O modules Usable with A2C and
M9067 error 
ON: Error is restored to normal with automatic online return A52G.
detection
enabled.
• Remains on when automatic online return is
disabled.
• Not turned on or off when communication is
suspended at error detection.
OFF: Automatic online
return enabled
Automatic online • Turned on when line check with I/O modules and
return disabled remote terminal modules is performed. Usable with A2C and
M9068 Test mode 
Communication • Turned off when communication with I/O modules A52G.
suspended at and remote terminal modules is per-formed.
online error
ON: Line check
• Sets whether all outputs are turned off or retained at
OFF: All outputs are communication error.
Output at line turned off. OFF: .......... All outputs are turned off at Usable with A2C and
M9069 
error ON: Outputs are communication error. A52G.
retained. ON: ............ Outputs before communication error are
retained.
1 OFF: No WDT error • Set when WDT error is detected by the self-check of
WDT error flag  Dedicated to A73.
M9073 ON:WDT error the PCPU.
OFF: Disables writing
Setting of writing to ROM • Turned ON to enable writing to the flash ROM. Dedicated to
M9073 
to flash ROM ON: Enables writing to (DIP switch 3 should be set to ON.) QCPU-A (A Mode)
ROM
OFF: PCPU ready
• Set if the motor is not running when it is checked at
PCPU ready incomplete
M9074 PC ready (M2000) on. Reset when M2000 is turned  Dedicated to A73.
complete flag ON: PCPU ready
off.
complete
Request for
OFF ON: Starts • When turned from OFF to ON, writing to the Dedicated to
M9074 writing to flash 
writing to ROM standard ROM is started. QCPU-A (A Mode)
ROM
OFF: Other than test
• Set when a test mode request is made from a
M9075 Test mode flag mode  Dedicated to A73.
peripheral device. Reset when test mode is finished.
ON: Test mode
App - 13
APPENDICES
MELSEC-Q

OFF: Failed writing to
Successful
ROM • Turns ON when writing to the standard ROM is
completion of Dedicated to
M9075 ON: Successfully successfully completed. 
writing to QCPU-A (A Mode)
completed writing (This status is stored in D9075.)
standard ROM
to ROM
OFF: External emerge-
ncy stop input is • Reset when the external emergency stop input
External
on. connected to the EMG terminal of A70SF is turned
M9076 emergency  Dedicated to A73.
ON: External emerge- on. Set when the external emergency stop input is
stop input flag
ncy stop input is turned off.
off.
OFF: Writing to ROM
Status of writing disabled • Turns ON when writing to standard ROM is enabled. Dedicated to
M9076 
to standard ROM ON: Writing to ROM (Turns ON when DIP switch and M9073 are ON.) QCPU-A (A Mode)
enabled
• Set when there is an error in the contents of manual
Manual pulse OFF: All axes normal
pulse generator axis setting. Reset if all axes are
M9077 generator axis ON: Error axis  Dedicated to A73.
normal when the manual pulse generator enable flag
setting error flag detected
is set.
• Compares the setting value at D9077 with the time
elapsed from the start of measurement
(accumulation time) at every scan. Then, performs
the following operations:
Setting value > Accumulation time:
Turns M9077 ON and clears the accumulation
Sequence time.
accumulation OFF: Time not elapsed Setting value < Accumulation time: Dedicated to
M9077 
time ON: Time elapsed Turns M9077 from ON to OFF and clears the QCPU-A (A Mode)
measurement accumulation time. When M9077 is already OFF,
clears the accumulation time.
When 1 to 255 is designated at D9077, M9077 is
turned ON at the first scan.
When the value other than 1 to 255 is designated at
D9077, the value in D9077 is reset to 0 and M9077
is always turned OFF.
• Set when test mode is not available though a test
Test mode OFF: No error mode request was made from a peripheral device.
M9078  Dedicated to A73.
request error flag ON: Error Reset if test mode becomes available by making
another test mode request.
• Turned on when the positioning data of the servo
program designated by the DSFRP instruction has
Servo program OFF: No data error
M9079 an error.  Dedicated to A73.
setting error flag ON: Data error
Turned off when the data has no error after the
DSFRP instruction is executed again.
App - 14
APPENDICES
MELSEC-Q

Turned ON/OFF according to the number of remaining
instructions (RIRD/RIWT/RISEND/RIRCV) being
executable simultaneously at one scan.
OFF:Number of remaining instructions executable
simultaneously: 1 to 10
ON: Number of remaining instructions executable
OFF: Number of simultaneously: 0
remaining By assigning M9080 as execution condition, the
instructions number of instructions above executed simultaneously
executable at one scan can be limited to 10 or less.
BUSY flag for Can be used only
simultaneously: 4: This function is available with the CPU of the
execution of CC- with AnU, A2US,
M9080 1 to 10 following S/W versions or later.
Link dedicated AnSH or QCPU-A
ON: Number of
instruction CPU Type Name Software Version (A Mode) 4
remaining
Q02CPU-A, Q02HCPU-
instructions
A, Q06HCPU-A
executable Available with all versions
A1SJHCPU, A1SHCPU,
simultaneously: 0 A2SHCPU
A2UCPU(S1), A3UCPU, S/W version Q (Manufactured
A4UCPU in July, 1999)
S/W version E (Manufactured
A2USCPU(S1)
in July, 1999)
S/W version L (Manufactured
A2USHCPU-S1
in July, 1999)
OFF: Communication
request to remo-
te terminal
Communication Usable with AnA,
modules enabled • Indication of communication enable/disable to
request to AnA, AnU, A2AS,
M9081 ON: Communication remote terminal modules connected to the 
remote terminal QCPU-A (A Mode)
request to remo- AJ71PT32-S3, A2C or A52G.
modules A2C and A52G.
te terminal
modules disabl-
ed
OFF: Final station • Turned on when the final station number of the
number agree- remote terminal modules and remote I/O modules
Final station
ment connected to the A2C or A52G disagrees with the Dedicated to A2C
M9082 number 
ON: Final station total number of stations set in the initial setting. and A52G.
disagreement
number • Turned off when the final station number agrees with
disagreement the total number of stations at STOP→RUN.
• Specify whether the following errors are to be
checked or not after the END instruction is
2 OFF: Checks enabled executed (to reduce END processing time): Unusable with An,
Error check
M9084 ON: Checks disabled • Fuse blown A2C and A3V.
• I/O unit verify error
• Battery error
BASIC program OFF: A3M-BASIC stop • Set when the A3M-BASIC is in RUN state, and reset
M9086  Dedicated to A3M
RUN flag ON: A3M-BASIC run when it is in STOP state.
OFF: A3M-BASIC • Specifies enable/disable of A3M-BASIC execution
BASIC program RUN enable when the A3MCPU is in PAUSE state.
M9087  Dedicated to A3M.
PAUSE flag ON: A3M-BASIC OFF: A3M-BASIC is executed.
disable ON: A3M-BASIC is not executed.
App - 15
APPENDICES
MELSEC-Q

• Set when an operation error detail factor is stored at Usable with AnA,
1 Operation error OFF: No error
D9091, and remains set after normal state is  A2AS, AnU and
M9091 detail flag ON: Error
restored. QCPU-A (A Mode).
Microcomputer • Set when an error occurred at execution of the Unusable with AnA,
OFF: No error
subroutine call microcomputer program package, and remains set A2AS, AnU and
M9091 ON: Error
error flag after normal state is restored. QCPU-A (A Mode).
Duplex power
OFF: Normal • Turned on when overheat of a duplex power supply
M9092 supply overheat  Dedicated to A3V.
ON: Overheat module is detected.
error
OFF: Normal
Duplex power ON: Failure or AC • Turned on when a duplex power supply module
M9093  Unusable with A3V.
supply error power supply caused failure or the AC power supply is cut down.
down
• After the head address of the required I/O module is
set to D9094, switching M9094 on allows the I/O
module to be changed in online mode. (One module
is only allowed to be changed by one setting.)
2 3 OFF: Changed • To be switched on in the program or peripheral Usable with AnN,
I/O change flag
M9094 ON: Not changed device test mode to change the module during CPU AnA and AnU.
RUN. To be switched on in peripheral device test
mode to change the module during CPU STOP.
• RUN/STOP mode must not be changed until I/O
module change is complete.
• During duplex operation of the operating CPU with a
OFF: Normal
Duplex operation stand-by CPU, verification is performed by the both
M9095 ON: Duplex operation  Dedicated to A3V.
verify error to each other. Turned on when a verify error
verify error
occurred.
A3VCPU A self- OFF: No error • Turn on when a self-check error occurred on the
M9096  Dedicated to A3V.
check error ON: Error A3VCPU A mounted next to the A3VTU.
A3VCPU B self- OFF: No error • Turn on when a self-check error occurred on the
check error ON: Error A3VCPU B mounted next to the A3VCPU A.
A3VCPU C self- OFF: No error • Turn on when a self-check error occurred on the
check error ON: Error A3VCPU C mounted next to the A3VCPU B.
A3VTU self- OFF: No error • Turned on when a self-check error occurred on the
check error ON: Error A3VTU.
Usable with AnN ,
AnA , AnU, A2AS,
OFF: No SFC program
SFC program • Turned on if the SFC program is registered, and QCPU-A (A Mode),
M9100 ON: SFC program 
registration turned off if it is not. A2C, A0J2H, AnS,
registered
AnSH, A1FX and
A52G.
Usable with AnN ,
OFF: SFC program • Should be turned on by the program if the SFC AnA , AnU, A2AS,
2 SFC program stop program is to be started. If turned off, operation QCPU-A (A Mode),

M9101 start/stop ON: SFC program output of the execution step is turned off and the A2C, A0J2H, AnS,
start SFC program is stopped. AnSH, A1FX and
A52G.
: Usable with AnN and AnA which are compatible with SFC.
For the AnN and AnA which are compatible with SFC, refer to the MELSAP-II Programming Manual.
App - 16
APPENDICES
MELSEC-Q

• Selects the starting step when the SFC program is
restarted using M9101.
ON: All execution conditions when the SFC
program stopped are cleared, and the program Usable with AnN ,
is started with the initial step of block 0. AnA , AnU, A2AS,
2 SFC program OFF: Initial start OFF: Started with the step of the block being QCPU-A (A Mode),

M9102 starting status ON: Continuous start executed when the program stopped. A2C, A0J2H, AnS,
• Once turned on, the program is latched in the system AnSH, A1FX and
and remains on even if the power is turned off. A52G.
Should be turned off by the sequence program when
turning on the power, or when starting with the initial
step of block 0.
OFF: Consecutive • Selects consecutive or step-by-step transfer of steps Usable with AnN ,
step transfer of which transfer conditions are established when all AnA , AnU, A2AS,
Consecutive step
2 disable of the transfer conditions of consecutive steps are QCPU-A (A Mode),
transfer 
M9103 ON: Consecutive established. A2C, A0J2H, AnS,
enable/disable
step transfer ON: Consecutive transfer is executed. AnSH, A1FX and
enable OFF: One step per one scan is transferred. A52G.
Usable with AnN ,
• Set when consecutive transfer is not executed with
OFF: Transfer AnA , AnU, A2AS,
Consecutive consecutive transfer enabled. Reset when transfer of
complete QCPU-A (A Mode),
M9104 transfer one step is completed. 
ON: Transfer A2C, A0J2H, AnS,
prevention flag Consecutive transfer of a step can be prevented by
incomplete AnSH, A1FX and
writing an AND condition to corresponding M9104.
A52G.
Step transfer
monitoring timer
2
start
M9108
(corresponds
to D9108)
Step transfer
monitoring timer
2
start
M9109
(corresponds
to D9109)
Usable with AnN ,
Step transfer
OFF: Monitoring timer AnA , AnU, A2AS,
monitoring timer • Turned on when the step transfer monitoring timer is
2 eset QCPU-A (A Mode),
start started. Turned off when the monitoring timer is 
M9110 ON: Monitoring timer A2C, A0J2H, AnS,
(corresponds reset.
to D9110) eset start AnSH, A1FX and
Step transfer A52G.
monitoring timer
2
start
M9111
(corresponds
to D9111)
Step transfer
monitoring timer
2
start
M9112
(corresponds
to D9112)
App - 17
APPENDICES
MELSEC-Q

Step transfer
monitoring timer
2
start Usable with AnN ,
M9113
(corresponds OFF: Monitoring timer AnA , AnU, A2AS,
to D9113) • Turned on when the step transfer monitoring timer is
reset QCPU-A (A Mode),
Step transfer started. Turned off when the monitoring timer is 
ON: Monitoring timer A2C, A0J2H, AnS,
monitoring timer reset.
2 reset start AnSH, A1FX and
start A52G.
M9114
(corresponds
to D9114)
Usable with AnN ,
AnA , AnU, A2AS,
Active step
OFF: Trace start • Set when sampling trace of all specified blocks is QCPU-A (A Mode),
M9180 sampling trace 
ON: Trace complete completed. Reset when sampling trace is started. A2C, A0J2H, AnS,
complete flag
AnSH, A1FX and
A52G.
Usable with AnN ,
OFF: Trace not AnA , AnU, A2AS,
Active step • Set when sampling trace is being executed.
executed. QCPU-A (A Mode),
M9181 sampling trace Reset when sampling trace is completed or 
ON: Trace being A2C, A0J2H, AnS,
execution flag suspended.
executed. AnSH, A1FX and
A52G.
Usable with AnN ,
• Selects sampling trace execution enable/disable.
AnA , AnU, A2AS,
Active step OFF: Trace ON: Sampling trace execution is enabled.
2 QCPU-A (A Mode),
sampling trace disable/suspend OFF: Sampling trace execution is disabled. 
M9182 A2C, A0J2H, AnS,
enable ON: Trace enable If turned off during sampling trace execution,
AnSH, A1FX and
trace is suspended.
A52G.
• Selects the operation output when block stop is
executed. Usable with AnN ,
ON: Retains the ON/OFF status of the coil being AnA , AnU, A2AS,
2 Operation output OFF: Coil output off used by using operation output of the step QCPU-A (A Mode),

M9196 at block stop ON: Coil output on being executed at block stop. A2C, A0J2H, AnS,
OFF: All coil outputs are turned off. (Operation AnSH, A1FX and
output by the SET instruction is retained A52G.
regardless of the ON/OFF status of M9196.)
I/O numbers
M9197
M9198
to be
displayed
• Switches I/O numbers in the fuse blow module
M9197 X/Y0 to 7F0
Fuse blow, I/O OFF OFF storage registers (D9100 to D9107) and I/O module Usable with AnU,
verify error X/Y800 to verify error storage registers (D9116 to D9123)  A2AS and QCPU-A
ON OFF FF0
display switching according to the combination of ON/OFF of the (A Mode).
X/Y1000 to
OFF ON 17F0 M9197 and M9198.
M9198 X/Y1800 to
ON ON 1FF0
App - 18
APPENDICES
MELSEC-Q
POINTS
(1) Contents of the M special relays are all cleared by power off, latch clear or
reset with the reset key switch. When the RUN key switch is set in the STOP
position, the contents are retained.
(2) The above the relays with numbers marked 1 remain "on" if normal status is
restored. Therefore, to turn them "off", use the following method:
(a) Method by use program
Reset execution
Insert the circuit shown at right into the command
RST M9000
program and turn on the reset
execution command contact to clear the Special function relay to be reset
special relay M.
(b) Perform forced reset by use of the test function of peripheral devices.
For the operation procedure, refer to the manuals for peripheral devices.
(c) By moving the RESET key switch on the CPU front to the RESET
position, the special relays are turned off.
(3) Special relays marked 2 above are switched on/off in the sequence program.
(4) Special relays marked 3 above are switched on/off in test mode of the
peripheral equipment.
App - 19
APPENDICES
MELSEC-Q
Appendix 2.2 Special relays for link
The link special relays are internal relays which are switched on/off by various factors
occurring during data link operation.
Their ON/OFF status will change if an error occurs during normal operation.
(1) Link special relays only valid when the host is the master station
Link Special Relay List

• Depends on whether or not the LRDP (word device read)
instruction has been received.
LRDP instruction OFF: Unreceived
M9200 • Used in the program as an interlock for the LRDP
received ON: Received
instruction.
• Use the RST instruction to reset.
• Depends on whether or not the LRDP (word device read)
instruction execution is complete.
LRDP instruction OFF: Incomplete
M9201 • Used as a condition contact for resetting M9200 and M9201
complete ON: Complete
after the LRDP instruction is complete.
• Depends on whether or not the LWTP (word device write)
instruction has been received.
LWTP instruction OFF: Unreceived
M9202 • Used in the program as an interlock for the LWTP
received ON: Received
instruction.
• Depends on whether or not the LWTP (word device write)
instruction execution is complete.
LWTP instruction OFF: Incomplete
M9203 • Used as a condition contact to reset M9202 and M9203 after
complete ON: Complete
the LWTP instruction is complete.
Link parameter error in OFF: Normal Depends on whether or not the link parameter setting of the
M9206
the host ON: Error host is valid.
Depends on whether or not the link parameter setting of the
Link parameter
OFF: Normal master station in tier two matches that of the master station in
M9207 unmatched between
ON: Unmatched tier three in a three-tier system.
master station
(Valid only for the master stations in a three-tier system.)
Link card error OFF: Normal Depends on presence or absence of the link card hardware
M9210
(master station) ON: Error error. Judged by the CPU.
OFF: Online
ON: Offline, station-to- Depends on whether the master station is online or offline or is
M9224 Link status
station test, or self- in station-to-station test or self-loopback test mode.
loopback test
OFF: Normal
M9225 Forward loop error Depends on the error condition of the forward loop line.
ON: Error
OFF: Normal
M9226 Reverse loop error Depends on the error condition of the reverse loop line.
ON: Error
OFF: Unexecuted
ON: Forward or reverse Depends on whether or not the master station is executing a
M9227 Loop test status
loop test being ex- forward or a reverse loop test.
ecuted
App - 20
APPENDICES
MELSEC-Q
Link Special Relay List (Continue)

OFF: RUN or STEP RUN
Local station operating mode Depends on whether or not a local station is in STOP or
M9232
status ON: STOP or PAUSE PAUSE mode.
mode
Local station error OFF:No error Depends on whether or not a local station has detected an
M9233
detect ON: Error detected error in another station.
Local or remote I/O
OFF:No error Depends on whether or not a local or a remote I/O station has
M9235 station parameter error
ON: Error detected detected any link parameter error in the master station
detect
Local or remote I/O Depends on whether or not a local or a remote I/O station is
OFF:Noncommunicating
M9236 station initial communicating initial data (such as parameters) with the
ON: Communicating
communicating status master station.
Local or remote I/O OFF:Normal
M9237 Depends on the error condition of a local or remote I/O station.
station error ON: Error
Local or remote I/O
OFF:Normal Depends on the error condition of the forward and reverse loop
M9238 station forward/
ON: Error lines of a local or a remote I/O station.
reverse loop error
App - 21
APPENDICES
MELSEC-Q
(2) Link special relays only valid when the host is a local station
Link Special Relay List

LRDP instruction OFF:Incomplete On indicates that the LRDP instruction is complete at the
M9204
complete ON: Complete local station.
LWTP instruction OFF:Incomplete On indicates that the LWTP instruction is complete at the
M9205
complete ON: Complete local station.
Link card error OFF:Normal Depends on presence or absence of the link card error.
M9211
(local station) ON: Error Judged by the CPU.
OFF:Online
ON: Offline, station-to- Depends on whether the local station is online or offline, or is
M9240 Link status
station test, or self- in station-to-station test or self-loopback test mode.
loopback test
OFF:Normal
M9241 Forward loop error Depends on the error condition of the forward loop line.
ON: Error
OFF:Normal
M9242 Reverse loop error Depends on the error condition of the reverse loop line.
ON: Error
OFF:Non-executed Depends on whether or not loopback is occurring at the local
M9243 Loopback execution
ON: Executed station.
OFF:Received Depends on whether or not data has been received from the
M9246 Data unreceived
ON: Unreceived master station.
OFF:Received Depends on whether or not a tier three station has received
M9247 Data unreceived
ON: Unreceived data from its master station in a three-tier system.
OFF:Received Depends on whether or not link parameters have been
M9250 Parameter unreceived
ON: Unreceived received from the master station.
OFF:Normal
M9251 Link break Depands on the data link condition at the local station.
ON: Break
OFF:Unexecuted
ON: Forward or reverse Depends on whether or not the local station is executing a
M9252 Loop test status
loop test is being forward or a reverse loop test.
executed
OFF:RUN or STEP RUN
Master station mode Depends on whether or not the master station is in STOP or
M9253
operating status ON: STOP or PAUSE PAUSE mode.
mode
OFF:RUN or STEP RUN
Operating status of mode Depends on whether or not a local station other than the host
M9254
other local stations ON: STOP or PAUSE is in STOP or PAUSE mode.
mode
Error status of other OFF:Normal Depends on whether or not a local station other than the host
M9255
local stations ON: Error is in error.
App - 22
APPENDICES
MELSEC-Q
Appendix 2.3 Special registers
Special registers are data registers of which applications have been determined inside
the PC. Therefore, do not write data to the special registers in the program (except the
ones with numbers marked 2 in the table).
Special Register List

• When fuse blown modules are detected, the lowest
number of detected units is stored in hexadecimal.
(Example: When fuses of Y50 to 6F output modules Unusable with
have blown, "50" is stored in hexadecimal) To monitor A0J2H.
Fuse blow the number by peripheral devices, perform monitor Only remote
D9000 Fuse blow
module number operation given in hexadecimal. I/O station in-
(Cleared when all contents of D9100 to D9107 are formation is
reset to 0.) valid for A2C.
• Fuse blow check is executed also to the output
modules of remote I/O stations.
• Stores the module numbers corresponding to setting
switch numbers or base slot numbers when fuse blow
occurred.
I/O Module for A0J2 Extension Base Unit

Setting Stored Base Unit Stored
Switch Data Slot No. Data
0 1 0 5
Fuse blow module Dedicated to
D9001 Fuse blow 1 2 1 6 
number A0J2H.
2 3 2 7
3 4 3 8
4 5
5 6
6 7
7 8
• If I/O modules, of which data are different from data

entered, are detected when the power is turned on, the
first I/O number of the lowest number unit among the
Unusable with
detected units is stored in hexadecimal. (Storing
A0J2H.
method is the same as that of D9000.) To monitor the
number by peripheral devices, perform monitor Only remote
I/O station in-
operation given in hexadecimal.
formation is
(Cleared when all contents of D9116 to D9123 are
valid for A2C.
I/O module I/O module verify reset to 0.)
D9002
verify error error unit number • I/O module verify check is executed also to the
modules of remote I/O terminals.
• If an I/O module, of which data is different from data
entered, is detected when the power in turned on, the
I/O number corresponding to the setting switch No. or
Dedicated to
base unit No. is stored. 
A0J2H.
(Storing method is the same as that of D9001).
• In case of remote I/O station, (module I/O number/10H)
+ 1 is stored.
App - 23
APPENDICES
MELSEC-Q
Special Register List (Continue)

The number of bits • The number of bits detected by execution of the SUM
SUM instruction Dedicated to
D9003 detected by SUM instruction are stored. in BIN code and updated every 
detection bits A0J2H.
instruction detection. execution thereafter.
• Error status of the MINI(S3) link detected on loaded
AJ71PT32(S3) is stored.
b15 to b8 b7 to b0
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Bits which correspond Bits which correspond

to faulty AJ71PT32(S3) to the signals of
are turned on. AJ71PT32(S3), shown Usable with
1 MINI link master
Error detection status below, are turned on  AnA, A2AS and
D9004 module error as the signals are AnU.
turned on.
Hardware error
(X0/X20)
MINI(S3) link error
detection (X6/X26)
MINI(S3) link
communication error
(X7/X27)
• 1 is added each time input voltage becomes 85% or

1 AC DOWN Usable with all
AC DOWN count less of rating while the CPU unit is performing
D9005 counter types of CPUs.
operation, and the value is stored in BIN code.
• Bits which correspond to CPU of which battery is low
are turned on in D9006, as shown below.
Indicates the CPU B15 B3 B2 B1 B0
0 0 Dedicated to
D9006 Battery low module of which 
A3V.
battery voltage is low. CPU A
0: Normal CPU B
1: Battery low CPU C
1 Shelf-diagnostic Self-diagnostic • When error is found as a result of self-diagnosis, error Usable with all
D9008 error error number number is stored in BIN code. types of CPUs.
• When one of F0 to 255 is turned on by OUT F or
SET F , the F number, which has been detected
earliest among the F numbers which have turned on, is Unusable with
stored in BIN code. A3, A3N, A3A,
• D9009 can be cleared by RST F or LEDR instruc- A73 and A3N
tion. If another F number has been detected, the board.
clearing of D9009 causes the next number to be stored
F number at which in D9009.
Annunciator
D9009 external failure • When one of F0 to 255 is turned on by OUT F or
detection
has occurred SET F , the F number, which has been detected
earliest among the F numbers which have turned on, is
stored in BIN code. Usable with A3,
• D9009 can be cleared by executing RST F or LEDR  A3N, A3A, A73
instruction or moving INDICATOR RESET switch on and A3N board.
CPU front to ON position. If another F number has
been detected, the clearing of D9009 causes the nest
number to be stored in D9009.
App - 24
APPENDICES
MELSEC-Q

• When operation error has occurred during execution of
Step number at application instruction, the step number, at which the
Unusable with
D9010 Error step which operation error has occurred, is stored in BIN code. Thereafter,
A3H and A3M.
error has occurred each time operation error occurs, the contents of
D9010 are renewed.
• When operation error has occurred during execution of
application instruction, the step number, at which the
Step number at
1 error has occurred, is stored in BIN code. Since storage Usable with all
Error step which operation
D9011 into D9011 is made when M9011 changes from off to types of CPUs.
error has occurred
on, the contents of D9010 cannot be renewed unless
M9011 is cleared by user program.
• The I/O control mode set is returned in any of the
following numbers: Unusable with
I/O control mode
D9014 I/O control mode 0. Both input and output in direct mode An, A3H and
number
1. Input in refresh mode, output in direct mode A3M.
3. Both input and output in refresh mode
• The operation states of CPU as shown below are
stored in D9015.
B15.....B12 B11......B8 B7....... B4 B3 ....... B0
CPU key switch: Remains the same in

remote RUN/STOP mode.
0 RUN
1 STOP
2 PAUSE
3 STEP RUN
CPU operating Operating states Usable with all
D9015
states of CPU Remote RUN/STOP by parameter setting types of CPUs.
0 RUN
1 STOP
2 PAUSE
Status in program
0 Except below
1 STOP instruction execution
Remote RUN/STOP by computer

0 RUN
1 STOP
2 PAUSE
When the CPU is in RUN mode and M9040 is off, the
CPU remains in RUN mode if changed to PAUSE
mode.
App - 25
APPENDICES
MELSEC-Q

0: ROM
• Indicates the setting of memory select chip. One value Usable with A1
ROM/RAM setting 1: RAM 
of 0 to 2 is stored in BIN code. and A1N.
2: E2PROM
0: Main program
• Indicates which sequence program is run presently.
(ROM)
One value of 0 to 2 is stored in BIN code. Unusable with
1: Main program
"2" is not stored when AnS, AnSH, A1FX, A0J2H, A2C, A1 and A1N
(RAM)
A2, A2N, A2A, A2AS and A2U is used.
2: Subprogram (RAM)
0: Main program • Indicates which sequence program is run presently.
(ROM) One value of 0 to B is stored in BIN code.
1: Main program
(RAM)
2: Subprogram 1
(RAM)
3: Subprogram 2
(RAM)
D9016
4: Subprogram 3
Program number (RAM)
5: Subprogram 1
(ROM) Dedicated to

6: Subprogram 2 AnU.
(ROM)
7: Subprogram 3
(ROM)
8: Main program
(E2PROM)
9: Subprogram
(E2PROM)
A: Subprogram
(E2PROM)
B: Subprogram
(E2PROM)
• If scan time is smaller than the content of D9017, the
Minimum scan time value is newly stored at each END. Namely, the Usable with all
D9017 Scan time
(per 10 ms) minimum value of scan time is stored into D9017 in BIN types of CPUs.
code.
Scan time • Scan time is stored in BIN code at each END and Usable with all
D9018 Scan time
(per 10 ms) always rewritten. types of CPUs.
• If scan time is larger than the content of D9019, the
Maximum scan time value is newly stored at each END. Namely, the Usable with all
D9019 Scan time
(per 10 ms) maximum value of scan time is stored into D9019 in types of CPUs.
BIN code.
• Sets the interval between consecutive program starts in
Constant scan time multiples of 10 ms.
2 Unusable with
Constant scan (Set by user in 0: No setting
D9020 An.
10 ms increments) 1 to 200: Set. Program is executed at intervals of (set
value) 10 ms.
Usable with
AnA, A2AS,
Scan time • Scan time is stored and updated in BIN code after
D9021 Scan time  AnU and
(1 msec unit) every END.
QCPU-A
(A Mode).
• When the PC CPU starts running, it starts counting 1 Usable with
every second. AnA, A2AS,
D9022 1 second counter Counts 1 every second. • It starts counting up from 0 to 32767, then down to  AnU and
–32768 and then again up to 0. Counting repeats this QCPU-A
routine. (A Mode).
App - 26
APPENDICES
MELSEC-Q

• Stores the year (2 lower digits) and month in BCD. Unusable with
B15. . . . .B12 B11. . . . . . B8 B7 . . . . . . . B4 B3 . . . . . . . . B0 Example:
2 An, A3H, A3M,
Clock data (Year, month) 1987,July
D9025 H8707 A3V, A2C and
Year Month A0J2H.
• Stores the day and hour in BCD. Unusable with
B15. . . . .B12 B11. . . . . . B8 B7. . . . . . . B4 B3 . . . . . . . . B0 Example:
2 An, A3H, A3M,
Clock data (Day, hour) 31th,10
D9026 o'clock A3V, A2C and
Day Hour H3110 A0J2H.
• Stores the Minute and second in BCD. Unusable with
B15. . . . . B12 B11 . . . . . . B8 B7 . . . . . . . B4 B3 . . . . . . . . B0 Example:
2 An, A3H, A3M,
Clock data (Minute, second) 35 minutes,
D9027 48 seconds A3V, A2C and
Minute Second H3548 A0J2H.
• Stores the day of the week in BCD.

B15 . . . . B12 B11 . . . . . . B8 B7 . . . . . . . B4 B3. . . . . . . . B0 Example:
Friday
H0005
Unusable with
Day of the week
2 0 Sunday An, A3H, A3M,
Clock data ( , day of the week) 0 must be set.
D9028 1 Monday A3V, A2C and
2 Tuesday
A0J2H.
3 Wednesday
4 Thursday
5 Friday
6 Saturday
D9021 • Sets the head station number of remote terminal

D9022 modules connected to A2C and A52G. Setting is not
necessarily in the order of station numbers.
D9023
A2CCPUC24: 1 to 57
D9024
Other CPUs: 1 to 61
D9025 • Data configuration
D9026 D9021 Remote terminal module No.1 area
D9027 Remote terminal D9022 Remote terminal module No.2 area
1 to 61
D9028 parameter setting
............
D9029
D9030
D9031
D9032
D9033 Remote terminal module No.13 area
D9033 D9034 Remote terminal module No.14 area
D9034 Usable with

• Sets attribute of each remote terminal module A2C and A52G.
connected to A2C and A52G with 0 or 1 at each bit.
0: Conforms to the MINI standard protocol or remote
terminal unit.
1: No-protocol mode of AJ35PTF-R2
• Data configuration
b15b14b13b12b11b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
0: MINI standard
Attribute of remote D9035 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1
D9035 protocol
terminal module
1: No protocol
Remote terminal No.1

........

App - 27
APPENDICES
MELSEC-Q

Usable with
AnA, A2AS,
Extension file • Stores the block No. of the extension file register being
D9035 Use block No.  AnU and
register used in BCD code.
QCPU-A
(A Mode)
• Sets the total number of stations (1 to 64) of I/O
Total number of Usable with
D9036 1 to 64 modules and remote terminal modules which are 
stations A2C and A52G.
connected to an A2C or A52G.
• Designate the device number for the extension file
register for direct read and write in 2 words at D9036
and D9037 in BIN data.
D9036
Use consecutive numbers beginning with R0 of block
The devise number No. 1 to designate device numbers. Usable with
For designation
used for getting direct Extension file register AnA, A2AS,
extension file
access to each device 0 Block No.1  AnU and
register device to
for extension file 16383 area QCPU-A
numbers
register 16384 Block No.2 (A Mode).
D9037 D9037,D9036 to area
Device No.(BIN data)
to
• Sets priority of ERROR LEDs which illuminate (or

Usable with
flicker) to indicate errors with error code numbers.
D9038 Priority 1 to 4 A2C, AnS,
• Configuration of the priority setting areas is as shown
AnSH, A1FX,
below.
LED indication A0J2H, A52G
b15 . . . . . . . b12 b11. . . . . . . . . b8 b7 . . . . . . . . . . b4 b3 . . . . . . . . . . . b0 
priority D9038 Priority 4 Priority 3 Priority 2 Priority 1 AnA, A2AS,
D9039 Priority 7 Priority 6 Priority 5 AnU and
D9039 Priority 5 to 7 QCPU-A
• For details, refer to the applicable CPUs User’s Manual
(A Mode).
and the ACPU (Fundamentals) Programming manual.
• Turned on/off with a peripheral device.
Step or time during At scanning.............. 0 Usable with A1
D9044 Sampling trace
sampling trace At time ..................... Time (10 msec unit) and A1N
Stores the value in BIN code.
• Stores the block number of the expansion file register
Expansion file register
which is used as the work area for the execution of a
SFC program block number to be
SFC program in a binary value.
D9049 execution work used as the work area
• Stores "0" if an empty area of 16K bytes or smaller,
area for the execution of a Usable with
which cannot be expansion file register No. 1, is used
SFC program. AnN , AnA ,
or if M9100 is OFF.
AnU, A2AS,
• Stores code numbers of errors occurred in the SFC
QCPU-A
program in BIN code. 
(A Mode), A2C,
0: No error
A0J2H, AnS,
Code number of error 80: SFC program parameter error
SFC program AnSH, A1FX
D9050 occurred in the SFC 81: SFC code error
error code and A52G.
program 82: Number of steps of simultaneous execution
exceeded
83: Block start error
84: SFC program operation error
Usable with
AnN , AnA ,
• Stores the block number in which an error occurred in AnU, A2AS,
Block number in which the SFC program in BIN code. QCPU-A
D9051 Error block 
an error occurred. In the case of error 83 the starting block number is (A Mode), A2C,
stored. A0J2H, AnS,
AnSH, A1FX
and A52G.
For the AnN and AnA which are compatible with SFC, refer to the MELSAP-ll Programming Manual.
App - 28
APPENDICES
MELSEC-Q

Usable with
• Stores the step number in which error 84 occurred in AnN , AnA ,
the SFC program in BIN code. AnU, A2AS,
Step number in which QCPU-A
D9052 Error step Stores "0" when errors 80, 81 and 82 occurred. 
an error occurred. (A Mode), A2C,
Stored the block starting step number when error 83 A0J2H, AnS,
occurred. AnSH, A1FX
and A52G.
Usable with
AnN , AnA ,
AnU, A2AS,
Transfer condition • Stores the transfer condition number in which error 84
QCPU-A
D9053 Error transfer number in which an occurred in the SFC program in BIN code. 
(A Mode), A2C,
error occurred. Stored "0" when errors 80, 81, 82 and 83 occurred.
A0J2H, AnS,
AnSH, A1FX
and A52G.
Usable with
AnN , AnA ,
AnU, A2AS,
Sequence step number • Stores the sequence step number of transfer condition
Error sequence QCPU-A
D9054 in which an error and operation output in which error 84 occurred in the 
step (A Mode), A2C,
occurred. SFC program in BIN code.
A0J2H, AnS,
AnSH, A1FX
and A52G.
• Stores the step number when status latch is executed.
• Stores the step number in a binary value if status latch
Usable with
is executed in a main sequence program.
Status latch AnA, A2AS,
Status latch execution • Stores the block number and the step number if status
D9055 execution step  AnU and
step number latch is executed in a SFC program.
number QCPU-A
Block No. Step No.
(BIN) (BIN) (A Mode).
Higher 8 bits Lower 8 bits
Stores the software version of the CPU module's internal

system in ASCII codes.
Example: Stores "41H" for version A.
Note) The software version of the internal system may
be different from the version marked on the
housing.
5: This function is available with the CPU of the
following S/W versions or later.
CPU Type Name Software Version Can be used

Software version of A2ACPU(P21/R21), S/W version W only with AnU,
D9060 Software version
internal system A2ACPU-S1(P21/R21) (Manufactured in July, 1998) A2US, or AnSH
S/W version X 5
A3ACPU(P21/R21)
(Manufactured in July, 1998)
A2UCPU(S1), A3UCPU, S/W version H
A4UCPU (Manufactured in July, 1998)
A1SJHCPU, A1SHCPU, S/W version H
A2SHCPU (Manufactured in May, 1998)
S/W version Y
A2USCPU(S1)
S/W version E
A2USHCPU-S1
App - 29
APPENDICES
MELSEC-Q

• Stores error code when M9061 is turned on
(communication with I/O modules or remote terminal
modules fails).
0: Normal
Communication • 1 ........ Total number of stations of I/O modules or Usable with
D9061 1: Initial data error 
error code remote terminal modules or number of retries is A2C and A52G.
2: Line error
not normal. Initial program contains an error.
• 2 ........ Cable breakage or power supply of I/O modules
or remote terminal modules is turned off.
Stores the bit pattern of the base module in abnormal
condition.
When basic base module is abnormal: Bit 0 turns ON.
When 1st expansion base module is abnormal: Bit 1
Stores the bit pattern of Dedicated to
Abnormal base turns ON.
D9068 the abnormal base When 2nd expansion base module is abnormal: Bit 2  QCPU-A
module
module turns ON. (A Mode).
:
:
When 7th expansion base module is abnormal: Bit 7
turns ON.
• In the loopback test mode of individual AJ71C24
PC communica- Data check by Usable with all
D9072 (S3/S6/S8), the AJ71C24(S3/S6/S8) executes data
tion check AJ71C24 (S3/S6/S8) types of CPUs.
write/read and communication check.
Stores the status of writing to the standard ROM.
0: Writing enabled
F1H: During RAM operation
Stores the status of Dedicated to
Result of writing to F2H: Writing to standard ROM disabled
D9075 writing to the standard  QCPU-A
standard ROM F3H: Failed to erase
ROM (A Mode).
F4H: Failed to write
FEH: Checking erasing
FFH: During writing
Stores the status of writing (enabled/disabled) to the
Stores the status of standard ROM.
Dedicated to
Status of writing to writing Statuses of DIP switch 3 and M9073
D9076  QCPU-A
standard ROM (enabled/disabled) to 0: SW3 is OFF, M9073 is OFF/ON
(A Mode).
the standard ROM 1: SW3 is ON, M9073 is OFF
2: SW3 is ON, M9073 is ON
• Stores the accumulation time used by M9077.
Sequence Dedicated to
Accumulation time Setting range: 1 to 255ms (Default: 5ms)
D9077 accumulation time  QCPU-A
setting When the value other than 1 to 255 ms is designated,
measurement (A Mode).
the value in D9077 is reset to 0.
App - 30
APPENDICES
MELSEC-Q

Stores the number of remaining instructions
(RIRD/RIWT/RISEND/RIRCV) being executable
simultaneously at one scan.
(With QCUP-A or AnUCPU)
Number of remaining instructions being executable =
10 – Number of instructions executed simultaneously
(With AnSHCPU)
Number of remaining instructions being executable =
64 – Number of instructions executed simultaneously
Number of Stores the number of Can be used
6: This function is available with the CPU of the only with AnU,
executable CC- remaining CC-Link
D9080 following S/W versions or later. A2US, QCPU-A
Link dedicated dedicated instructions (A Mode) or
instructions being executable CPU Type Name Software Version AnSH 6
Q02CPU-A, Q02HCPU-A,
Q06HCPU-A
Available with all versions
A1SJHCPU, A1SHCPU,
A2SHCPU
A2UCPU(S1), A3UCPU, S/W version Q
A4UCPU (Manufactured in July, 1999)
S/W version E
A2USCPU(S1)
S/W version L
A2USHCPU-S1
Number of • Stores the number of communication requests Usable with

communication executed to remote terminal modules connected to AnA, A2AS,
D9081 requests executed 0 to 32 AJ71PT32(S3), A2C and A52G.  QCPU-A
to remote terminal • Subtracts 1 at completion of communication with a (A Mode), AnU,
A2C and A52G.
modules remote terminal module.
Final connected Final connected station • Stores the final station number of I/O modules and Usable with
D9082  A2C and A52G.
station number number remote terminal modules connected to A2C and A52G.
• Sets the time check time of the data link instructions
(ZNRD, ZNWR) for the MELSECNET II. Usable with
• Setting range: 1 s to 65535 s (1 to 65535) AnU, A2AS and
D9085 Time check time 1 s to 65535 s • Setting unit: 1 s  QCPU-A
• Default value: 10 s (If 0 has been set, default 10 s is (A Mode).
applied)
Microcomputer Usable with
Depends on the micro- AnA, A2AS,
subroutine input • For details, refer to the manual of each microcomputer
D9090 computer program AnU and
data area head program package. QCPU-A
package to be used.
device number (A Mode).
Unusable with
AnA, A2AS,
Instruction error detail
Instruction error • Stores the detail code of cause of an instruction error.  AnU and
number QCPU-A
(A Mode).
Unusable with
Microcomputer Depends on the micro- AnA, A2AS,
• For details, refer to the manual of each microcomputer
D9091 subroutine call computer program AnU and
program package. QCPU-A
error code package to be used.
(A Mode).
Unusable with
SFC program Detail error number of AnA, A2AS,
• Stores the detail error number of the error occurred in a
detail error the error which occurr- AnU and
SFC program in a binary value. QCPU-A
number ed in a SFC program
(A Mode).
Usable with
• Stores upper 2 digits of the head I/O address of I/O AnN, A3V, AnA,
Changed I/O
2 3 Changed I/O module modules to be loaded or unloaded during online mode A73, A2AS,
module head  AnU and
D9094 head address in BIN code.
address QCPU-A
Example) Input module X2F0 H2F
(A Mode).
App - 31
APPENDICES
MELSEC-Q

• Monitors operation state of the A3VTS system and the
A3VCPU.
B15 B12 B8 B4 B0
D9095
CPU A CPU B CPU C

System operation state
Operation state of
the A3VTS Stores operation with 4 Dedicated to
D9095 Data(H) Operation state Data(H) Operation state

system and hexadecimal digits. A RUN 0 RUN A3V.
A3VCPU B STEP-RUN 1 STAND-BY
C PAUSE 2 STEP-RUN
D STOP 3 PAUSE
E ERROR 4 STOP
5 WAIT
6 ERROR
NO RIGHT OF
7 OPERATION
• Error code of self-check error on CPU A is stored in

A3VCPU A Dedicated to
D9096 Self-check error code BIN code. 
Self-check error A3V.
• Cleared when D9008 of CPU A is cleared.
• Error code of self-check error on CPU B is stored in
A3VCPU B Dedicated to
D9097 Self-check error code BIN code. 
Self-check error A3V.
• Cleared when D9008 of CPU B is cleared.
• Error code of self-check error on CPU C is stored in Dedicated to
A3VCPU C
D9098 Self-check error code BIN code.  A3V.
Self-check error
• Cleared when D9008 of CPU C is cleared.
A3VTU • Error code of self-check error on A3VTU is stored in Dedicated to
D9099 Self-check error code 
Self-check error BIN code. A3V.
1 • Output module numbers (in units of 16 points), of which
D9100 fuses have blown, are entered in bit pattern. (Preset
1 output unit numbers when parameter setting has been
D9101 performed.)
1 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
D9102 1 0 0 0 (Y80)
1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
D9100 0 0 0 (YC0) Usable with all
1
1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Bit pattern in units of 16 D9101 1 0 0 0 0 (Y1A) types of CPUs
D9103 Fuse blown
(Y1F0)
1 O Only remote
1
module
points of fuse blow D9107 0 0 0 0 BC
Y7 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
Y7 0 0 0
30 I/O station in-
D9104 modules
formation is
1 Indicates fuse blow. valid for A2C.
D9105
• Fuse blow check is executed also to the output module
1
of remote I/O station.
D9106
(If normal status is restored, clear is not performed.
1 Therefore, it is required to perform clear by user
D9107 program.)
App - 32
APPENDICES
MELSEC-Q

• Stores the output module number of the fuses have
blown in the bit pattern.
b15 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
D9100 0 0
Indicates the module

0 is fixed. for setting switch 0.
for setting switch 1.
1 Fuse blow module bit Dedicated to
Fuse blow module for setting switch 2.
Indicates the module 
D9100 pattern for setting switch 3. A0J2H.
Indicates the module for setting
switch 4 or the module for
extension base unit slot 0.
Indicates the module for setting switch 7 or
the module for extension base unit slot 3.
2 • Sets value for the step transfer monitoring timer and the
D9108 number of F which turns on when the monitoring timer
2 timed out.
D9109 b15 to b8 b7 to b0 Usable with
2 AnN , AnA ,
D9110 AnU, A2AS,
Step transfer Timer setting value and
2 Timer setting QCPU-A
monitoring timer the F number at time (1 to 255 sec 
D9111 (A Mode), A2C,
setting out in seconds)
2 F number setting A0J2H, AnS,
D9112 AnSH, A1FX
(By turning on any of M9108 to M9114, the monitoring
2 and A52G
timer starts. If the transfer condition following a step
D9113
2 which corresponds to the timer is not established within
D9114 set time, set annunciator (F) is tuned on.
1 • When I/O modules, of which data are different from
D9116 those entered at power-on, have been detected, the I/O
1 unit numbers (in units of 16 points) are entered in bit
D9117 pattern. (Preset I/O unit numbers when parameter
1 setting has been performed.)
D9118 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
1 Usable with all
1 D9116 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 XY
Bit pattern in units of 16 1
0
types of CPUs
D9119 I/O module verify D9117 0 0 0 0 0 0 XY 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
points of verify error
180
Only remote
1 error 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
D9123 0 7E0
XY I/O station in-
D9120 units
formation is
1 Indicates I/O module verify error. valid for A2C.
D9121
• I/O module verify check is executed also to remote I/O
1
station modules.
D9122
(If normal status is restored, clear is not performed.
1 Therefore, it is required to perform clear by user
D9123 program.)
• When one of F0 to 255 (F0 to 2047 for AuA and AnU) is
turned on by SET F 1 is added to the contents of
D9124. When RST F or LEDR instruction is
executed, 1 is subtracted from the contents of D9124.
Annunciator Annunciator detection (If the INDICATOR RESET switch is provided to the Usable with all
D9124
detection quantity quantity CPU, pressing the switch can execute the same types of CPUs.
processing.)
• Quantity, which has been turned on by SET F is
stored into D9124 in BIN code. The value of D9124 is
maximum 8.
App - 33
APPENDICES
MELSEC-Q

• When one of F0 to 255 (F0 to 2047 for AuA and AnU) is
turned on by SET F , F number, which has turned on,
D9125
is entered into D9125 to D9132 in due order in BIN
code.
• F number, which has been turned off by RST F , is
D9126 erased from D9125 to D9132, and the contents of data
registers succeeding the data register, where the
erased F number was stored, are shifted to the
preceding data registers.
D9127 • By executing LEDR instruction, the contents of D9125
to D9132 are shifted upward by one. (For A3N,
A3HCPU, it can be performed by use of INDICATOR
RESET switch on front of CPU module.)
D9128
• When there are 8 annunciator detections, the 9th one is
Annunciator Annunciator detection Usable with all
not stored into D9125 to 9132 even if detected.
detection number number SET SET SET RST SET SET SET SET SET SET SET types of CPUs
F50 F25 F99 F25 F15 F70 F65 F38 F110 F151 F210 LEDR
D9129 D9009 0 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 99
D9124 0 1 2 3 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 8 8
D9125 0 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 99
D9130
D9126 0 0 25 25 99 99 99 99 99 99 99 99 15
D9127 0 0 0 99 0 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 70
D9128 0 0 0 0 0 0 70 70 70 70 70 70 65
D9131
D9129 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 65 65 65 65 65 38
D9130 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 38 38 38 38 110
D9131 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 110 110 110 151

D9132
D9132 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 151 151 210
• Stores information of I/O modules and remote terminal

D9133
modules connected to the A2C and A52G
corresponding to station number.
D9134
• Information of I/O modules and remote terminal
00: No I/O module or modules is for input, output and remote terminal module
D9135
remote terminal identification and expressed as 2-bit data.
module or initial 00: No I/O module or remote terminal module or initial
D9136 communication is impossible.
communication
Remote terminal 01: Input module or remote terminal module Usable with
impossible
D9137 card information 10: Output module A2C and A52G
01: Input module or
remote terminal • Data configuration
D9138 b15 b14b13 b12b11 b10b9 b8b7 b6b5 b4b3 b2b1 b0
module Station Station Station Station Station Station Station Station
D9133 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
10: Output module Station Station Station Station Station Station Station Station
D9139 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
Station Station Station Station Station Station Station Station
24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17
Station Station Station Station Station Station Station Station
56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49
D9140 Station Station Station Station Station Station Station Station
D9140 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57
App - 34
APPENDICES
MELSEC-Q

D9141 • Stores the number of retries executed to I/O modules or
D9142 remote terminal modules which caused communication
D9143 error.
D9144 (Retry processing is executed the number of times set
D9145 at D9174.)
D9146 • Data becomes 0 when communication is restored to
normal.
D9147
• Station number setting of I/O modules and remote
D9148
terminal modules is as shown below.
D9149
D9150
b15 to b8 b7 to b0
D9151
D9141 Station 2 Station 1
D9152
D9153
D9154
D9155
D9156 Number of times D9171 Station 62 Station 61 Usable with
Number of retries 
D9157 of retry execution D9172 Station 64 Station 63 A2C and A52G.
D9158
D9159 • Retry counter uses 8 bits for one station.
D9160
b(n+7) b(n+6) b(n+5) b(n+4) b(n+3) b(n+2) b(n+1) b(n+0)
D9161
D9162 0/1
D9163
D9164 Number of retries
0: Normal
D9165
1: Station error
D9166
D9167
"n" is determined by station number of I/O module or
D9168 remote terminal module.
D9169 Odd number stations: b0 to b7 (n = 0)
D9170 Even number stations: b8 to b15 (n = 8)
D9171
D9172
App - 35
APPENDICES
MELSEC-Q

Mode setting
0 Auto- • When an I/O module or a remote
matic terminal module caused communication
online error, the station is placed offline.
• Communication with normal stations is
return
continued.
enabled
• When a faulty station returned to normal,
it is placed online.
1 Auto- • When an I/O module or a remote
0: Automatic online matic terminal module caused communication
return enabled online error, the station is placed offline.
• Communication with normal stations is
1: Automatic online return
continued. Usable with
D9173 Mode setting return disabled disabled 
• Though a faulty station returned to A2C and A52G.
2: Transmission stop
normal, communication is not restored
at online error unless the station module is restarted.
3: Line check • When an I/O module or a remote
2 Trans-
mission terminal module caused communication
stop at error, communication with all stations is
online stopped.
• Though a faulty station returned to
error
normal, communication is not restored
unless the station module is restarted.
3 Line • Checks hardware and connecting cables
check of I/O modules and remote terminal
modules.
• Sets the number of retries executed to I/O modules and
remote terminal modules which caused communication
error.
• Set for 5 times at power on.
Setting of the Usable with
D9174 Number of retries • Set range: 0 to 32 
number of retries A2C and A52G.
• If communication with an I/O module or a remote
terminal module is not restored to normal after set
number of retries, such module is regarded as a faulty
station.
• Stores the number of retries executed at line error (time
out).
Line error Usable with
D9175 Number of retries • Data becomes 0 when line is restored to normal and 
retry counter A2C and A52G.
communication with I/O modules and remote terminal
modules is resumed.
D9180 • Stores error code of a faulty remote terminal module
D9181 when M9060 is turned on.
• The error code storage areas for each remote terminal
D9182
module are as shown below.
D9183 D9180 Remote terminal module No.1
Remote
D9184 D9181 Remote terminal module No.2 terminal
module
D9185 D9182 Remote terminal module No.3 numbers
D9186 Remote terminal from 1 to 14
...
Usable with
module error are set with 
D9187 D9192 Remote terminal module No.13 D9020 to A2C and A52G.
number
D9188 D9193 Remote terminal module No.14
D9034.
D9189
• Error code is cleared in the following cases.
D9190 When the RUN key switch is moved from STOP to
D9191 RUN.
D9192 (D9180 to D9183 are all cleared.)
When Yn4 of each remote terminal is set from OFF to
D9193 ON.
App - 36
APPENDICES
MELSEC-Q

Limit switch output • Stores output state of limit switch function. Dedicated to
D9180 state torage areas 
for axes 1 and 2 A73.
b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
Limit switch output D9180 Y0F Y0E Y0D Y0C Y0B Y0A Y09 Y08 Y07 Y06 Y05 Y04 Y03 Y02 Y01 Y00
state storage "1" is stored in Dedicated to
D9181 areas for axes 3
Axis 2 Axis 1
the bit which

A73.
and 4 Bit pattern of limit D9181 Y1F Y1E Y1D Y1C Y1B Y1A Y19 Y18 Y17 Y16 Y15 Y14 Y13 Y12 Y11 Y10 corresponds to
output (Y) which
Limit switch output switch function Axis 4 Axis 3 is turned on. "0"
state storage output state is stored when Dedicated to
D9182 Y2F Y2E Y2D Y2C Y2B Y2A Y29 Y28 Y27 Y26 Y25 Y24 Y23 Y22 Y21 Y20
output state is 
A73.
turned off.
and 6 Axis 6 Axis 5
Limit switch output D9183 Y3F Y3E Y3D Y3C Y3B Y3A Y39 Y38 Y37 Y36 Y35 Y34 Y33 Y32 Y31 Y30
state storage Dedicated to
Axis 8 Axis 7 
A73.
and 8
• Stores error codes occurred at the PCPU in BIN code.
0: Normal
1: A73CPU hardware error
Cause of 2: PCPU error Dedicated to
D9184 PCPU error code 
PCPU error 10: A70AF error A73.
11: A70MDF error
12: A70MDF error
13: AY42 error
• Servo amplifier connection state is checked and the
result is stored in the bit which corresponds to each
axis number.
Connection state is continuously checked. Axes which
changed from disconnected state to connected state
Bit pattern of are regarded as connected. But, axes which changed
Servo amplifier Dedicated to
D9185 servo amplifier from connected state to disconnected state are still 
connection data A73.
connection state regarded as connected.
b15 to b8 b7 to b0
For For For For For For For For
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 axis axis axis axis axis axis axis axis
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
All 0 Connected: 1
Disconnected: 0
• Stores error code when the manual pulse generator

axis setting error flag (M9077) is set in the bit each
corresponds to each axis number.
b15 to b8 b7 to b0
For For For For For For For For For For For
axis axis axis axis axis axis axis axis 0 0 0 0 0
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 P3 P2 P1
"1" is stored in the bit (Not used) "1" is stored in

Manual pulse which corresponds to the the bit which
Manual pulse generator axis number which corresponds to Dedicated to
D9187 generator axis caused 1 pulse input the manual 
axis setting error code magnification setting pulse generator
A73.
setting error
error. number which
0: Normal caused manual
1: Input magnification is pulse generator
out of the range from axis setting
1 to 100. error.
0: Normal
1: Axis setting
is out of the
range from
1 to 8.
App - 37
APPENDICES
MELSEC-Q

• Stores axis number in the bit which corresponds to the
axis which was running when a test mode request was
Starting axis given and test mode request error occurred.
number at test b15 to b8 b7 to b0 Dedicated to
D9188 Starting axis number For For For For For For For For 
mode request 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 axis axis axis axis axis axis axis axis A73.
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
error
(Not used) "1" is stored when running.
"0" is stored when not running.
Error program • Stores error servo program number (0 to 4095) when Dedicated to
D9189 Error program number 
number the servo program setting error flag (M9079) is set. A73.
• Stores error code which corresponds to the error
Data setting Dedicated to
D9190 Data setting error setting item when the servo program setting error flag 
error number A73.
(M9079) is set.
• Stores type of connected servo amplifier in the bit which
corresponds to each axis number.
0: MR-SB is connected or not connected.
Bit pattern of the 1: General-purpose servo amplifier is connected.
Servo amplifier axis connected to a b15 to b8 b7 to b0 Dedicated to
D9191 For For For For For For For For

type general-purpose 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 axis axis axis axis axis axis axis axis
A73.
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
servo amplifier
All 0 Type of servo amplifier
set at each axis is stored
with "0" or "1".
• Bit which corresponds to faulty I/O module or remote

D9196 terminal module is set (1).
(Bit which corresponds to a faulty station is set when
normal communication cannot be restored after
executing the number of retries set at D9174.)
D9197
• If automatic online return is enabled, bit which
Faulty station Bit pattern of the faulty corresponds to a faulty station is reset (0) when the Usable with
station is restored to normal. 
detection station A2C and A52G.
D9198 • Data configuration
Address b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
Stasion Stasion Stasion Stasion Stasion Stasion Stasion Stasion Stasion Stasion Stasion Stasion Stasion Stasion Stasion Stasion
D9196 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
D9197 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17
D9198 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33
D9199 D9199
64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49
1: Error
0: Normal
App - 38
APPENDICES
MELSEC-Q
POINTS
(1) Special registers are cleared when the PC is switched off or the RESET switch
is set to LATCH CLEAR or RESET. Data remains unchanged when the RUN
key switch is set to STOP.
(2) Special registers marked 1 above are latched and their data will remain
unchanged after normal status is restored.
(a) Method by user program Clear execution
command
Insert the circuit shown at right into
RST D9005
the program and turn on the clear
Special function register to be cleared
execution command contact to clear
the contents of register.
(b) Method by peripheral equipment
Set the register to "0" by changing the present value by the test function
of peripheral equipment or set to "0" by forced reset. For the operation
procedure, refer to the Instruction Manual for peripheral equipment.
(c) By moving the RESET key switch at the CPU front to the RESET
position, the special register is set to "0".
(3) Data is written to special registers marked 2 above in the sequence program.
(4) Data is written to special registers marked 3 above in test mode of the
peripheral equipment.
App - 39
APPENDICES
MELSEC-Q
Appendix 2.4 Special registers for link
The link special register stores the result of any error, etc. which may occur during data
communication as a numeric value.
By monitoring the link special register, any station number with an error or fault
diagnosis can be read.
These special registers are applicable to all types of CPUs except the A3V.
For description of the special registers for link for the A3V, refer to the A3VTS Data
Link System User’s Manual.
(1) Link special registers only valid when the host station is the master
station
Link special Register
0: Normal Stores the execution result of the LRDP (word device read) instruction
2: LRDP instruction • LRDP instruction setting fault: Faulty setting of the LRDP
setting fault instruction constant, source,
LRDP processing 3: Corresponding station and/or destination
D9200 • Corresponding station error: One of the stations is not
result error
communicating.
4: LRDP cannot be
• LRDP cannot be executed in the The specified station is a
executed in the corresponding station: remote I/O station.
corresponding station
0: Normal Stores the execution result of the LWTP (word device write)
2: LWTP instruction instruction.
setting fault • LWTP instruction setting fault: Faulty setting of the LWTP
LWTP processing 3: Corresponding station instruction constant, source,
D9201 and/or destination.
result error
• Corresponding station error: One of the stations is not
4: LWTP cannot be
communicating.
executed in the • LWTP cannot be executed in the The specified station is a remote
corresponding station corresponding station: I/O station.
Stores the present path status of the data link.
• Data link in forward loop
Master
station
Station 1 Station 2 Station n
0: Data link in forward

loop
1: Data link in reverse Forward loop Reverse loop
loop • Data link in reverse loop
2: Loopback in Master
station
D9204 forward/reverse Station 1 Station 2 Station n
Link status
(Continue) direction
3: Loopback in forward
direction
4: Loopback in reverse Forward loop Reverse loop
direction • Loopback in forward/reverse loops
5: Data link impossible Master
station
Station 1 Station 2 Station 3 Station n
Forward loopback Reverse loopback
App - 40
APPENDICES
MELSEC-Q
Link Special Register List (Continue)

• Loopback in forward loop only
Master
station
Forward loopback
D9204 Link status
• Loopback in reverse loop only
Master
station
Reverse loopback
Stores the local or remote I/O station number at which loopback is

being executed.
Loopback executing Station executing Master
D9205
station forward loopback station
Forward loop Reverse loop
Loopack executing Station executing In the above example, 1 is stored into D9205 and 3 into D9206. If data
D9206
station reverse loopback link returns to normal status (data link in forward loop), values in D9205
and D9206 remain 1 and 3. Reset using sequence program or the
RESET key.
Stores the data link processing time with all local and remote I/O
D9207 Link scan time Maximum value stations.
• Input (X) , output (Y) , link relay (B) , and link register (W) assigned in
D9208 Link scan time Minimum value link parameters communicate with the corresponding stations every
link scan.
• Link scan is a period of time during which data link is executed with
D9209 Link scan time Present value all connected slave stations, independently of the sequence program
scan time
Stores the number of retry times due to transmission error.
D9210 Retry count Total number stored Count stops at maximum of "FFFFH" .
RESET to return the count to 0.
Stores the number of times the loop line has been switched to reverse
Loop switching loop or loopback.
D9211 Total number stored
count Count stops at maximum of "FFFFH".
RESET to return the count to 0.
App - 41
APPENDICES
MELSEC-Q

Stores the local station numbers which are in STOP or PAUSE mode.
Local station Stores the status of
D9212 Device Bit
operating status stations 1 to 16 number
D9212 L16 L15 L14 L13 L12 L11 L10 L9 L8 L7 L6 L5 L4 L3 L2 L1

Local station Stores the status of D9213 L32 L31 L30 L29 L28 L27 L26 L25 L24 L23 L22 L21 L20 L19 L18 L17
D9213
operating status stations 17 to 32 D9214 L48 L47 L46 L45 L44 L43 L42 L41 L40 L39 L38 L37 L36 L35 L34 L33

D9214 When a local station is switched to STOP or PAUSE mode, the bit
operating status stations 33 to 48
corresponding to the station number in the register becomes "1" .
Example : When station 7 switches to STOP mode, bit 6 in D9212
D9215 becomes "1" , and when D9212 is monitored, its value is "64
operating status stations 49 to 64
(40H) " .
Stores the local station numbers which are in error.
Local station error Stores the status of
D9216 Device Bit
detection stations 1 to 16 number

Local station error Stores the status of D9217 L32 L31 L30 L29 L28 L27 L26 L25 L24 L23 L22 L21 L20 L19 L18 L17
D9217
detection stations 17 to 32 D9218 L48 L47 L46 L45 L44 L43 L42 L41 L40 L39 L38 L37 L36 L35 L34 L33

D9218 If a local station detects an error, the bit corresponding to the station
detection stations 33 to 48
number becomes "1".
Example : When station 6 and 12 detect an error, bits 5 and 11 in
D9219 D9216 become "1", and when D9216 is monitored, its value
detection stations 49 to 64
is "2080 (820H)".
Local station Stores the local station numbers which contain mismatched parameters
parameter or of remote station numbers for which incorrect I/O assignment has
Stores the status of
D9220 mismatched or been made.
stations 1 to 16
remote station I/O Device Bit
number
assignment error b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

Local station
parameter
Stores the status of D9222 L48 L47 L46 L45 L44 L43 L42 L41 L40 L39 L38 L37 L36 L35 L34 L33
D9221 mismatched or D9223 L64 L63 L62 L61 L60 L59 L58 L57 L56 L55 L54 L53 L52 L51 L50 L49
stations 17 to 32.
remote station I/O
assignment error If a local station acting as the master station of tier three detects a
Local station parameter error or a remote station contains an invalid I/O assignment,
parameter the bit corresponding to the station number becomes "1" .
Stores the status of Example: When local station 5 and remote I/O station 14 detect an
D9222 mismatched or
stations 33 to 48. error, bits 4 and 13 in D9220 become "1" , and when D9220
remote station I/O
assignment error is monitored, its value is "8208 (2010H) " .
Local station
parameter
D9223 mismatched or
stations 49 to 64.
remote station I/O
assignment error
App - 42
APPENDICES
MELSEC-Q

Initial communication Stores the local or remote station numbers while they are
D9224 between local or communicating the initial data with their relevant master station.
stations 1 to 16
remote I/O stations Device Bit
number b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
Initial communication D9224 L/R L/R L/R L/R L/R L/R L/R L/R L/R L/R L/R L/R L/R L/R L/R L/R
Stores the status of 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
D9225 between local or D9225 L/R
32
L/R
31
L/R
30
L/R
29
L/R
28
L/R
27
L/R
26
L/R
25
L/R
24
L/R
23
L/R
22
L/R
21
L/R
20
L/R
19
L/R
18
L/R
17
stations 17 to 32 L/R L/R L/R L/R L/R L/R L/R L/R L/R L/R L/R L/R L/R L/R L/R L/R
remote I/O stations D9226 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33
D9227 L/R L/R L/R L/R L/R L/R L/R L/R L/R L/R L/R L/R L/R L/R L/R L/R
64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49
Initial communication
D9226 between local or The bit corresponding to the station number which is currently
stations 33 to 48
remote I/O stations communicating the initial settings becomes "1" .
Example: When stations 23 and 45 are communicating, bit 6 of D9225
Initial communication and bit 12 of D9226 become "1", and when D9225 is
D9227 between local or monitored, its value is "64 (40H)", and when D9226 is
stations 49 to 64
remote I/O stations monitored, its value is "4096 (1000H)"
Local or remote I/O Stores the status of Stores the local or remote station numbers which are in error.
D9228 Bit
station error stations 1 to 16 Device
Local or remote I/O Stores the status of 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
D9229 D9229 L/R
32
L/R
31
L/R
30
L/R
29
L/R
28
L/R
27
L/R
26
L/R
25
L/R
24
L/R
23
L/R
22
L/R
21
L/R
20
L/R
19
L/R
18
L/R
17
station error stations 17 to 32 L/R L/R L/R L/R L/R L/R L/R L/R L/R L/R L/R L/R L/R L/R L/R L/R
D9230 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33
64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49
Local or remote I/O Stores the status of
D9230
station error stations 33 to 48 The bit corresponding to the station number with the error becomes "1"
Example: When local station 3 and remote I/O station 14 have an error,
Local or remote I/O Stores the status of bits 2 and 13 of D9228 become "1", and when D9228 is
D9231
station error stations 49 to 64 monitored, its value is "8196 (2004H)".
Stores the local or remote station number at which a forward or reverse
D9232 loop error has occurred
station loop error stations 1 to 8.
Device Bit
Local or remote I/O Stores the status of R F R F R F R F R F R F R F R F
D9233 D9232
station loop error stations 9 to 16 L/R8 L/R7 L/R6 L/R5 L/R4 L/R3 L/R2 L/R1
R F R F R F R F R F R F R F R F
D9233
L/R16 L/R15 L/R14 L/R13 L/R12 L/R11 L/R10 L/R9
D9234 R F R F R F R F R F R F R F R F
station loop error stations 17 to 24 D9234
D9235
Local or remote I/O Stores the status of L/R32 L/R31 L/R30 L/R29 L/R28 L/R27 L/R26 L/R25
D9235
station loop error stations 25 to 32 D9236

Local or remote I/O Stores the status of D9237
D9236 L/R48 L/R47 L/R46 L/R45 L/R44 L/R43 L/R42 L/R41
station loop error stations 33 to 40 R F R F R F R F R F R F R F R F
D9238
Local or remote I/O Stores the status of D9239
D9237 L/R64 L/R63 L/R62 L/R61 L/R60 L/R59 L/R58 L/R57
station loop error stations 41to 48
In the above table, "F" indicates a forward loop line and "R" a reverse
Local or remote I/O Stores the status of loop line .The bit corresponding to the station number at which the
D9238
station loop error stations 49 to 56 forward or reverse loop error has occurred, becomes "1"
Example: When the forward loop line of station 5 has an error, bit 8 of
Local or remote I/O Stores the status of D9232 become "1" , and when D9232 is monitored, its value
D9239
station loop error stations 57 to 64 is "256 (100H)" .
Stores the number of times the following transmission errors have been
detected:
Number of receive
D9240 Total number stored CRC, OVER, AB. IF
error detection times
Count is made to a maximum of FFFFH. RESET to return the count to
0.
App - 43
APPENDICES
MELSEC-Q
(2) Link special registers only valid when the host station is a local
station
Link Special Register List

Own station number Stores a station number.
D9243 Allows a local station to confirm its own station number
check (0 to 64)
Total number of slave Stores the number of
D9244 Indicates the number of slave stations in one loop.
stations slave station
Stores the number of times the following transmission errors have
Number of receive been detected: CRC, OVER, AB. IF
D9245 Total number stored
error detection times Count is made to a maximum of FFFFH. RESET to return the
count to 0.
Stores the local station number which is in STOP or PAUSE
Local station operating Stores the status of
D9248 mode.
status stations 1 to 16
Device Bit
Local station operating Stores the status of D9248 L16 L15 L14 L13 L12 L11 L10 L9 L8 L7 L6 L5 L4 L3 L2 L1
D9249 D9249 L32 L31 L30 L29 L28 L27 L26 L25 L24 L23 L22 L21 L20 L19 L18 L17
D9250 The bit corresponding to the station number which is in STOP or
PAUSE mode, becomes "1" .
Example: When local stations 7 and 15 are in STOP mode, bits 6
D9251 and 14 of D9248 become "1" , and when D9248 is
monitored, its value is "16448 (4040H)" .
Stores the local station number other than the host, which is in
D9252 Local station error error.
stations 1 to 16
Device Bit
number b7 b5
b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b6 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
Stores the status of D9252 L16 L15 L14 L13 L12 L11 L10 L9 L8 L7 L6 L5 L4 L3 L2 L1
D9253 Local station error D9253 L32 L31 L30 L29 L28 L27 L26 L25 L24 L23 L22 L21 L20 L19 L18 L17
stations 17 to 32
D9254 Local station error The bit corresponding to the station number which is in error,
stations 33 to 48
becomes "1" .
Example: When local station 12 is in error, bit 11 of D9252
D9255 Local station error becomes "1" , and when D9252 is monitored, its value
stations 49 to 64
is "2048 (800H) " .
App - 44
APPENDICES
MELSEC-Q
Appendix 3 Peripheral Devices
(1) The following table shows whether the peripheral devices and system FD which
are used by the conventional system can be used or not.
Model Name of the Model Name of the Model Name of the PC
Usable or Not Usable Range
Peripheral Device Software Package at the Startup
SW4GP-GPPAA Usable Device range of A3ACPU A3A
A6GPP/A6PHP SW3GP-GPPA Usable Device range of A3HCPU A3H
Prior to SW2 -type Not usable  
SW3-HGPA Usable Device range of A3HCPU A3H
A6HGP
Prior to SW2 -type Not usable  
A2USH (displayed at
A8PU  Usable Device range of A3ACPU
the startup)
A7PU A2USH (displayed at
 Usable Device range of A3HCPU
A7PUS the startup)
Software version "E" or
Usable Device range of A3ACPU 
later
A6WU
Software version "D" or
Not usable  
earlier
(2) The compatibility of the conventional products (existing system products) and the
new products (AnU-compatible products) are listed in the following table.
Product Used to Write Product Used to Read
No. Compatible
to the CPU from the CPU
Conventional product New Product
1
(PC: A3A startup) (PC: A3A startup)
• All the data is compatible.
New Product Conventional product
2
(PC: A3A startup) (PC: A3A startup)
• Because the model names of the PCs for write and read are
Conventional product New Product
3 different, the following things apply.
(PC: A3A startup) (PC: A3U startup)
1 When the verification is executed after the readout, the
verification fails. (The data is usable.)
2 The setting values (data stored in the CPU) of the sampling
New Product Conventional product trace/status latch cannot be displayed.
4
(PC: A3U startup) (PC: A3A startup)
3 When the network parameters are set in the new product, they
cannot be displayed on the conventional product.
POINT
Do not execute readout and the following operations to a conventional product from
the QCPU-A in which the MELSECNET/10 network parameters have been set by
the new product, because "LINK PARA.ERROR" (CPU error) will occur:
(a) Modifying and writing in the main sequence program area (memory capacity).
(b) Writing the readout parameters to another QCPU-A in the network system.
App - 45
APPENDICES
MELSEC-Q
Appendix 4 Precautions When the Existing Sequence Programs Are Diverted for the QCPU-A
The precautions for diverting the sequence programs created for the A1SCPU and
A2SCPU for the QCPU-A are explained.
The sequence programs created for the A2USCPU(S1) can directly be used for the
QCPU-A.
POINTS
(1) The following three instructions created exclusively for the AnUCPU can be
used by adding to the existing sequence program.
ZNWR instruction ................. For writing to word devices of the stations
connected to the MELSECNET/10
ZNRD instruction .................. For reading from word devices of the stations
connected to the MELSECNET/10
ZCOM instruction ................. MELSECNET/10 network refresh instruction
(2) All of the sequence programs for the A1SCPU and A2SCPU can be used.
(3) The following instructions cannot be used by the QCPU-A as they cannot be
used by the A2USCPU(S1). Please note, however, that the handling is different
between the A2USCPU(S1) and QCPU-A when they are used mistakenly.
Item QCPU-A, A2USCPU(S1)

Q2USHCPU-S1
LED, LEDC instruction No error occurs. "INSTRCT CODE ERR." occurs.
CHG instruction Error code 13 occurs. Error code 10 occurs.
Appendix 4.1 Instructions with different specifications
Modifications to the sequence program to use the instructions of different specifications

are explained.
Basically, the instructions which are not listed in this section do not require
modifications.
(1) CHK instruction.........Modifications are necessary when the A1SCPU and
A2SCPU are used in the refresh method.
Output reverse instruction
X005 K4 X005
CHK Y010 M1 LEDB FF
LEDC Y010
LEDR
ON
X5
OFF
ON
Y10 OFF
App - 46
APPENDICES
MELSEC-Q
(2) DI/EI instruction...............Modifications are necessary when the special relay

M9053 is ON.
• Enable and disable (EI, DI) of the link refresh is executable when M9053 is
turned ON.
• Because the QCPU-A executes the link refresh by the END processing, the link
refresh cannot be enabled and disabled while the sequence program is being
executed.
• Modify the sequence program.
(3) LEDA/LEDB instruction

X001 X001
LEDA ABCDEFGH ASC ABCDEFGH D0
LEDB IJKLMNOP ASC IJKLMNOP D1
LED D0
(4) SUB, SUBP instruction..........Unusable

• The SUB instruction cannot be used because the QCPU-A cannot store the
microcomputer program.
• All of the contents which are processed by the microcomputer area need to be
changed to the program using the dedicated instructions in order to be used by
the QCPU-A.
Appendix 4.2 Special relays and special registers with different specifications
The QCPU-A does not use the following special relays and special registers.
Even though no error occurs when the following special relays and special registers
exist in the diverted program (ignored), it is recommended that they are deleted from
the program.
• M9010...........Turned ON when a operation error occurs and turned OFF when the
error disappears.
• M9053...........Link refresh enable of the EI instruction /interrupt enable instruction of
the interrupt program, DI instruction to the link refresh disable/interrupt
disable instruction of the interrupt program.
App - 47
APPENDICES
MELSEC-Q
Appendix 4.3 Parameter setting
The parameters set by the existing CPU can be used as is if the following items do not
apply to them.
Setting Item Description
The microcomputer area of the QCPU-A is for the SFC only.
"PARAMETER ERROR" occurs if a utility package of the
Microcomputer program capacity
microcomputer program is stored in the microcomputer area of
the existing CPU.
Registering the model name of the When the AD57 module or AD57-S1 module is used in the
module by the I/O assignment existing system, the utility package of the SW -AD57P is
stored in the microcomputer program area.
By the system FD which is The QCPU-A system does not allow the AD57 or AD57-S1 to
compatible with the QCPU-A be loaded.
The following items are executed differently from the parameter setting of the existing
CPU.
• Watchdog timer setting ...............The setting time is ignored and processed by 200ms.
• Interrupt counter setting..............The interrupt counter set by the A1SCPU and
A2SCPU are ignored and treated as a normal
counter by the sequence program.
App - 48
APPENDICES
MELSEC-Q
Appendix 4.4 I/O control method
The I/O control method of the QCPU-A is the refresh method (partial direct I/O
depending on the instruction), and is different from that of the A1SCPU and A2SCPU.
Therefore, pay attention to the input timing of the input (X) and the output timing of the
output (Y).
(1) Program to process to pulses by the SET/RST instruction

Program as follows in order for the QCPU-A to execute the pulse output to the
outside by the SET/RST instruction while in the direct method of the A1SCPU
and A2SCPU.
For direct method of the For direct method of the QCPU-A

A1SCPU and A2SCPU X0
SET Y10
X0 SET M9052
SET Y10 (a) When the
SEG K4Y10 K4B1
instructions
to
common to the to
RST Y10 ACPU are used:

RST Y10
SEG K4Y10 K4B1
RST M9052
X0
LEDA DSET
LEDB Y10
(b) When the
LEDR
instructions
dedicated to the to
QCPU-A are
LEDA DRST
used:
LEDC Y10
LEDR
POINT
Use the program above in order to send the pulse signal output to the special
function module when a special function module is used, such as the A1SD61-type
high-speed counter module.
App - 49
APPENDICES
MELSEC-Q
Appendix 4.5 Microcomputer program
The utility software packages and the microcomputer programs created by the user
which are used by the A1SCPU and A2SCPU cannot be used by the QCPU-A
because it does not have the microcomputer mode. (The microcomputer program area
of the QCPU-A is for the SFC only.)
When the utility software packages or the microcomputer programs above are used,
delete all of the SUB instructions (microcomputer program call) used for executing
them from the sequence program.
When the following utility package is used, modify the program using instructions
dedicated to the QCPU-A.
1 SW -UTLP-FNO······· AnSH/AnACPU/AnUCPU Programming Manual (Dedicated
Instruction) IB-66251
2 SW -UTLP-PID········ AnACPU/AnUCPU Programming Manual (PID) IB-66258
3 SW -AD57P
4 SW -SIMA
Unusable
5 SW -UTLP-FDI
6 SW -SAPA
Appendix 4.6 Processing of the index register
The index register of the QCPU-A is written over again to the value prior to the
execution of the interrupt program when the processing is handed over to the main or
sequence program even if the value was updated by the interrupt program.
MOV K5 Z No write
instruction
1 Z=5 to Z 1 Z=0
Main sequence
program
Interrupt Interrupt
occurred 4 Z=5 occurred 4 Z=0
MOV K10 Z 2 Z=5 MOV K10 Z 2 Z=0

Interrupt program
3 Z=10 3 Z=10
App - 50
APPENDICES
MELSEC-Q
Appendix 5 List of Instruction Processing Time
The following table shows the instruction processing time of QCPU-A (A mode).
(1) Sequence instructions

Instruction Processing Time (µs)
Instruction Condition (Device)
QnCPU-A QnHCPU-A
LD, LDI X 0.079 0.034
AND, ANI
OR, ORI Y, M, L, S, B, F, T, C 0.079 0.034
At no change (OFF OFF, ON ON) 0.158 0.068

Y
At change (OFF ON, ON OFF) 0.158 0.068
M (except for At no change (OFF OFF, ON ON) 0.158 0.068
special M)
At change (OFF ON, ON OFF) 0.158 0.068
LSB
Special M 0.316 0.136
At no execution 1.11 0.480
F
At execution 35.1 15.1
Instruction execution time 0.158 0.068
OUT Time for no execution 0.088 0.037
T After time elapsed 1.80 0.774
END
At execution K 3.07 1.32
At addition
D 3.31 1.42
Instruction execution time 0.158 0.068
Time for no execution 0.105 0.045
At no counting 0.105 0.045
C
END After counting up 0.105 0.045
At execution
K 1.67 0.720
At counting
D 1.91 0.823
Y At no change (ON ON) 0.158 0.068
At execution
At change (OFF ON) 0.158 0.068
SET
M, L
At no change (ON ON) 0.158 0.068
S, B At execution
At change (OFF ON) 0.158 0.068
App - 51
APPENDICES
MELSEC-Q

QnCPU-A QnHCPU-A
Special M At no execution 0.316 0.136
B At execution 0.316 0.136
SET
F
Y At no change 0.158 0.068
At execution
At change 0.158 0.068
M, L
At no change 0.158 0.068
S, B At execution
At change 0.158 0.068
Special M At no execution 0.316 0.136
B At execution 0.316 0.136
RST
F
T At no execution 0.561 0.242
C At execution 2.24 0.962
W, A0, A1 At no execution 0.561 0.242
V, Z At execution 3.35 1.44
R
NOP 0.079 0.034
FEND When M9084 is OFF 339 145
END When M9084 is ON 253 110
Y
MC
M, LS, BF
MCR 0.237 0.101
Y ON 0.877 0.376
At execution
PLS OFF 0.877 0.376
PLF At no execution 0.877 0.376
L, B, F ON 0.877 0.376
At execution
OFF 0.877 0.376
App - 52
APPENDICES
MELSEC-Q

QnCPU-A QnHCPU-A
Y
SFT At execution 1.75 0.755
SFTP At no execution 0.561 0.242
M, L, B, F
MPS 0.079 0.034
MRD 0.079 0.034
MPP 0.079 0.034
Without index qualification 2.72 1.17
CJ
With index qualification 2.72 1.17
SCJ
JMP 2.72 1.17
CALL
CALLP
RET 2.79 1.20
EI 1.19 0.514
DI 1.27 0.548
IRET 1.36 0.586
Without index qualification
SUB
With index qualification
Without index qualification
SUBP
With index qualification
When M9084 is OFF
CHG
When M9084 is ON
FOR 2.31 0.997
NEXT 3.19 1.38
STOP
App - 53
APPENDICES
MELSEC-Q
(2) Basic instructions

QnCPU-A QnHCPU-A
LD= 1.67 0.721
AND= 1.27 0.546
OR= 1.76 0.758
LDD= 4.50 1.94
ANDD= 3.48 1.50
ORD= 4.43 1.91
LD<> 1.92 0.829
AND<> 1.28 0.553
OR<> 1.76 0.758
LDD<> 4.26 1.84
ANDD<> 3.49 1.51
ORD<> 4.18 1.80
LD> 1.92 0.829
AND> 1.28 0.553
OR> 1.76 0.758
LDD> 4.26 1.84
ANDD> 3.49 1.51
ORD> 4.18 1.80
LD>= 1.92 0.829
AND>= 1.28 0.553
OR>= 1.76 0.758
LDD>= 4.26 1.84
ANDD>= 3.49 1.51
ORD>= 4.18 1.80
LD< 1.92 0.829
AND< 1.28 0.553
OR< 1.76 0.758
LDD< 4.26 1.84
ANDD< 3.49 1.51
ORD< 4.18 1.80
LD<= 1.92 0.829
AND<= 1.28 0.553
OR<= 1.76 0.758
LDD<= 4.26 1.84
ANDD<= 3.49 1.51
ORD<= 4.18 1.80
App - 54
APPENDICES
MELSEC-Q

QnCPU-A QnHCPU-A
+ S D 1.11 0.480
+P S D 1.11 0.480
D+ S D 1.60 0.688
D+P S D 1.60 0.688
+ S1 S2 D 1.27 0.548
+P S1 S2 D 1.27 0.548
D+ S1 S2 D 1.83 0.790
D+P S1 S2 D 1.83 0.790
- S D 1.11 0.480
-P S D 1.11 0.480
D- S D 1.60 0.688
D-P S D 1.60 0.688
- S1 S2 D 1.27 0.548
-P S1 S2 D 1.27 0.548
D- S1 S2 D 1.83 0.790
D-P S1 S2 D 1.83 0.790
S1 S2 D 1.36 0.586
P S1 S2 D 1.36 0.586
D S1 S2 D 7.97 3.43
D P S1 S2 D 7.97 3.43
/ S1 S2 D 4.38 1.89
/P S1 S2 D 4.38 1.89
D/ S1 S2 D 14.4 6.20
D/P S1 S2 D 14.377 6.20
INC 0.798 0.344
INCP 0.798 0.344
DINC 0.956 0.412
DINCP 0.956 0.412
DEC 0.798 0.344
DECP 0.798 0.344
DDEC 0.956 0.412
DDECP 0.956 0.412
B+ S D 2.55 1.10
B+P S D 2.55 1.10
DB+ S D 13.6 5.86
DB+P S D 13.6 5.86
B+ S1 S2 D 5.58 2.40
B+P S1 S2 D 5.58 2.40
DB+ S1 S2 D 12.4 5.32
DB+P S1 S2 D 12.4 5.32
App - 55
APPENDICES
MELSEC-Q

QnCPU-A QnHCPU-A
B- S D 2.47 1.07
B-P S D 2.47 1.07
DB- S D 12.7 5.48
DB-P S D 12.7 5.48
B- S1 S2 D 5.58 2.40
B-P S1 S2 D 5.58 2.40
DB- S1 S2 D 11.6 4.99
DB-P S1 S2 D 11.6 4.99
B S1 S2 D 5.58 2.40
B P S1 S2 D 5.58 2.40
DB S1 S2 D 35.5 15.3
DB P S1 S2 D 35.5 15.3
B/ S1 S2 D 4.38 1.89
B/P S1 S2 D 4.38 1.89
DB/ S1 S2 D 24.7 10.7
DB/P S1 S2 D 24.7 10.7
BCD 1.19 0.51
BCDP 1.19 0.51
DBCD 5.18 2.23
DBCDP 5.18 2.23
BIN 1.19 0.51
BINP 1.19 0.51
DBIN 2.39 1.03
DBINP 2.39 1.03
MOV 0.482 0.208
MOVP 0.482 0.208
DMOV 1.27 0.548
DMOVP 1.27 0.548
XCH 1.11 0.480
XCHP 1.11 0.480
DXCH 1.61 0.722
DXCHP 1.61 0.722
CML 0.956 0.412
CMLP 0.956 0.412
DCML 1.27 0.548
DCMLP 1.27 0.548
BMOV S D n n=96 28.7 12.4
BMOVP S D n n=96 28.7 12.4
FMOV S D n n=96 12.7 5.48
FMOVP S D n n=96 12.7 5.48
App - 56
APPENDICES
MELSEC-Q
(3) Application instructions

QnCPU-A QnHCPU-A
WAND S D 1.11 0.480
WANDP S D 1.11 0.480
DAND 5.18 2.23
DANDP 5.18 2.23
WAND S1 S2 D 3.03 1.30
WANDP S1 S2 D 3.03 1.30
WOR S D 1.11 0.480
WORP S D 1.11 0.480
DOR 5.18 2.23
DORP 5.18 2.23
WOR S1 S2 D 3.03 1.30
WORP S1 S2 D 3.03 1.30
WXOR S D 1.11 0.480
WXORP S D 1.11 0.480
DXOR 5.18 2.23
DXORP 5.18 2.23
WXOR S1 S2 D 3.03 1.30
WXORP S1 S2 D 3.03 1.30
WXNR S D 1.19 0.514
WXNRP S D 1.19 0.514
DXNR 5.98 2.58
DXNRP 5.98 2.58
WXNR S1 S2 D 3.11 1.34
WXNRP S1 S2 D 3.11 1.34
NEG 3.43 1.48
NEGP 3.43 1.48
App - 57
APPENDICES
MELSEC-Q

QnCPU-A QnHCPU-A
ROR n n=5 2.31 0.997
RORP n n=5 2.31 0.997
RCR n n=5 2.55 1.10
RCRP n n=5 2.55 1.10
ROL n n=5 2.31 0.997
ROLP n n=5 2.31 0.997
RCL n n=5 2.55 1.10
RCLP n n=5 2.55 1.10
DROR n n=5 4.38 1.89
DRORP n n=5 4.38 1.89
DRCR n n=5 4.78 2.06
DRCRP n n=5 4.78 2.06
DROL n n=5 3.99 1.72
DROLP n n=5 3.99 1.72
DRCL n n=5 4.78 2.06
DRCLP n n=5 4.78 2.06
SFR D n n=5 1.99 0.86
SFRP D n n=5 1.99 0.86
BSFR D n n=5 11.6 4.99
BSFRP D n n=5 11.6 4.99
DSFR D n n=5 7.49 3.23
DSFRP D n n=5 7.49 3.23
SFL D n n=5 1.91 0.82
SFLP D n n=5 1.91 0.82
BSFL D n n=5 11.1 4.80
BSFLP D n n=5 11.1 4.80
DSFL D n n=5 8.77 3.78
DSFLP D n n=5 8.77 3.78
SER S1 S2 n n=5 13.2 5.67
SERP S1 S2 n n=5 13.2 5.67
App - 58
APPENDICES
MELSEC-Q

QnCPU-A QnHCPU-A
SUM 5.98 2.58
SUMP 5.98 2.58
DSUM 13.6 5.59
DSUMP 13.6 5.59
DECO S D n n=2 11.1 4.80
DECOP S D n n=2 11.1 4.80
SEG 2.55 1.10
ENCO S D n n=2 15.2 6.54
ENCOP S D n n=2 15.2 6.54
BSET D n n=5 3.82 1.65
BSETP D n n=5 3.82 1.65
BRST D n n=5 3.82 1.65
BRSTP D n n=5 3.82 1.65
UNI S D n n=4 12.4 5.32
UNIP S D n n=4 12.4 5.32
DIS S D n n=4 9.96 4.29
DISP S D n n=4 9.96 4.29
ASC 1.36 0.586
FIFW 18.0 3.44
FIFWP 7.98 3.44
FIFR 27.5 11.8
FIFRP 27.5 11.8
n2=1 33.0 27.4
LRDP n1 S D n2
n2=32 33.0 27.4
n2=1 34.9 29.0
LWTP n1 S D n2
n2=32 54.6 45.3
n3=1 14.5 12.0
RFRP n1 n2 D n3
n3=32 14.5 12.0
n3=1 15.5 12.9
RTOP n1 n2 S n3
n3=32 15.5 12.9
App - 59
APPENDICES
MELSEC-Q

QnCPU-A QnHCPU-A
WDT 1.99 0.858
WDTP 1.99 0.858
When the number of conditional contacts is 1 13.2 5.67
When the number of conditional contacts is 50 500 216
CHK
Device memory only 4555 1744
SLT
Device memory + R (8K points) 6123 2259
SLTR 2.63 1.13
STRA 1.99 0.858
STRAR 1.99 0.858
STC 0.956 0.412
CTC 0.956 0.412
DUTY 5.58 2.40
PR 29.5 12.7
PRC 14.7 6.35
CHK
LED
LEDA
LEDB
LEDR 41.8 18.0
n3 = 1, X, Y 180 143
FROM n3 = Other than 1, X, or Y 170 141
FROMP n3 = 112, X, Y 1117 761
n3 = Other than 1000, X, or Y 3346 3161
n3 = 1, X, Y 184 154
DFRO n3 = Other than 1, X, or Y 175 152
DFROP n3 = 56, X, Y 875 741
n3 = Other than 500, X, or Y 3321 3157
n3 = 1, X, Y 173 93.7
TO n3 = Other than 1, X, or Y 173 93.3
TOP n3 = 112, X, Y 751 441
n3 = Other than 1000, X, or Y 3126 3055
n3 = 1, X, Y 181 101
DTO n3 = Other than 1, X, or Y 184 101
DTOP n3 = 56, X, Y 694 441
n3 = Other than 500, X, or Y 3122 3060
App - 60
APPENDICES
MELSEC-Q
(4) Dedicated instructions

Category Instruction Name Condition
QnCPU-A QnHCPU-A
DOUT 17.8 7.66
Direct processing
DSET 17.6 7.59
instruction
DRST 17.6 7.59
IX 20.3 8.27
IXEND 3.35 1.44
Structured program BREAK 24.3 10.5
instruction FCALL 21.9 9.44
CHK 2.95 1.27
CHKEND 1.11 0.48
1 point 47.6 20.5
DSER 5 point 51.1 22.0
96 point 137 59.1
SWAP 14.8 6.36
1-bit designation 44.2 19.0
DIS 1-, 4-, 8-, 12-, and 15-bit
Data operation instruction 55.8 24.0
designation
1-bit designation 44.6 19.2
UNI 1-, 4-, 8-, 12-, and 15-bit
57.3 24.7
designation
TEST 28.7 12.4
DTEST 29.1 121
FF 16.1 6.92
I/O operation instruction
KEY 46.5 20.0
BSQR 54.6 23.5
BDSQR 51.0 22.0
BSIN 23.9 10.3
BCD type real number BCOS 24.7 10.7
processing instruction BTAN 24.7 10.7
BASIN 33.5 14.4
BACOS 33.8 14.6
BATAN 38.7 16.7
INT 37.4 16.1
DINT 38.2 16.5
FLOAT 37.4 16.1
DFLOAT 41.5 17.9
Floating-point type real
ADD 288 109
number processing
SUB 292 110
instruction
MUL 276 104
DIV 452 171
RAD 223 84.1
DEG 204 77.1
App - 61
APPENDICES
MELSEC-Q

QnCPU-A QnHCPU-A
SIN 4252 1056
COS 2613 1126
TAN 2639 1137
ASIN 4662 2009
Floating-point type real
ACOS 4642 2000
number processing
ATAN 3522 1518
instruction
SQR 1901 819
EXP 2379 1025
log1 486 209
LOG
log10 2160 931
BINDA 27.1 11.8
DBINDA 97.2 41.9
BINHA 29.5 12.7
DBINHA 35.1 15.1
BCDDA 34.6 14.9
DBCDDA 41.0 17.7
DABIN 82.8 35.7
DDABIN 124 53.6
HABIN 30.2 13.0
DHABIN 41.5 17.9
DABCD 32.3 13.9
DDABCD 46.2 19.9
COMRD 40.2 17.3
1 character 26.7 11.5
Character-string LEN
processing instruction
STR 53.8 23.2
DSTR 115 49.6
VAL 94.1 40.5
DVAL 168 72.3
ASC
96 character 300 129
HEX
SMOV
96 character 131 56.3
1 character + 1 character 74.5 32.1
SADD
96 characters + 96 characters 318 137
SCMP
96 character 189 81.6
App - 62
APPENDICES
MELSEC-Q

QnCPU-A QnHCPU-A
1 byte 48.6 20.9
WTOB
Character-string 96 byte 101 43.6
processing instruction 1 byte 46.2 19.9
BTOW
96 byte 84.1 36.2
LIMIT 33.8 14.6
DLIMIT 35.1 15.1
BAND 88.8 15.6
Data operation instruction
DBAND 34.6 14.9
ZONE 33.5 14.4
DZONE 34.3 14.8
DATERD 17.1 7.37
Clock instruction
DATEWR 19.1 8.24
RSET 16.6 7.15
1 point 44.5 19.1
BMOVR
96 point 59.9 25.7
1 point 50.4 21.6
Expansion file register BXCHR
96 point 80.9 34.6
instruction
ZRRD 5.68 2.41
ZRWR 5.66 2.42
ZRRDB 5.91 2.54
ZRWRB 6.14 2.64
LRDP 54.9 23.5
LWTP 54.9 23.5
Data link instruction
RFRP 61.3 26.2
RTOP 54.9 25.8
PVWR1 111 84.4
PVWR2 111 84.5
SVWR1 118 91.2
MD61 (S1) instruction
SVWR2 118 91.4
PVRD1 112 82.2
PVRD2 113 82.6
App - 63
APPENDICES
MELSEC-Q

QnCPU-A QnHCPU-A
2 words 265 220
PRN
96 words 647 537
2 words 167 139
PR
AJ71UC24 instruction 96 words 694 576
INPUT 100 words 441 366
SPBUSY 45.9 38.1
SPCLR 42.1 34.9
INPUT
189 157
(Operating box)
PRN 1 character 243 202
AJ35PTF-R2 96 character 626 519
PR 1 character 240 199
AJ35PTF-R2 96 character 535 444
AJ71PT32-S3 instruction INPUT
AJ35PTF-R2
FROM/TO instruction: 1 76.5 63.5
MINI
FROM/TO instruction: 16 491 407
MINIERR 41.1 34.1
SPBUSY 69.8 58.0
SPCLR 84.2 69.9
ZCOM 34.0 14.6
ZNRD 86.2 29.7
Data link instruction ZNWR 87.3 29.7
ZNFR 65.2 27.9
ZNTO 65.4 28.0
1 station 0.173 0.116
RLPA
64 station 0.600 0.500
1 point 0.192 0.150
RRPA
4096 point 0.192 0.171
1 point 0.217 0.153
RIFR
4096 point 13.3 12.3
1 point 0.277 0.220
RITO
CC-Link dedicated 4096 point 12.8 12.7
instruction 1 point 0.326 0.340
RIRD
480 point 0.315 0.300
1 point 0.298 0.350
RIWT
480 point 1.75 1.68
1 point 0.337 0.320
RISEND
480 point 1.17 1.10
1 point 0.361 0.301
RIRCV
480 point 0.370 0.380
1ms-timer setting
ZHTIME 5.42 2.33
instruction
App - 64
APPENDICES
MELSEC-Q
Appendix 6 Dimensions
The dimensions of QCPU-A and the base module are shown below:
Appendix 6.1 Dimensions of CPU module
(1) Q02CPU-A
Q02CPU
MODE
RUN
ERR.
USER
BAT.
BOOT
98 (3.86) PULL
RS-232
89.3 (3.52) 27.4 (1.08)
Unit: mm (inch)
(2) Q02HCPU-A, Q06HCPU-A
Q02HCPU
MODE
RUN
ERR.
USER
BAT.
BOOT
98 (3.86)
PULL
USB
RS-232
89.3 (3.52)
27.4 (1.08)
Unit: mm (inch)
App - 65
APPENDICES
MELSEC-Q
Appendix 6.2 Power supply modules
A1S61PN
POWER
MITSUBISHI
INPUT OUTPUT
100 240VAC DC 5V 5A
105VA
50/60Hz
130 (5.11)
NP
6.5 93.6 (3.68) 54.5 (2.14)

(0.25)
Unit: mm (inch)
App - 66
APPENDICES
MELSEC-Q
Appendix 6.3 Dimensions of base module
(1) Basic base module (QA1S33B)
(0.39)
10
OUT
110 (4.33)
130 (5.11)
5V
CPU
SG
FG
POWER I/O0 I/O1 I/O2

QA1S33B
235 (9.25) 10
10
(0.39)
16.4
(0.65) (0.39)
51.2 (2.02) 255 (10.04)
Unit: mm (inch)

(0.39)
10
OUT
130 (5.11)
110 (4.33)
5V
CPU
SG
FG
POWER I/O0 I/O1 I/O2 I/O3 I/O4

QA1S35B
(0.39)
16.4 10 305 (12.01) 10

10
(0.65) 51.2 (2.02) (0.39) (0.39)

325 (12.8)
Unit: mm (inch)

(0.39)
10
OUT
110 (4.33)
130 (5.11)
5V
CPU
SG
FG

QA1S38B
16.4 10 410 (16.14)

(0.39)
10
10
(0.65) (0.39) (0.39)

51.2 (2.02) 430 (16.93)
Unit: mm (inch)
App - 67
APPENDICES
MELSEC-Q
(4) Expansion base module (QA1S65B)
(0.39)
10
130 (5.11) IN OUT
110 (4.33) 5V
SG
FG
POWER I/O0 I/O1 I/O2 I/O3 I/O4

QA1S65B
10 295 (11.61) 10
(0.39)
16.4
10
(0.65) (0.39) 315 (12.40) (0.39)

51.2 (2.02)
Unit: mm (inch)
(5) Expansion base module (QA1S68B)

(0.39)
10
IN OUT
130 (5.11)
110 (4.33)
5V
SG
FG

QA1S68B
10 400 (15.75) 10
(0.39)
16.4
10
(0.65) (0.39) 420 (16.54) (0.39)

51.2 (2.02)
Unit: mm (inch)
App - 68
APPENDICES
MELSEC-Q
MEMO
App - 69
WARRANTY
Please confirm the following product warranty details before starting use.
1. Gratis Warranty Term and Gratis Warranty Range

If any faults or defects (hereinafter "failure") found to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi occurs during use of the product
within the gratis warranty term, the product shall be repaired at no cost via the dealer or Mitsubishi Service Company.
Note that if repairs are required at a site overseas, on a detached island or remote place, expenses to dispatch an
engineer shall be charged for.
[Gratis Warranty Term]
The gratis warranty term of the product shall be for one year after the date of purchase or delivery to a designated
place.
Note that after manufacture and shipment from Mitsubishi, the maximum distribution period shall be six (6) months, and
the longest gratis warranty term after manufacturing shall be eighteen (18) months. The gratis warranty term of repair
parts shall not exceed the gratis warranty term before repairs.
[Gratis Warranty Range]
(1) The range shall be limited to normal use within the usage state, usage methods and usage environment, etc.,
which follow the conditions and precautions, etc., given in the instruction manual, user's manual and caution labels
on the product.
(2) Even within the gratis warranty term, repairs shall be charged for in the following cases.
1. failure occurring from inappropriate storage or handling, carelessness or negligence by the user. Failure caused
by the user's hardware or software design.
2. Failure caused by unapproved modifications, etc., to the product by the user.
3. When the Mitsubishi product is assembled into a user's device, failure that could have been avoided if functions
or structures, judged as necessary in the legal safety measures the user's device is subject to or as necessary
by industry standards, had been provided.
4. Failure that could have been avoided if consumable parts (battery, backlight, fuse, etc.) designated in the
instruction manual had been correctly serviced or replaced.
5. Failure caused by external irresistible forces such as fires or abnormal voltages, and failure caused by force
majeure such as earthquakes, lightning, wind and water damage.
6. Failure caused by reasons unpredictable by scientific technology standards at time of shipment from Mitsubishi.
7. Any other failure found to not be the responsibility of Mitsubishi or the user.
2. Onerous repair term after discontinuation of production

(1) Mitsubishi shall accept onerous product repairs for seven (7) years after production of the product is discontinued.
Discontinuation of production shall be notified with Mitsubishi Technical Bulletins, etc.
(2) Product supply (including repair parts) is not possible after production is discontinued.
3. Overseas service
Overseas, repairs shall be accepted by Mitsubishi's local overseas FA Center. Note that the repair conditions at each FA
Center may differ.
4. Exclusion of chance loss and secondary loss from warranty liability

Regardless of the gratis warranty term, Mitsubishi shall not be liable for compensation to damages caused by any cause
found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi, chance losses, lost profits incurred to the user by failures in Mitsubishi
products, damages and secondary damages caused from special reasons regardless of Mitsubishi's expectations,
compensation for accidents, and compensation for damages to products other than Mitsubishi products and other duties.
5. Changes in product specifications

The specifications given in the catalogs, manuals or technical documents are subject to change without prior notice.
6. Product application
(1) In using the Mitsubishi MELSEC programmable logic controller, the usage conditions shall be that the application will
not lead to a major accident even if any problem or fault should occur in the programmable logic controller device, and
that backup and fail-safe functions are systematically provided outside of the device for any problem or fault.
(2) The Mitsubishi general-purpose programmable logic controller has been designed and manufactured for applications
in general industries, etc. Thus, applications in which the public could be affected such as in nuclear power plants and
other power plants operated by respective power companies, and applications in which a special quality assurance
system is required, such as for each Japan Railways company or the Department of Defense shall be excluded from
the programmable logic controller applications.
Note that even with these applications, if the user approves that the application is to be limited and a special quality is
not required, application shall be possible.
When considering use in aircraft, medical applications, railways, incineration and fuel devices, manned transport
devices, equipment for recreation and amusement, and safety devices, in which human life or assets could be greatly
affected and for which a particularly high reliability is required fin terms of safety and control system, please consult
with Mitsubishi and discuss the required specifications.
QCPU-A(A Mode)
User's Manual
MODEL QCPU-A(A)-U-SHO-E
MODEL 13JR10
CODE
SH(NA)-080065-B(0003)MEE
HEAD OFFICE : MITSUBISHI DENKI BLDG MARUNOUCHI TOKYO 100-8310 TELEX : J24532 CABLE MELCO TOKYO
NAGOYA WORKS : 1-14 , YADA-MINAMI 5 , HIGASHI-KU, NAGOYA , JAPAN
When exported from Japan, this manual does not require application to the
Ministry of International Trade and Industry for service transaction permission.
Specifications subject to change without notice.

QCPU-A(A Mode),USER MANUAL

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

QCPU-A(A Mode),USER MANUAL

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

QCPU-A(A Mode),USER MANUAL

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

QCPU-A(A Mode)

Procedures which may lead to a dangerous condition and cause

Depending on circumstances, procedures indicated by ! CAUTION may also be linked to serious

Japanese Manual Version SH-080066-B

1.1 Features ................................................................................................................................................... 1- 2

2.1 System Configuration............................................................................................................................... 2- 1

4.1 Performance Specification....................................................................................................................... 4- 1

5. POWER SUPPLY MODULE 5- 1 to 5- 4

5.1 Specifications ........................................................................................................................................... 5- 1

6. BASE MODULE AND EXPANSION CABLE 6- 1 to 6- 6

6.1 Specifications of Base Modules............................................................................................................... 6- 1

7. MEMORY CARD AND BATTERY 7- 1 to 7- 8

7.1 Specifications of Memory Card................................................................................................................ 7- 1

8. EMC DIRECTIVE AND LOW-VOLTAGE INSTRUCTION 8- 1 to 8- 12

8.1 Requirements for Compliance to EMC Directive .................................................................................... 8- 1

9. LOADING AND INSTALLATION 9- 1 to 9- 22

9.1 Module Installation ................................................................................................................................... 9- 1

10. MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION 10- 1 to 10- 4

10.1 Routine Inspection ............................................................................................................................... 10- 2

11. TROUBLESHOOTING 11- 1 to 11- 22

11.1 Fundamentals of Troubleshooting....................................................................................................... 11- 1

Appendix 1 Instruction List........................................................................................................................APP- 1

The following manuals are also related to this product.

ACPU Programming Manual (Common Instructions)

AnSHCPU/AnACPU/AnUCPU Programming Manual (Dedicated Instructions)

AnACPU/AnUCPU Programming Manual (AD57 Instructions)

AnACPU/AnUCPU Programming Manual (PID Instructions) IB-66258

AnS Module type I/O User's Manual IB-66541

Abbreviation/generic name Description

(1) Supplied parts

(1) Faster operation processing

(2) Larger program capacity

(3) More actual I/O points

(4) More expansion stages

(5) Faster communication speed with peripheral devices

2.1 System Configuration 2

(1) Device configuration in the QCPU-A system

1 The operation is not guaranteed

Basic base module Q series power supply, I/O, or

Expansion of AnS series modules

AnS series power supply, I/O, or

2.2 Precautions when configuring the system

(1) A total of 64 I/O modules or special function modules at maximum can be

(2) Up to seven expansion base modules can be connected in the system.

2.2.2 Software package

(2) Utility package

(1) Usable device range

2.3 System Equipment

Number of occupied Current consumption

A1S61PN 5VDC, 5A Installed in the

A1SX10 16-point 100VAC input module 16 [16 input points] 0.05 ——

Number of occupied Current consumption

Number of occupied Current consumption

simultaneous, linear interpolation)

Number of occupied Current consumption

Item Mode Contents Applicable models

(2) Peripheral devices

Item Mode Remark

2.4 System Configuration Overview

There are four system configuration types as follows: